SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Running head: EXERCISE PROGRAMS TO PREVENT FALLS
1
EXERCISE PROGRAMS TO PREVENT FALLS
5
Exercise Programs to Prevent
Fall Related Injuries in Older Adults
Student
Student
Gwynedd Mercy University
Abstract
The implementation of exercise programs was evaluated to
identify best-practice in fall-related injury prevention. This
paper incorporates information from four different studies to
identify the evidence that suggests best-practice protocol.
Evidence of these studies suggests that implementing exercise
programs helps to prevent fall-related injuries in long-term care
facilities for older adults. Incorporating exercise programs
increases patient safety, prevents further injury, and promotes
communication between patients and staff. By implementing
these programs, patients’ overall health improves and they’re
more satisfied by their ability to perform activities of daily
living on a more independent level.
Exercise Programs to Prevent Fall Related Injuries in Older
Adults
As individuals age through life, the risk for falls increase
immensely. This is due to the lack of strength as well as a lack
of balance in the human body. It is important for nurses to take
l precautions to help stop patient falls because in many
instances, falls are preventable (Ambutas, Lamb, & Quigley,
2017). Fall prevention includes important interventions that
stop subsequent injuries from happening to patients. Everyday,
nurses take precautions to prevent falls but additional actions
could be taken in order to make these interventions more
effective. Every patient is at risk of falling, especially older
adults because they lose muscle mass and balance as they age
(Taylor, Lillis, & Lynn, 2015, p. 142). After performing fall-
risk assessments on each patient, nurses implement suggested
best practice protocols for low-risk, moderate-risk, and high-
risk patients. Best practice includes educating patients and
families on fall risk, using bed or chair alarms, lowering the
beds, encouraging regular toileting and other precautions
(Taylor, et al., p. 145). Exercise programs act as another
important measure that nurses could implement, in order to help
patients improve their balance, strength and mobility while
performing activities of daily living, and reduce risk for falls
(Ambutas, Lamb & Quigley).
The following clinical question will be used to identify best
practice related to exercise programs in order to prevent falls in
older adults:
P: Older adults living in long-term care facilities
I: Exercise programs
C: (none)
O: Prevent fall-related injuries
T: (None)
In long-term care facilities for older adults, how do exercise
programs help prevent fall-related injuries?
Review of Literature
Dal Bello-Haas, Thorpe, Lix, Scudds, and Hadjistavropoulos
(2012) completed a quantitative research study that focused on
the implementation of a walking program in long-term care
facilities, in order to prevent falls. Risk for falling increases
with advancing age. The research question that these authors
asked was a to assess the effectiveness of an individualized,
progressive, walking program compared to usual care in
individuals residing in long-term care facilities. The study
participants were over the age of 60, resided in a long-term care
facility, and participated in several different walking programs.
The results of this study suggested increased activity and
participation in exercise contribute to prevention of falls in the
long-term. The researchers stated nurses and health care
providers working in long-term care environments should
implement exercise programs for residents to prevent falls.
Kato, Izumi, Hiramatsu, and Shogenji (2006) also investigated
the use of exercise to prevent falls in the older adult population,
who are at increased risk for falls. The participants in this
quantitative study completed stretching, muscle strengthening,
and toe exercises three times per week. Results of this study
showed older adults who participated in the exercise program
experienced less falls. The researchers suggested exercise
programs were effective in reducing falls in residents of long-
term care facilities and should be considered for use with this
patient population.
In addition to focusing on strength and balance, a quantitative
study by Gschwind, Kressig, Lacroix, Muehlbauer, Pfenninger,
and Granacher (2013) also investigated the effects of exercise
on improvement of psychosocial well-being. Preventing falls in
the older adult may require interventions to address more than
one focus area. The researchers designed a rehabilitation
program for older adults living at home in which patients
worked to improve everyday balance, strength, and psychosocial
well-being. The objective for this program is to prevent the risk
of falls in the older adult population. Older adults in the study
were taught balance and strength training exercises. Participants
were contacted by phone to encourage use of the exercises. The
results of this experiment showed improvement in strength,
balance, and an increase in daily living activities. The
researchers state that patient education is important for older
adults living in community settings to incorporate exercise into
daily activities.
Sherrington, Tiedemann, Fairhall, Close, and Lord (2011)
also investigated the use of exercise to prevent the risk of falls.
In addition to focusing on older adults, the researchers included
participants from other age groups in this quantitative study.
Study participants completed balance exercises and participated
in progressive walking activities. The results suggested exercise
can help lower the risk of falls in the older adult. In addition,
the researchers stated fall prevention exercise training should
not be confined to just the aging adult, but also offered and
implemented in the general population. In doing so, everyone
can increase their balance ability, which ultimately decreases
the risk of falls. The type of training should vary with each
individual. If the patient is healthy, the balance exercise along
with strength training and brisk walking is appropriate. On the
other hand, if the patient is at high risk for falls, balance
exercises should be the area of focus.
Summary
Results from the reviewed studies suggest that the
implementation of exercise programs is effective in preventing
fall-related injuries in older adults and can be effective for use
in long-term care environments. Exercise allows for the
strengthening of muscles in the lower extremities, which in turn
helps to prevent loss of balance and mobility. Ultimately, falls
are reduced when patients gain strength and ambulate regularly.
According to these authors, patient safety is increased with the
implementation of exercise programs that include walking,
muscle strengthening and balance routines. The findings
presented by these authors suggest that implementing exercise
programs for older adults in long-term care facilities would be
beneficial for safety and satisfaction of patients.
Barriers and Suggested Strategies
There are potential barriers to the implementation of the
recommendations in the reviewed studies. Patients with
decreased mobility or complete immobility would not be able to
complete these exercise programs. It would also be difficult to
implement the exercise protocol for patients with physical,
cognitive, or psychosocial impairments. Nurses should consider
variations in exercise regimens appropriatge for patients with
decrased mobility or other impariments. Nurse could provide
passive exercise activities for patients who are completely
immobile.
Implementation of the suggested interventions may be difficulty
for patients experiencing pain. Adequate and appropriate use of
pharmacological and nonpharmacological interventions for pain
management should be implemented before use of the suggested
exercise interventions. Nurses should assess patients’ pain and
collaborate with other health care providers to provide pain
relief.
It could be very costly to implement the recommended exercise
programs, as many of them would have to be individualized to
the patient which would require trained personnel. This could
be a potential barrier to implementation of the suggested
strategies. Nurses may have to work with managers and
administrators to find solutions for financial resources.
Lastly, patient interest is a potential barrier to the
recommendations because patients have to be willing to
exercise. Nurses should involve patients in exercise decisions
and provide patient education to support the patient’s treatment
decisions. Nurses should also be flexible and creative in
determining exercise regimens for patients, allowing the patient
input into desired activities and activities based on patient
interests.
Conclusion
Patient safety has always been a main concern in nursing
practice but further precautions to fall-related injuries can be
taken. Exercise is proven to have many positive outcomes on
the mind and body. Therefore, incorporating exercise programs
in long-term care facilities, nurses can increase patient safety
measures and promote improved overall quality of life.
References
Ambutas, S., Lamb, K.V., & Quigley, P. (2017). Fall reduction
and injury prevention toolkit: Implementation on two medical-
surgical units. MEDSURG Nursing, 26(3), 175-179.
Bello-Haas, V PM., Thorpe, L., Lix, L., Scudds, R., and
Hadjistavropoulos, T. (2012). The
effects of a long-term care walking program on balance, falls
and well-being. BMC
Geriatrics, 12(76), N.PAG. doi: 10.1186/1471-2318-12-76
Kato, M., Izumi, K., Hiramatsu, T., & Shogenji, M. (2006).
Development of an exercise
program for fall prevention for elderly persons in a long-term
care facility. Japan Journal
of Nursing Science, 3(2), 107–117. doi:10.1111/j.1742-
7924.2006.00057.x
Gschwind, Y. J., Kressig, R. W., Lacroix, A., Muehlbauer, T.,
Pfenninger, B., & Granacher, U.
(2013). A best practice fall prevention exercise program to
improve balance, strength / power, and psychosocial health in
older adults: Study protocol for a randomized controlled trial.
BMC Geriatrics, 1 (105), N.PAG. doi: 10.1186/1471-2318-13-
105
Sherrington, C., Tiedemann, A., Fairhall, N., Close, J., & Lord,
S. (2011), Exercise to prevent
falls in older adults: An updated meta-analysis and best practice
recommendations. New
South Wales Public Health Bulletin, 22(3-4), N.PAG. doi:
10.1071/NB10056
Taylor, C., Lillis, C., & Lynn, P. (2015). Fundamentals of
nursing: The art and science of
nursing care. (8th ed.). Philadelphia: Wolters Kluwer
Health/Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins.
Frequent manual repositioning and incidence of pressure
ulcers among bed-bound elderly hip fracture patients
Shayna E. Rich, MA, PhD1; David Margolis, MD, PhD2;
Michelle Shardell, PhD1; William G. Hawkes; PhD1;
Ram R. Miller, MD1; Sania Amr, MD1; Mona Baumgarten,
PhD1
1. Department of Epidemiology and Public Health, University of
Maryland School of Medicine, Baltimore, Maryland, and
2. Departments of Epidemiology & Biostatistics, and
Dermatology, University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine,
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania
Reprint requests:
Shayna Rich, MA, PhD, 121 South Fremont
Avenue, Apartment 431; Baltimore, MD
21201.
Tel: 11 443 604 6308;
Fax: 11 410 706 4433;
Email: [email protected]
Manuscript received: March 3, 2010
Accepted in final form: September 28, 2010
DOI:10.1111/j.1524-475X.2010.00644.x
ABSTRACT
Frequent manual repositioning is an established part of pressure
ulcer prevention,
but there is little evidence for its effectiveness. This study
examined the association
between repositioning and pressure ulcer incidence among bed-
bound elderly hip
fracture patients, using data from a 2004–2007 cohort study in
nine Maryland and
Pennsylvania hospitals. Eligible patients (n5269) were age�65
years, underwent hip
fracture surgery, and were bed-bound at index study visits
(during the first
5 days of hospitalization). Information about repositioning on
the days of index vis-
its was collected from patient charts; study nurses assessed
presence of stage 21
pressure ulcers 2 days later. The association between frequent
manual repositioning
and pressure ulcer incidence was estimated, adjusting for
pressure ulcer risk factors
using generalized estimating equations and weighted estimating
equations.
Patients were frequently repositioned (at least every 2 hours) on
only 53% (187/
354) of index visit days. New pressure ulcers developed at 12%
of visits following
frequent repositioning vs. 10% following less frequent
repositioning; the incidence
rate of pressure ulcers per person-day did not differ between the
two groups (inci-
dence rate ratio 1.1, 95% confidence interval 0.5–2.4). No
association was found be-
tween frequent repositioning of bed-bound patients and lower
pressure ulcer
incidence, calling into question the allocation of resources for
repositioning.
Pressure ulcers are a common complication of immobility
among the elderly, resulting in substantial pain and suffering
1
and excess hospital costs with charges for associated hospital
stays averaging > US$15,000.2 As of October 2008, Med-
icare no longer reimburses hospitals for treatment of hos-
pital-acquired stage 3 or 4 pressure ulcers.
3
This decision
was based on the designation of pressure ulcers as a ‘‘rea-
sonably preventable condition,’’ i.e., it is assumed that
pressure ulcers will generally not develop on patients re-
ceiving care according to current evidence-based guide-
lines. Unfortunately, although national and international
clinical guidelines for pressure ulcer prevention recom-
mend a wide range of measures, the evidence for the effec-
tiveness of many of these measures is fairly weak.
4–6
To
ensure that the measures recommended by clinical guide-
lines lead to a reduction in pressure ulcers, it is critical to
confirm both that these measures are effective and that
they are widely implemented.
One of the major methods for prevention of pressure
ulcers is the frequent manual repositioning of patients with
limited mobility. In particular, several clinical guidelines
recommend that bed-bound patients be repositioned every
2 hours.
5,6
This recommendation is based primarily on
expert opinion, with few epidemiological studies and in-
conclusive evidence that repositioning at this frequency is
effective in preventing the development of pressure ulcers.
Despite the dearth of evidence, repositioning bed-bound
patients every 2 hours has become firmly established as the
standard of care.
Confirming the effectiveness of frequent repositioning is
an important goal, to ensure that the standard of care is
appropriate and because the labor costs associated with
this intervention are considerable. Indeed, repositioning
and transferring patients take up the largest proportion of
the time devoted to pressure ulcer prevention,
7
and in one
study cost of repositioning accounted for 73% of the total
cost for pressure ulcer prevention.
8
Several studies have
also shown that manual repositioning increases health care
workers’ risk for back pain and musculoskeletal inju-
ries.
9,10
Given the shortage of both skilled and unskilled
nursing labor, the allocation of nursing time to patient re-
positioning every 2 hours is only justified if this interven-
tion is effective.
Furthermore, it is unclear to what degree the recom-
mendation for frequent manual repositioning is being im-
plemented in US health care facilities. A study published in
2001 by the Health Care Financing Administration (now
the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services) found
that, in 1996, only 66% of bed- and chair-bound patients
CI Confidence interval
GEE Generalized estimating equations
IRR Incidence rate ratio
MMSE Mini-Mental State Examination
OR Odds ratio
PRSS Pressure-redistributing support surfaces
Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound
Healing Society10
Wound Repair and Regeneration
mailto:[email protected]
were repositioned every 2 hours.
11
A study by Bates-Jen-
sen et al.
12
in nursing homes in 2003 found that only 18 of
58 such patients were repositioned at least every 2 hours.
No study since then has examined adherence to this rec-
ommendation, although a few studies have examined the
use of repositioning, but not its frequency, in preventing
pressure ulcers.
13–15
There is some evidence that the ap-
propriate frequency of repositioning should vary with the
support surface in use,
16
and guidelines differ in whether
patients using mattresses and overlays designed to redis-
tribute pressure (i.e., pressure-redistributing support sur-
faces, PRSS) can be repositioned less frequently than those
using standard support surfaces.
5,6
Yet no studies have ex-
amined if the frequency of repositioning for patients using
PRSS differs from that for patients using standard support
surfaces. Thus, it is of interest to examine the degree of
adherence to frequent manual repositioning recommenda-
tions in bed-bound patients, particularly when considering
the type of support surface in use.
Manual repositioning of bed-bound patients every
2 hours is an established part of the clinical guidelines for
pressure ulcer prevention, but there is little evidence for its
effectiveness and little is known about its implementation
in the hospital setting. Thus, it is unclear what effect the
recommendation for frequent manual repositioning has on
clinical outcomes. In this study, we aimed to determine if
manual repositioning every 2 hours is associated with a
lower incidence of pressure ulcers among bed-bound
elderly hip fracture patients and to examine the degree of
adherence to recommendations for manual repositioning
in these patients.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
Participants
Data for this study were collected as part of a prospective
cohort study of patients aged 65 years or older who un-
derwent surgery for hip fracture (ICD-9 code 820) between
2004 and 2007 in any of nine hospitals that participate in
the Baltimore Hip Studies network. The methods for the
parent study have been described previously.
17
Data for
the parent study were collected in the nine acute care hos-
pitals and the 105 postacute facilities to which patients
enrolled in this study were discharged; data for the current
analysis were collected in the nine admission hospitals. All
hospitals included in this analysis were voluntary non-
profit acute care facilities, including four teaching hospi-
tals. Seven of the study hospitals were in Maryland and
two in Pennsylvania. The number of beds in each hospital
ranged from 100 to 536 (median 253).
The parent study was approved by the Institutional
Review Boards of each of the participating hospitals and
the University of Maryland Baltimore; the latter also ap-
proved the current study. Permission to contact patients
for screening and recruitment was obtained from attending
physicians. If the patient had a Mini-Mental State Exam-
ination (MMSE)
18
score of 20 or greater, the patient’s writ-
ten consent was obtained; otherwise the patient’s verbal
assent and a proxy’s written consent were obtained. Proxy
consent was also obtained for patients who were uncon-
scious or noncommunicative. A total of 1,167 patients were
screened for eligibility, of whom 1,055 were eligible (90%
of screened), and 658 patients enrolled (62% of eligible).
Data about repositioning frequency were collected for
the first 5 days of each patient’s initial hospitalization.
Thus, patients who did not have any study visits during the
first 5 days of hospitalization (n5103) were excluded from
the current study. Because national clinical guidelines only
recommend repositioning for bed-bound patients, patients
were also excluded from the current study if they were not
bed-bound according to the activity item of the Braden
scale
19
during at least one study visit in the first 5 days of
hospitalization (n5286), leaving a sample of 269 patients.
Measures
Repositioning
Data about repositioning were collected from the nursing
flowsheet by a specially trained chart abstractor or a reg-
istered nurse experienced in medical record review. This
information included the number of times that the patient
was manually repositioned on each of the first 5 days of the
patient’s initial hospital stay. If the nursing flowsheet indi-
cated only the frequency of turning rather than the number
of times the patient was turned (e.g., ‘‘q2h’’ to indicate
turning every 2 hours), the corresponding number of turns
was recorded in the daily total. Repositioning was classi-
fied as frequent if there were 12 or more turns per hospital
day, corresponding to an average frequency of every
2 hours, as recommended in several clinical guidelines for
the prevention of pressure ulcers.
5,6
Pressure ulcer status
Specially trained research nurses assessed pressure ulcer
status at study visits that occurred at baseline (as soon as
possible after hospital admission) and on alternating days
for 21 days. The presence and stage of pressure ulcers were
determined at each study visit by a whole-body skin exam-
ination conducted according to standard wound assess-
ment practice.
20
Standard definitions of pressure ulcer
stages
21
were used: stage 1 (alteration of intact skin with
persistent redness), stage 2 (partial thickness dermal loss or
serum-filled blister), and stages 3 and 4 (full-thickness tis-
sue loss without/with exposed bone, tendon, or muscle).
The study outcome was development of one or more new
pressure ulcers stage 2 or higher at the visit following the
day for which repositioning frequency was recorded. Re-
sults were similar when the study outcome was restricted
to stage 2 pressure ulcers. Because only 16 of the pressure
ulcers observed in the study ever reached stages 3 or 4, it
was not possible to perform an analysis restricting the
study outcome to stage 3 and 4 pressure ulcers. Patients
with pressure ulcers continued to be considered at risk for
additional pressure ulcers. Results were virtually identical
when patients with pressure ulcers present at hospital
admission were excluded from the analysis.
Covariates
At each assessment, the research nurse recorded the
patient’s Braden scale score,
19,22
based on observation
Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound
Healing Society 11
Frequent repositioning and pressure ulcer incidenceRich et al.
and discussion with clinical staff. The Braden scale com-
prises six items: mobility, activity, sensory perception, ex-
posure to friction and shear forces, skin moisture, and
nutritional status. The ‘‘friction and shear’’ item is rated
on a three-point scale; each of the other five items is rated
on a four-point scale. The values for each item are summed
to provide a score ranging from six to 23, with lower scores
indicating a higher risk for pressure ulcer development. A
cut-off point of 16 is commonly used to indicate ‘‘at-risk’’
patients.
23
Acute mental status was also assessed at each visit by
counting the number of orientations to person, place, and
time. Incontinence status was based primarily on the
research nurses’ observation of skin moisture and/or soil-
ing with stool during the skin assessment and secondarily
on the four-point incontinence item of the Norton scale of
pressure ulcer risk.
24
Information about use of PRSS was
recorded by the research nurses on a structured form at
each study visit. PRSS were considered to be in use if any
overlays were observed to be on the patient’s bed or if the
mattress on the patient’s bed was made of any materials
other than standard foam and spring. For pressure ulcer
preventive devices other than PRSS, cushions were con-
sidered in use if they were on the patient’s chair or wheel-
chair, even if the patient was not seated at the time of the
assessment, whereas heel protectors, elbow protectors, and
positioning pillows/wedges were only recorded as being in
use if they were observed to be on, or supporting, the
patient at the time of assessment.
Data about all other covariates were obtained by clini-
cal observation at the baseline study visit, by patient or
proxy interview, or by chart review. At the baseline visit,
research nurses used the Subjective Global Assessment of
Nutritional Status
25
to classify individuals as being at low,
moderate, or high risk of nutrition-associated complica-
tions. Arterial insufficiency, defined as absence of pedal
pulses or ankle brachial index < 1, was also determined at
the baseline visit. Weight and height were obtained from
the medical chart or, when missing, from patient or proxy
interview; this information was used to calculate the pa-
tient’s body mass index (weight [kg]/height[m]
2
). Standard
definitions
26
were used to define weight status: under-
weight (body mass index < 18.5), normal weight (body
mass index518.5–24.9), and overweight/obese (body mass
index�25.0). Severity of illness was measured on the Rand
Sickness at Admission Scale (hip fracture version)
27
and
comorbidity by the Charlson Comorbidity Index,
28
both
of which use information from the medical chart. The
number of days since hospital admission was determined
according to the information in the medical chart.
Analysis
To describe the study population, the distributions of the
patients’ characteristics noted at the baseline visit were
compared for those repositioned frequently (at least every
2 hours) on the day of the baseline visit and those reposi-
tioned less frequently. We used simple counts and propor-
tions for categorical variables, and means with standard
deviations for continuous variables. p-values were
obtained by chi-square test for categorical variables or by
two-sample t-test for continuous variables.
Study visits at which patients in the study sample were
bed-bound during the first 5 days of hospitalization
(354 person-visits) were designated as index visits. Because
some patients had multiple index visits, generalized esti-
mating equations (GEE) analysis
29
with an exchangeable
working correlation matrix was used to account for
within-patient correlation. GEE models with a log link,
Poisson working model, and offset of log number of
days between visits (to account for differing amounts of
patient follow-up) were fit to determine the association
between repositioning frequency on the day of an index
visit and incidence of pressure ulcers stage 2 or higher at
the following visit. Estimates of incidence rate ratios
(IRR) and 95% confidence intervals (CI) were reported,
both unadjusted and adjusted for covariates. The number
of days since hospital admission was included in the
adjusted model as a continuous variable using a linear
spline with a knot at hospital day 2, and some admission
hospitals with few outcomes were combined in the
adjusted model. To determine whether the association
between repositioning frequency and pressure ulcer
incidence was modified by pressure ulcer risk status,
another adjusted model was fit with additional covariates
for the patient’s Braden scale score (dichotomized at
the sample’s median) at the index visit and a term for the
interaction between Braden scale score and repositioning
frequency.
Because repositioning data and covariate data were
missing for 10% (37/354) and 9% (33/354) of index visits,
respectively, weighted estimating equations analysis
30
was
used to account for possible selection bias due to missing
data. To compute the weights for this analysis, the prob-
ability of having observed (nonmissing) repositioning data
was estimated using a GEE model with a logit link, bino-
mial working model, and predictor variables (admission
hospital, severity of illness, use of pressure ulcer preventive
devices other than PRSS, pressure ulcer incidence before
or at the index visit, linear spline of days since hospital
admission, and completeness of other covariate data). The
probability of having complete covariate data was esti-
mated in a similar way with admission hospital as the
predictor variable. Weights were then estimated as the
product of the inverse probability of having complete cov-
ariate data and the inverse probability of having observed
repositioning data.
GEE models were fit with a binomial distribution and
identity link to determine estimates and 95% CI for the
proportion of index visit days on which patients were fre-
quently repositioned, for the whole study sample, for sub-
groups of patients using each type of support surface, and
for subgroups of patients in each admission hospital. GEE
models with a logit link and binomial working model were
fit to determine whether PRSS use on a given day was
associated with frequent repositioning on the same day.
Estimates of prevalence odds ratios (OR) and 95% CI are
reported, both unadjusted and adjusted for covariates. To
avoid overfitting, age, sex, acute mental status, comorbid-
ity, arterial insufficiency, use of preventive devices other
than PRSS, and presence of a pressure ulcer at the index
visit were eliminated from the model, after it was deter-
mined that these variables did not change the estimate of
the coefficient of interest by > 10%. Because the use of
frequent repositioning and PRSS were expected to vary
Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound
Healing Society12
Frequent repositioning and pressure ulcer incidence Rich et al.
based on hospital policy and resources, it was expected
that there may be important clustering effects by admis-
sion hospital. To examine these effects, additional models
were fit that adjusted for admission hospital using indica-
tor variables. All analyses were performed using SAS 9.1
(SAS Institute Inc., Cary, NC).
RESULTS
Study sample
Patients’ baseline characteristics, by repositioning frequency
on the day of the baseline visit, are shown in Table 1.
Table 1. Baseline characteristics of study participants, by
repositioning frequency on day of baseline visit
Characteristics
Patients repositioned at
least every 2 hours
(N5139)
Patients repositioned less
frequently than every 2 hours
(N5130)n
All patients
(N5269)
w
p-value
z
n (%)
Age �85 years 68 (48.9) 71 (54.6) 139 (51.7) 0.35
Male sex 36 (25.9) 32 (24.6) 68 (25.3) 0.81
White race 137 (98.6) 128 (98.5) 265 (98.5) 0.95
Community resident before
admission
83 (59.7) 86 (66.2) 169 (62.8) 0.27
Medicaid payor 12 (8.6) 6 (4.6) 18 (6.7) 0.19
Trochanteric fracture 53 (38.1) 57 (43.9) 110 (40.9) 0.34
Partial or total arthroplasty 58 (41.7) 56 (43.1) 114 (42.4) 0.82
Albumin < 3.0 g/dL 48 (34.5) 45 (34.6) 93 (34.6) 0.99
Not fully oriented to person,
place, and time
61 (45.9) 46 (36.2) 107 (41.2) 0.11
High risk of nutrition-related
complications
22 (16.3) 11 (8.5) 33 (12.5) 0.06
Incontinence 0.97
None 95 (68.8) 91 (70.0) 186 (69.4)
Urinary only 28 (20.3) 26 (20.0) 54 (20.2)
Fecal with or without urinary 15 (10.9) 13 (10.0) 28 (10.5)
Arterial insufficiency 56 (40.3) 62 (47.7) 118 (43.9) 0.22
Braden scale score �16 129 (94.9) 119 (93.7) 248 (94.3) 0.69
Pressure ulcers present at
baseline visit
25 (20.2) 9 (7.8) 34 (14.2) 0.006
Mean (standard deviation)
Mean age (years) 83.9 (6.4) 84.0 (6.5) 84.0 (6.5) 0.90
Mean Rand Sickness at
Admission score
13.6 (7.5) 12.9 (6.3) 13.3 (6.9) 0.40
Mean Charlson Comorbidity
Index
1.5 (1.5) 1.5 (1.5) 1.5 (1.5) 0.67
Mean MMSE score 15.8 (11.1) 17.5 (10.8) 16.6 (11.0) 0.21
Mean BMI (weight [kg]/height
[m]
2
)
23.4 (5.3) 24.2 (4.7) 23.8 (5.0) 0.24
Mean Braden scale score 13.8 (1.7) 14.2 (1.6) 14.0 (1.7) 0.07
Mean length of hospital stay
(days)
6.0 (2.7) 5.7 (3.1) 5.9 (2.9) 0.35
Mean interval between admission
and baseline visit (days)
1.8 (1.1) 1.6 (1.1) 1.7 (1.1) 0.15
nIncludes patients with missing repositioning data and two
study participants who did not have a baseline visit in the first 5
days of
hospitalization at which the patient was bed-bound.
w
Because of missing data, N for individual items ranges from 240
to 269.
z
p-value determined by two-sample t-test for continuous
variables or chi-square for categorical variables.
MMSE, Mini-Mental State Examination. BMI, body mass index.
Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound
Healing Society 13
Frequent repositioning and pressure ulcer incidenceRich et al.
Patients repositioned frequently (at least 12 times/day or
every 2 hours on average) were more likely than those repo-
sitioned less frequently to have a pressure ulcer at the base-
line visit (p50.006). Those repositioned frequently were also
more likely to have a high risk of nutrition-related compli-
cations (p50.06) and to have a lower mean Braden scale
score (p50.07) than patients repositioned less frequently.
Effect of frequent repositioning on incidence of
pressure ulcers
Patients in the study sample had an incident pressure ulcer
stage 2 or higher at 11% (38/354) of visits following an
index visit; the proportion was 12% (22/187) for visits
following days on which patients were frequently reposi-
tioned and 10% (16/167) following days on which patients
were repositioned less frequently (Table 2). The rate of
incident pressure ulcers stage 2 or higher at the visit
following an index visit per person-day of follow-up was
similar whether or not the patient was repositioned
frequently on the day of the index visit (unadjusted IRR
1.22, 95% CI 0.65–2.30; covariate-adjusted IRR 1.12,
95% CI 0.52–2.42).
The effect of frequent repositioning on pressure ulcer
incidence varied somewhat (p for the interaction50.07 in
adjusted model) according to whether or not the patient was
at high risk of pressure ulcers, as indicated by a Braden scale
score less than the study sample median value of 14. Among
the higher risk patients, the incidence rate of pressure ulcers
per person-day of follow-up was lower for those frequently
repositioned on the day of the index visit compared with
those repositioned less frequently (adjusted IRR 0.39, 95%
CI 0.08–1.84), whereas in lower risk patients, the incidence
rate of pressure ulcers for those repositioned frequently was
higher than for those repositioned less frequently (adjusted
IRR 2.19, 95% CI 0.73–6.60).
Relationship between use of PRSS and frequent
repositioning
Patients were repositioned frequently on 53% of the days
on which an index visit occurred (95% CI 47–58%); the
proportion was 54% (78/145) among patients using PRSS
and 52% (106/204) among patients using standard mat-
tresses. The proportion of days with frequent repositioning
according to type of support surface ranged from 42 to
66% (Figure 1). The use of frequent repositioning also
differed substantially by admission hospital; the hospital-
specific proportion of days on which frequent repositioning
was in use ranged from 23 to 77%. Examining the role of
admission hospital in detail, we found that hospitals with
more PRSS use tended to have less use of frequent reposi-
tioning and vice versa, indicating that admission hospital
was a negative confounder of the association between
PRSS use and frequent repositioning. Thus, although there
was no association between using PRSS and frequent
repositioning in models not accounting for admission hos-
pital (unadjusted OR 1.14, 95% CI 0.74–1.75; covariate-
adjusted OR 1.06, 95% CI 0.67–1.70), the odds of frequent
repositioning in patients using PRSS were more than twice
as high as the odds in patients using standard mattresses
in models accounting for admission hospital (hospital-
adjusted OR 2.08, 95% CI 1.10–3.92; fully adjusted OR
2.28, 95% CI 1.15–4.54).
DISCUSSION
In this study of bed-bound elderly hip fracture patients, we
did not find that repositioning patients at least every 2
hours is associated with a decreased incidence of pressure
ulcers, suggesting that manual repositioning at this fre-
quency may not effectively prevent pressure ulcers. Previ-
ous studies of frequent repositioning for pressure ulcer
prevention have yielded inconsistent results. Although a
Table 2. Unadjusted and adjusted incidence rate ratios for
developing a pressure ulcer stage 2 or higher at the following
visit, by
frequency of repositioning on the day of an index visit
Repositioning frequency Number of visits
% who developed �1 IPU
at following visit
Unadjusted
IRR (95% CI)
Fully adjustedn
IRR (95% CI)
Among all patients
Less than every 2 hours 167 10 Reference —
At least every 2 hours 187 12 1.22 (0.65, 2.30) 1.12 (0.52, 2.42)
Among patients at higher risk of pressure ulcers (Braden scale
score <14)
Less than every 2 hours 60 13 Reference —
At least every 2 hours 80 6 0.51 (0.20, 1.26) 0.39 (0.08, 1.84)
Among patients at lower risk of pressure ulcers (Braden scale
score �14)
Less than every 2 hours 107 7 Reference —
At least every 2 hours 107 16 2.11 (0.92, 4.87) 2.19 (0.73, 6.60)
All models account for within-patient correlation by generalized
estimating equations using an exchangeable structure for the
work-
ing correlation matrix.
nAccounts for missing repositioning and missing covariate data
using weighted estimating equations, and adjusts for age, sex,
acute
mental status, risk of nutrition-related complications, weight
status, incontinence status, arterial insufficiency, severity of
illness,
comorbidity, use of pressure-redistributing support surfaces, use
of any other pressure ulcer preventive device, admission
hospital,
prior pressure ulcer of any stage, and number of days since
hospital admission.
IPU, incident pressure ulcer stage 2 or higher; IRR, incidence
rate ratio; CI, confidence interval.
Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound
Healing Society14
Frequent repositioning and pressure ulcer incidence Rich et al.
randomized trial
16
found a lower incidence of pressure
ulcers for patients repositioned every 2 hours than for
those repositioned every 3 hours among patients using a
standard mattress, the same group
31
found no significant
difference in pressure ulcer incidence when they compared
groups under two repositioning-interval regimens (2 hours
in a lateral position and 4 hours in a supine position vs.
4 hours in each position). Observational studies in humans
have only shown that the duration of pressure likely to
result in pressure ulcers falls within a range of 1–6
hours.
32,33
Finally, studies in humans using surrogate
endpoints (skin temperature and redness, and contact
pressure) and animal studies and in vitro tissue studies
suggest that even a 2-hour interval of repositioning might
be insufficient to prevent tissue damage.
34–36
Thus, the
evidence for an optimal repositioning interval is inconclu-
sive, with biological plausibility for an interval < 2 hours
but little difference in clinical outcomes between this inter-
val and longer intervals. Taken together, the published
literature and the present study findings suggest that the
clinical recommendations for manual repositioning with a
specified interval are not well-founded.
Recent guidelines have recognized the limitations of the
evidence for manual repositioning, and these guidelines
have recommended that frequency of manual reposition-
ing should be tailored to each patient based on character-
istics such as mobility and general medical condition.
37
Given the substantial costs and burden of repositioning
every 2 hours, it is important to target this intervention to
patients who are most likely to benefit. In this study, there
was some suggestion that the effect of repositioning was
modified by the patient’s pressure ulcer risk status. Among
patients at high risk of pressure ulcers (as indicated by low
Braden scale scores), those repositioned at least every
2 hours had a lower rate of incident pressure ulcers than
those repositioned less frequently; among patients at low
risk of pressure ulcers, those repositioned at least every
2 hours had a higher rate of incident pressure ulcers than
those repositioned less frequently, although neither differ-
ence was statistically significant. If confirmed in future
studies, these findings suggest that, even among bed-
bound patients, repositioning may only be effective as a
prevention measure for those at particularly high risk of
pressure ulcers, and patients at high risk according to
Braden scale score may be a population of particular in-
terest. Additional studies should examine if frequent repo-
sitioning is only effective in this patient population.
We found limited adherence to the recommendation for
frequent manual repositioning despite the fact that the
study population, bed-bound elderly hip fracture patients,
is recognized as being at high risk of pressure ulcers.
7,38
It
is reassuring that patients who were repositioned fre-
quently were more likely than those who were repositioned
less frequently to have a lower Braden scale score. Overall,
though, patients were repositioned at least every 2 hours
on only 53% of days. This finding is consistent with several
previous studies showing a low prevalence of reposition-
ing, although the prevalence may vary substantially by
hospital unit.
11,13
In one study, staff members did not
reposition patients as regularly as prescribed despite
knowledge that repositioning should be done,
39
and sev-
eral studies have found that the main reasons cited for not
regularly repositioning patients include lack of time and
lack of staff, rather than a lack of knowledge of turning
protocols.
40
Thus, despite indications that repositioning
is widely accepted as standard care for pressure ulcer
prevention, repositioning does not appear to be fully
implemented.
The prevalence of frequent repositioning was higher
among patients using PRSS when compared with patients
on standard support surfaces, allaying concerns that use of
a PRSS reduces frequent repositioning. These results sug-
gest that providers are using these preventive measures
together for high-risk patients, as is appropriate under
43%
53%
42%
55%
66%
52%
0%
25%
50%
75%
100%
Standard
(n=206)
Static air
overlay (n=52)
Alternating
pressure
overlay (n=26)
Static air
mattress
(n=28)
Alternating
pressure
mattress
(n=18)
Other PRSS
(n=23)
Type of Support Surface
P
ro
p
o
rt
io
n
o
f
d
a
y
s
(
%
)
45%
64%
22%
77%
29%
62%
22%
79%
59%
52%
35%
75%
Figure 1. Proportion of days (and 95% confidence intervals) on
which patients were repositioned at least every 2 hours (�12
times/
day), by type of support surface.
Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound
Healing Society 15
Frequent repositioning and pressure ulcer incidenceRich et al.
current guidelines, rather than using PRSS alone. The
presence of a PRSS may also be a cue to remind providers
to frequently reposition patients. However, we found sub-
stantial variation in the prevalence of frequent reposition-
ing and PRSS use by hospital, indicating that differences
in resource availability or facility policies, such as the pres-
ence of quality improvement initiatives, may play major
roles in the implementation of pressure ulcer prevention
guidelines.
An important limitation of this study is its observational
design; randomized studies are required to provide strong
evidence regarding the effectiveness of this intervention.
However, given that repositioning every 2 hours is the cur-
rent standard of care, it would be difficult and possibly
unethical to perform experimental studies where patients
are randomized to less frequent intervals of repositioning.
To strengthen the inferences drawn from this study, we
adjusted for many known confounders of the association
of interest, but bias due to unmeasured confounders can-
not be excluded. Also, there may be errors in the informa-
tion about frequency of repositioning obtained from
medical records. This limitation is particularly salient as
the prior study by Bates-Jensen et al.
12
found a wide dis-
crepancy between actual repositioning practices and med-
ical record documentation, with documentation rates
much higher than repositioning rates measured by thigh
monitors. As such errors are probably equally likely
among patients who do and do not develop pressure
ulcers, the errors tend to bias results toward the null. An-
other limitation of this study was the relatively small sam-
ple size which limited the power to test the associations of
interest. Finally, our study population was limited to hip
fracture patients age 65 years or older, and results may not
be generalizable to other patients at risk for pressure
ulcers. However, because hip fracture patients are fre-
quently bed-bound for long periods of time in the periop-
erative period, pressure ulcers are a common complication
of immobility among these patients.
17
Thus, elderly hip
fracture patients represent an excellent population in
which to examine repositioning as an intervention to pre-
vent pressure ulcers, and there is no known reason that the
effect of frequent repositioning in this population would
differ from that in other populations at risk for pressure
ulcers. The high incidence of pressure ulcers seen in this
study may be due to the choice of elderly hip fracture
patients (a particularly high-risk group) as the study sam-
ple, but it may also be linked to infrequent repositioning
practices in study facilities. Unfortunately, data were not
available to examine facility polices, practices, or resources
related to repositioning; the contribution of these factors
to pressure ulcer incidence may be an important future
area of study.
Pressure ulcers have been recognized as an important
indicator of quality of care, particularly since the identifi-
cation of stage 3 or 4 pressure ulcers as one of the hospital-
acquired conditions for which the Centers for Medicare
and Medicaid Services will not provide reimbursement.
Clinical practice guidelines for pressure ulcer prevention
recommend the use of frequent manual repositioning in
bed-bound patients, but this study found that the imple-
mentation of this intervention was suboptimal. The imple-
mentation also varied substantially by hospital, indicating
that factors other than patient need influence the choice of
pressure ulcer prevention methods and that the quality of
care for pressure ulcer prevention may differ by facility.
However, the results of this study and others indicate that
we do not yet have evidence for the efficacy of frequent re-
positioning for pressure ulcer prevention. Additional
study is needed to determine if there is a standard interval
at which manual repositioning is effective at preventing
pressure ulcers, or if manual repositioning is only effective
in a subpopulation of bed-bound patients. In the absence
of this information, it is unclear if the variations in care
demonstrated in this study translate into a difference in
patient outcomes, or if decreasing the frequency of reposi-
tioning might reduce the cost and burden of this interven-
tion without increasing the incidence of pressure ulcers.
The current findings call into question the efficacy of turn-
ing as a pressure ulcer prevention strategy, but it is pre-
mature to suggest that frequent manual repositioning is
unnecessary. Repositioning may be more important for
patients at higher risk (i.e., lower scores) by the Braden
scale, but further research is required.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Supported by grants from the National Institute on Aging
(T32 AG000262 and F30 AG034008); National Institute
of Arthritis and Musculoskeletal and Skin Diseases (R01
AR47711); University of Maryland General Clinical Re-
search Center Grant, General Clinical Research Centers
Program, National Center for Research Resources (M01
RR16500); National Institute on Aging Claude D. Pepper
Older Americans Independence Center (P30 AG028747);
and National Institute of Child Health and Human Devel-
opment (K12 HD043489).
Preliminary results from this study were presented as a
poster at the 2009 Annual Scientific Meeting of the Amer-
ican Geriatrics Society, Chicago, IL, April 30, 2009, and at
the 61st Annual Meeting of the Gerontological Society of
America, National Harbor, MD, November 19, 2008. Fi-
nal results from this study were presented at the 137th An-
nual Meeting of the American Public Health Association,
Philadelphia, PA, November 10, 2009.
Data from this study have been the subject of other
analyses, the results of which have been previously pub-
lished. The publications are as follows: (a) Baumgarten,
M., Margolis, D.J., Orwig, D.L., Shardell, M.D., Hawkes,
W.G., Langenberg, P., Palmer, M.H., Jones, P.S., McAr-
dle, P.F., Sterling, R., Kinosian, B.P., Rich, S.E., Sowin-
ski, J., and Magaziner, J. 2009. ‘‘Pressure Ulcers in Elderly
Patients with Hip Fracture Across the Continuum of
Care.’’ Journal of the American Geriatrics Society. 57(5):
863–70. (b) Baumgarten, M., Margolis, D., Orwig, D.,
Hawkes, W., Rich, S., Langenberg, P., Shardell, M.,
Palmer, M.H., McArdle, P., Sterling, R., Jones, P.S., and
Magaziner, J. 2010. ‘‘Use of Pressure-Redistributing Sup-
port Surfaces Among Elderly Hip Fracture Patients
Across the Continuum of Care: Adherence to Pressure Ul-
cer Prevention Guidelines.’’ Gerontologist. 50:253–62. Nei-
ther of these previously published articles have examined
the hypotheses that are addressed in this article.
The authors have no potential conflicts of interest. Dr.
Rich had full access of the data in the study and takes
Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound
Healing Society16
Frequent repositioning and pressure ulcer incidence Rich et al.
responsibility for the integrity of the data and the accuracy
of the data analysis.
Author contributions: Study concept and design: Rich,
Margolis, Amr, Miller, Baumgarten. Data acquisition:
Rich, Shardell, Hawkes, Margolis, Baumgarten. Data
management and analysis: Rich, Shardell, Hawkes. Data
interpretation and preparation of manuscript: Rich,
Shardell, Hawkes, Margolis, Amr, Miller, Baumgarten.
REFERENCES
1. Langemo DK, Melland H, Hanson D, Olson B, Hunter S.
The lived experience of having a pressure ulcer: a qualitative
analysis. Adv Skin Wound Care 2000; 13: 225–35.
2. Russo CA, Elixhauser A. Hospitalizations related to pressure
sores. Statistical Brief #3. Rockville, MD: Agency for
Healthcare Research and Quality, April 2006.
3. Rosenthal MB. Nonpayment for performance? Medicare’s
new reimbursement rule. N Engl J Med 2007; 357: 1573–5.
4. Benbow M. Guidelines for the prevention and treatment of
pressure ulcers. Nurs Stand 2006; 20: 42–4.
5. Registered Nurses Association of Ontario (RNAO). Risk
assessment & prevention of pressure ulcers. Toronto, ON:
RNAO, 2005.
6. Wound, Ostomy, and Continence Nurses Society (WOCN).
Guideline for prevention and management of pressure ulcers.
Report No. 2. Glenview, IL: WOCN, 2003.
7. Stotts NA, Deosaransingh K, Roll FJ, Newman J. Underuti-
lization of pressure ulcer risk assessment in hip fracture
patients. Adv Wound Care 1998; 11: 32–8.
8. Xakellis GC, Frantz RA. The cost-effectiveness of interven-
tions for preventing pressure ulcers. J Am Board Fam Pract
1996; 9: 79–85.
9. Fragala G, Fragala M, Pontani-Bailey L. Proper positioning
of clients: a risk for caregivers. AAOHN J 2005; 53: 438–42.
10. Pompeii LA, Lipscomb HJ, Schoenfisch AL, Dement JM.
Musculoskeletal injuries resulting from patient handling
tasks among hospital workers. Am J Ind Med 2009; 52:
571–8.
11. Lyder CH, Preston J, Grady JN, Scinto J, Allman R, Berg-
strom N, Rodeheaver G. Quality of care for hospitalized
Medicare patients at risk for pressure ulcers. Arch Intern Med
2001; 161: 1549–54.
12. Bates-Jensen BM, Cadogan M, Jorge J, Schnelle JF.
Standardized quality-assessment system to evaluate pressure
ulcer care in the nursing home. J Am Geriatr Soc 2003; 51:
1194–202.
13. Gunningberg L. Are patients with or at risk of pressure
ulcers
allocated appropriate prevention measures? Int J Nurs Pract
2005; 11: 58–67.
14. Pieper B, Sugrue M, Weiland M, Sprague K, Heimann C.
Presence of pressure ulcer prevention methods used among
patients considered at risk versus those considered not at
risk. J Wound Ostomy Continence Nurs 1997; 24: 191–9.
15. Richardson GM, Gardner S, Frantz RA. Nursing assess-
ment: impact on type and cost of interventions to prevent
pressure ulcers. J Wound Ostomy Continence Nurs 1998; 25:
273–80.
16. Defloor T, De Bacquer D, Grypdonck MH. The effect of
various combinations of turning and pressure reducing
devices on the incidence of pressure ulcers. Int J Nurs Stud
2005; 42: 37–46.
17. Baumgarten M, Margolis DJ, Orwig DL, Shardell MD,
Hawkes WG, Langenberg P, Palmer MH, Jones PS, McAr-
dle PF, Sterling R, Kinosian BP, Rich SE, Sowinski J, Mag-
aziner J. Pressure ulcers in elderly patients with hip fracture
across the continuum of care. J Am Geriatr Soc 2009; 57:
863–70.
18. Folstein MF, Folstein SE, McHugh PR. ‘‘Mini-mental
state’’: a practical method for grading the cognitive state of
patients for the clinician. J Psychiatr Res 1975; 12: 189–98.
19. Braden BJ, Maklebust J. Preventing pressure ulcers with the
Braden scale: an update on this easy-to-use tool that assesses
a patient’s risk. Am J Nurs 2005; 105: 70–2.
20. Bergstrom N, Allman RM, Alvarez O, Bennett M, Carlson
C, Frantz R, Garber SL. Treatment of pressure ulcers. AH-
CPR Publication No. 95-0652. Rockville, MD: U.S. Depart-
ment of Health and Human Services, 1994.
21. Cuddigan J, Ayello EA, Sussman C, editors. Pressure ulcers
in America: prevalence, incidence, and implications for the fu-
ture. Reston, VA: NPUAP, 2001.
22. Bergstrom N, Braden B, Kemp M, Champagne M, Ruby E.
Predicting pressure ulcer risk: a multisite study of the predic-
tive validity of the Braden scale. Nurs Res 1998; 47: 261–9.
23. Anthony D, Parboteeah S, Saleh M, Papanikolaou P. Nor-
ton, Waterlow and Braden scores: a review of the literature
and a comparison between the scores and clinical judgement.
J Clin Nurs 2008; 17: 646–53.
24. Norton D, McLaren R, Exton-Smith AN. An investigation of
geriatric nursing problems in hospital. Edinburgh: Churchill
Livingstone, 1975.
25. Detsky AS, McLaughlin JR, Baker JP, Johnston N, Whit-
taker S, Mendelson RA, Jeejeebhoy KN. What is subjective
global assessment of nutritional status? J Parenter Enteral
Nutr 1987; 11: 8–13.
26. Pi-Sunyer FX, Becker DM, Bouchard C, Carleton RA, Col-
ditz GA, Dietz WH, Foreyt JP, Garrison RJ, Grundy SM,
Hansen BC, Higgins M, Hill JO, Howard BV, Klesges RC,
Kuczmarski RJ, Kumanyika S, Legako RD, Prewitt TE,
Rocchini AP, Smith PL, Snetselaar LG, Sowers JR, Wein-
traub M, Williamson DF, Wilson GT. Clinical guidelines on
the identification, evaluation and treatment of overweight and
obesity in adults: the evidence report. Bethesda, MD: National
Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute, 1998.
27. Keeler EB, Kahn KL, Draper D, Sherwood MJ, Rubenstein
LV, Reinisch EJ, Kosecoff J, Brook RH. Changes in sickness
at admission following the introduction of the prospective
payment system. JAMA 1990; 264: 1962–8.
28. Charlson M, Szatrowski TP, Peterson J, Gold J. Validation
of a combined comorbidity index. J Clin Epidemiol 1994; 47:
1245–51.
29. Zeger SL, Liang KY. Longitudinal data analysis for discrete
and continuous outcomes. Biometrics 1986; 42: 121–30.
30. Robins JM, Rotnitzky A, Zhao LP. Estimation of regression
coefficients when some regressors are not always observed.
J Am Stat Assoc. 1994; 89: 846–66. Available at http://
www.jstor.org.proxy-hs.researchport.umd.edu/stable/
2290910.
31. Vanderwee K, Grypdonck MH, De Bacquer D, Defloor T.
Effectiveness of turning with unequal time intervals on the
incidence of pressure ulcer lesions. J Adv Nurs 2007; 57:
59–68.
32. Aronovitch SA. Intraoperatively acquired pressure ulcers:
are there common risk factors? Ostomy Wound Manage 2007;
53: 57–69.
Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound
Healing Society 17
Frequent repositioning and pressure ulcer incidenceRich et al.
http://www.jstor.org.proxy-
hs.researchport.umd.edu/stable/2290910
http://www.jstor.org.proxy-
hs.researchport.umd.edu/stable/2290910
http://www.jstor.org.proxy-
hs.researchport.umd.edu/stable/2290910
33. Hoshowsky VM, Schramm CA. Intraoperative pressure sore
prevention: an analysis of bedding materials. Res Nurs
Health 1994; 17: 333–9.
34. Breuls RG, Bouten CV, Oomens CW, Bader DL, Baaijens
FP. Compression induced cell damage in engineered muscle
tissue: an in vitro model to study pressure ulcer aetiology.
Ann Biomed Eng 2003; 31: 1357–64.
35. Knox DM, Anderson TM, Anderson PS. Effects of different
turn intervals on skin of healthy older adults. Adv Wound
Care 1994; 7: 48–52, 54–6.
36. Stekelenburg A, Oomens CW, Strijkers GJ, Nicolay K,
Bader DL. Compression-induced deep tissue injury exam-
ined with magnetic resonance imaging and histology.
J Appl Physiol 2006; 100: 1946–54.
37. Dealey C. A joint collaboration: international pressure ulcer
guidelines. J Wound Care 2009; 18: 368–72.
38. Jensen TT, Juncker Y. Pressure sores common after hip
operations. Acta Orthop Scand 1987; 58: 209–11.
39. Helme TA. Position changes for residents in long-term care.
Adv Wound Care 1994; 7: 57–8, 60–1.
40. Hawkins S, Stone K, Plummer L. An holistic approach to
turning patients. Nurs Stand 1999; 14: 51–6.
Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound
Healing Society18
Frequent repositioning and pressure ulcer incidence Rich et al.
Copyright of Wound Repair & Regeneration is the property of
Wiley-Blackwell and its content may not be
copied or emailed to multiple sites or posted to a listserv
without the copyright holder's express written
permission. However, users may print, download, or email
articles for individual use.
203
JRRDJRRD Volume 48, Number 3, 2011Pages 203–214
Journal of Rehabilitation Research & Development
Assessing evidence supporting redistribution of pressure for
pressure
ulcer prevention: A review
Stephen Sprigle, PhD, PT;* Sharon Sonenblum, PhD
Rehabilitation Engineering and Applied Research Lab, Georgia
Institute of Technology, Atlanta, GA
Abstract—The formation and underlying causes of p ressure
ulcers (PUs) are qu ite complex, with multiple influencing fac-
tors. However, by definition pressure ulcers cannot form with-
out loading, or pressure, on tissue. Clinical interventions
typically target the magnitude and/or duration of loading. Pres-
sure magnitude is managed by the selection of support surfaces
and postural supports as well as body posture on supporting
surfaces. Duration is addressed via turning and weight shifting
frequency as well as with th e use of dynamic s urfaces that
actively redistribute pressure on the body surfaces. This article
shows that preventative interventions must be targeted to both
magnitude and duration and addresses the rationale behind sev-
eral common clinical interventions—some with more scientific
evidence than others.
Key words: body posture, clinical interventions, postural sup-
ports, pressure magnitude, pressure ulcers, prevention inter-
ventions, support surface, tissue loading, turning frequency,
weight shifting frequency, wheelchair.
INTRODUCTION
The formation a nd underlying c auses of pressure
ulcers (PUs) are quite complex, with multiple influencing
factors. However, by definition PUs cannot form without
forces, or press ure, on tissue. Because tissue loading is
the defining characteristic of PU formation, i t naturally
garners significant attention in research in PU prevention
strategies.
Research has clearly demonstrated that the damaging
effects of pressure are related to both its magnitude and
duration. Simply stated, tissues can withstand higher
loads for shorter periods of time. Kosiak first demon -
strated this characteristic 50 years ago by applying vary-
ing loads to the trochanters and ischial tuberosities of
dogs for varying periods of time [1]. High loads for short
durations and low loads for long durations induced
ulcers, with the time-at-pre ssure curve following an
inverse parabola. Reswick and Rogers tried to extend this
animal research into clinica lly relevant i nformation, and
using combinations of interviews and interface pressure
measurements (IPMs), de termined a pressure-time rela -
tionship that was similar to that of Kosiak [2].
Using the premise that both the ma gnitude and dura-
tion of loading are important, we c an diagram a simple
model of PU development (Figure 1) that illustrates the
reasoning behind certain clin ical interventions. Pressure
magnitude is managed by the selection of support sur-
faces and postural supports as well as body posture upon
supporting surfaces. Duration is a ddressed via turning
and weight shifting frequency as well as with the use of
dynamic surfaces that a ctively redistribute pressure on
the body surfaces.
Abbreviations: IPM = interface pressure measurement, Mobil-
ity RERC = Rehabili tation Engineering Research Center on
Wheeled Mobility, PU = pressure ulcer, SCI = spinal cord
injury.
*Address all correspondence to Stephen Sprigle, PhD, PT;
Georgia Tech–Applied Physiology, 490 Tenth St NW,
Atlanta, GA 30032-0156; 404-385-4302; fax: 404-894-9320.
Email: [email protected]
DOI:10.1682/JRRD.2010.05.0102
mailto:[email protected]
204
JRRD, Volume 48, Number 3, 2011
This article reviews the evidence supporting clinical
interventions that address the magnitude of pressure and
the duration of that pressure. Within this article, “support
surfaces” will refer to devices designed for horizont al
(mattresses, overlays) and s eated (wheelchair cushions)
postures. The ter m “pressure” will refer to the force or
load exerted over an area of the body or on a lo calized
area of the body surface.
LOADING
A fairly extensive amount of re search has applied
loads to tissues and monitored physiological outcomes.
For obvious re asons, research with animal models uses
controlled loading to create PUs or tissue necrosis,
whereas human studies are limited to indirect measures,
such as the effect of loading on blood flow.
Tissue Response to Loading in Animal Models
As mentioned previously, Kosiak u ndertook seminal
research by applying load s to the trochan ters and isch ial
tuberosities of dogs [1]. Load s ranged from 100 to
500 mmHg, and durations ranged from 1 to 1 2 hours.
Kosiak monitored animals for 14 days postischemia to
determine the occurrence of PUs. Dinsdale applied pres-
sures between 45 and 1,500 mmHg for 3 hours to swine
with and without paraplegia [3]. Normal pressure was com-
bined with friction in half the specimens. The results indi-
cated that no necrosis occurred with normal pressures
below 150 mmHg, but in combination with friction, tissue
changes could be seen after loading with 45 mmHg. Daniel
et al. also studied swine with and without paraplegia [4].
Using an indenter to apply load at the greater troch anter,
they found that application of 200 mmHg for 15 hours did
not induce a PU. Ulcers were obtained by applyin g
500 mmHg for 4 hours and 800 mmHg for 8 hours.
Linder-Ganz and Gefen exposed rat hind limbs to
pressure magnitudes of 86, 262, and 525 mmHg for 2, 4,
and 6 hours, respectively [5]. They used finite ele ment
modeling to calculate internal stresses and concluded that
tissue damage occurred with 13 kPa o f internal stress
applied for 6 hours and 40 kPa of interna l stress applied
for 2 ho urs. Both conditions represent an approximate
stress application rate of 80 kPa/h.
While this is not a comprehensive list of animal PU
etiology research, collectiv ely the studies illustrat e
results obtained by applying different loads over different
durations (Table). The use of different sizes and shapes
of indenters, dif ferent loading parameters , and different
animal models explains why a range of mag nitudes and
durations are linked to PU development. Despite these
differences, the evidence suggests that both magnitude
and duration of loa ds must be considered in PU preven -
tion and validates the simple intervention model in
Figure 1.
Blood Flow Response to Loading in Humans
While research has clearly shown a rela tionship
between pressure magnitude and duration and tissue
damage, these studies have not de fined a critical ma gni-
tude above whic h ischemia occurs. Many studies have
used controlled experimental approaches for determining
the pressure at whic h blood flow to tissue cea ses with
significantly varying results. Lassen and Holste in found
that the pressure required for vascular occlusion approxi-
mated diastolic pressures when the measured skin
approached heart level [6]. Holloway et al. loaded the
forearm and found that blood flow decreased as external
pressure approached mean arterial pressure and that
occlusion was reached at ~120 mmHg [7]. Ek et al. found
“weak positive correlations” between blood flow during
Figure 1.
Rationale for redistribution of pressure.
205
SPRIGLE and SONENBLUM. Redistributing pressure to
prevent pressure ulcers
loading at the heel and systolic blood pressure [8]. Load-
ing at the sac rum did not resu lt in the same relationship
with blood pressure. Sangeorzan et al. de termined that
71 mmHg was need ed to occl ude flow over the tibialis
anterior (a “soft” site) but only 42 mmHg occluded flow
over the tibia (a “hard” site ) [9]. Bennett et al. measured
occlusion pressure at the thenar eminences of nondis -
abled subjects and found that 100 to 120 mmHg was nec-
essary to occlude v essels in “low shear” conditions and
60 to 80 mmHg was needed in the pre sence of “high
shear” conditions [10]. Bar re viewed the literature and
concluded that a critical pressure is necessary to occlude
blood flow and that while this threshold is related to ves-
sel pressure, it appears to vary widely [11].
The animal and human studies contribute important
information to the field of PU research by identifying tis-
sue’s response to external loads. However, the results are
very hard to apply clinically. Controlled loading at specific
anatomical sites simply doe s not generalize to the person
lying in bed or sitting in a wheelchair. For exa mple, the
magnitudes and durations of loading used to induce dam -
age in animals greatly exceed those deemed a cceptable in
clinical environments. This apparent discrepancy does not
invalidate either the research or the clinical interpretation
of the findings. Rather, these animal tests inform us about
the mechanism of injury and the complex relationships
between the variables involved when supporting the
human body in sitting or lying positions.
To date, research has not identified a specific thresh-
old at which loads can be d eemed harmful across people
or sites on the body. Tissue’s tolerance to load varies
according to the condition of the tissue and its location,
age, hydration, and metabolism. All the factors common
to PU risk assessment tools tend to influence how the tis-
sue distributes the loading and its ability to wi thstand
load.
INTERVENTIONS
Support Surfaces
Support surfaces attempt to redistribute forces away
from bony prominences, thereby reducing the magnitude
of loading at these at-risk sites. In general, creating suc -
cessful support surfaces is challenging because of the dif-
ferences in ind ividual risk factors, as well as the
complicated nature by which force is distributed through-
out tissue. For example, when a person sits on a cushion,
normal loading works in combination with shear and fric-
tional forces to induce complex tissue distortion. Conse-
quently, myriad support surface designs ex ist that have
benefit for some p eople, but for the most part, no single
surface is optimal for all persons. Two very general cate -
gories of support surfaces can be defined: reactive sur-
faces that respond to the load placed upon them and active
surfaces that dynamically a lter the body–support-surface
interface. Although active surfaces serve as a duration
intervention, their primary role as a supp ort surface (thus
affecting magnitude of loading) makes it natural to
present them together with reactive support surfaces.
Table.
Examples of animal pressure ulcer models highlighting different
loading parameters.
Author Animal Model Loading Conditions Outcome
ischial tuberosity
100–500 mmHg over 1–12 h Proposed inverse magnitude-
duration
relationship.
Dinsdale [2] Swine with and w
spinal injury
45–
and without friction
Loading at 45 mmHg in the presence
of friction-induced damage.
spinal injury
200 mmHg for 15 h, 500 mmHg
for 4 h, 800 mmHg for 8 h
No damage at 200 mmHg for 15 h,
but damage under other conditions.
Linder-Ganz & Gefen [4] Rat hind limbs 86, 262, and 525
mmHg for 2, 4,
and 6 h, respectively
Tissue damage occurred with loading
rate of 80 kPa/h.
1. Kosiak M. Etiology and pathology of ischemic ulcers. Arch
Phys Med Rehabil. 1959;40(2):62–69. [PMID: 13618101]
2. Dinsdale SM. Decubitus ulcers in swine: Light and electron
microscopy study of pathogenesis. Arch Phys Med Rehabil.
1973;54(2):51–56. [PMID: 4692634]
3. Daniel RK, Wheatley D, Priest D. Pressure sores and
paraplegia: An experimental model. Ann Plast Surg.
1985;15(1):41–
DOI:10.1097/00000637-198507000-00005
4. Linder-Ganz E, Gefen A. Mechanical compression-induced
pressure sores in rat hindlimb: Muscle stiffness, histology, and
computational models. J Appl Phys-
iol. 2004;96(6):2034–
DOI:10.1152/japplphysiol.00888.2003
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/13618101
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/4595834
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/4083714
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/4083714
http://dx.doi.org/10.1097/00000637-198507000-00005
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/14766784
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/14766784
http://dx.doi.org/10.1152/japplphysiol.00888.2003
206
JRRD, Volume 48, Number 3, 2011
Judging the effectiveness of support surfaces is done
with both direct and indirect methods. Indirect methods
use physiological means such as blood flow , tissue oxy-
genation, and interface pressure to judge performance.
Direct methods follow a group of patients over time to
determine PU occurrence. Direct methods are more valu-
able but are harder to adminis ter and are limited in the
number of interventions that can be inve stigated (i.e.,
types of surfaces).
In their systematic review focused on randomiz ed
controlled trials with PU development as an outcome,
Cullum et al. used the term “constant low-pressure sup-
port surfaces” to describe the myriad foam, air , water,
and elastomeric mattresses, overlays, and cushions [12].
Their review of the literature concluded that these sur-
faces outperform standard hospital mattresses in prevent-
ing PU formation. Comparisons between dif ferent
constant low-pressure surfaces did not result in definitive
outcomes. In othe r words, differences across the more
common reactive surfaces have not been demonstrated in
terms of PU outcomes.
Studies on wheelchair cushions are not as common as
those on mattresses, but informative evidence is still
available. Indirect measures, specifically interface pres-
sures, comprise the bulk of studies on cushions [13–16].
Researchers have shown tha t high s eated interface pres-
sures were associated with PU occurrence [17–19].
Therefore, despite the limita tions in IPM as a less accu-
rate representation of localized loading [5,20–22], it can
be useful in selecting cushions.
Because active surfaces vary loading of pa rticular
regions of the body, they intend to alter both the magni-
tude and duration of loading. Active surfa ces are avail-
able for both mattresses and wheelchair cushions, with
mattresses being use d and studie d more freque ntly. In
part, this is the result of a funding decision in the United
States by the Ce nters for Me dicare and Medic aid Ser-
vices to not pay for powered wheelchair cushions for PU
prevention. Evidence on commercially available a ctive
cushions is limited to seco ndary outcomes [16,23].
Because the secondary measurements vary throughout
the cycle of ac tive cushions, the results of such studies
are hard to apply clinically.
Studies of active mattresses and overlays a re more
common than those of cushions and have used both direct
and indirect outcomes. Two recent systematic reviews do
a very thorough job of covering the literature on alternat-
ing pressure mattresses so the details will not be repeated
here [12,24]. Cullum et al. focused exclusively on direct
outcomes (PU development), while Vanderwee et al.
extended their review to include studies with indirect out-
come measurements and a lternative study designs. But
both groups reached the same conclusions: alternating
pressure air mattres ses are better than standard hospital
mattresses but their bene fit over constant low -pressure
mattresses is unclear. Furthermore, differences across
types of alternating pressure air mattresses were not dem-
onstrated. Active surfaces also provide inc reased poten-
tial for mechanical problems and user error compared
with some alternatives. One major limitation of most of
the reviewed studies, as pointed out by Cullum et al., was
that turning schedules were not controlled. Therefore, it
is possible that nurses made a point to turn patients on the
standard mattresses more frequently than those on the
active surfaces because of a perceived need for increased
intervention. If true, than comparable outcomes could
come with the benefit of re duced clinical intervention
time for the active surfa ce, but research to evaluate this
possibility is needed.
Interventions for Reducing Duration of Loading
The body’s motor and sensory systems are responsi-
ble for ensuring that we move periodically to change our
posture. This may be in the form of discomfort eliciting
movement or subconscious postural shifts or fidgeting.
Many studies over the years have monitored movements
in chairs a s metrics of co mfort and function [25–28],
thereby establishing a base of knowledge about sitting as
a dynamic activity. Many people at risk of dev eloping
PUs are either unable to effectively reposition themselves
or are not provided with the sensory feedback that elicits
movements. Therefore, that loss of mobility and sensa-
tion are identified as risk fa ctors within every PU risk
assessment scale is not surprising.
We use this information to tar get movement as a
means of redistributing pressure and altering the duration
of loading on tissues. Cli nically, this includes turning
schedules for patients who are in bed and weight shifting
strategies for those who are seated.
Turning Frequency
In a st udy on PU prev ention interventions, Richard -
son et al. found that manual repositioning was the most
commonly used intervention and that it was also the most
expensive [29]. The idea of necessary repositioning has
appeared throughout literature and textbooks since the
207
SPRIGLE and SONENBLUM. Redistributing pressure to
prevent pressure ulcers
1800s [30]. Evidence that some repositioning is neces-
sary can be found across decades of literature.
In the United S tates, common practice requires that
at-risk patients be repositioned at least every 2 hours if
consistent with overall patient goals [31]. Despite efforts
by a number of researchers to identify the origins of this
practice, or at the very least identify evidence supporting
the 2-hour turning practice, no strong scientific support
exists [30,32–33]. In fact, earlier texts often included
suggestions that the turning schedule depend on the mag-
nitude of loading and condition of the patient.
Therefore, the s tandard practice of using the sa me
turning schedules independent of support surface is not
reflective of earlier work. Re cent evidence demonstrates
the need to account for the support surface in determining
the optimal turning schedule. Defloor et a l. showed that
2- and 3-hour turning schedules resulted in the develop-
ment of PUs in 14 to 24 percent of patients lying on
standard mattresses. A 6-hour turning sc hedule for
patients lying on a viscoelastic mattress resulted in simi -
lar outcomes, but a 4-hour turning schedule for patie nts
lying on a visc oelastic mattress signific antly reduced
stage II PUs . Other research suggests that turning ma y
need to occur more frequently than every 2 hours and that
sufficient pressure reduction surfaces are needed in addi -
tion to turning [32,34–36]. Recently, Vanderwee et al.,
using a pressu re-reducing mattress, found no difference
between repositioning patient s every 4 hours and alter -
nating between 2 hours in late ral and 4 h ours in supine
[36]. In both interventions, more than 16 percent of parti-
cipants developed a PU. Additionally, two studies of sec-
ondary outcomes demonstrated that redness and ox ygen
reduction while lying in bed occurred in less than 2 hours
[37]. Furthermore, in studies on turning, patients who are
able will change posture between scheduled reposition-
ings. As a result, these subjects are exposed to more posi-
tion changes than offered by the intervention, which may
mask a need for more frequent repositioning in those
unable to reposition themselves [36]. The necessary repo-
sitioning frequency may be so high that implementation
is impractical for immobile patients [32].
Positioning Devices and Posture
The entire premise behind turning is obviously to
reduce the amount of time di fferent body surfaces are
exposed to loading. Operati onally, many facilities
sequence between supine and two side-lying postures.
The loading at specific body surfaces is highly dependent
on the resulting postures an d any positioning devices
used. For example, side lyin g may expose a malleolus to
damaging loading but proper positioning of the lower
limbs and judicious use of positioning devices can effec-
tively reduce loa ds from this bony prominence ( Figure
2(a)). Adopting a supine posture with the head of the bed
elevated alters loading on the buttocks, which is why it is
a controversial posture. Elevating only the head of the
bed increases both the normal and frictional forces on the
sacrum [38–39]. Mechanics suggests that as the head ele-
vates, more of the upper-body weight will be transmitted
through the buttocks to the supporting surface. In addi-
tion, the tendency to slide is increased as the trunk sup -
port is inclined. The complication is that it is a functional
posture, adopted so people can converse with others ,
read, and eat, to name a fe w activities. Some of the fric -
tional forces can be counteracted by raising the foot of
Figure 2.
(a) Use of positioning devices to redistribute pressure and (b)
raising
foot of bed counteracts sliding tendency.
208
JRRD, Volume 48, Number 3, 2011
the bed, but this will not reduce the normal forces on the
buttocks [38] (Figure 2(b)).
The seated posture also affects how loads are re distrib-
uted. Sitting on a sling seat with a pelvic obliquity induces
asymmetric loading on the isch ial tuberosities, not to men-
tion contributing to postural instability (Figure 3(a)). A
slouched, kyphotic posture is typ ified by p osterior pelvic
tilt, a posture that loads the sacrum and coccyx while seated
(Figure 3(b)) [40–41].
In summary, body posture and positioning have a
direct relationship to loads on specific body sites, which
is why posture must be co nsidered when devising PU
prevention strategies.
Weight Shifting
Wheelchair users are often at high risk of developing
sitting-acquired PUs. Persons with absent or diminished
sensation and/or mobility are always at high risk of PUs
[42–43]. A variety of maneuvers to shift body weight off
the buttocks are taught to wheelchair users at risk of PUs.
They can push down on the seat or armrests to lift the
buttocks off the cushion s urface (Figure 4(a)), lean for -
ward to rest t heir trunk upon the lower limbs (Figure
4(b)), or lean to one side and then lean to the opposite
side (Figure 4(c)). Persons who use power wheelchairs
and cannot independently perform these maneuvers are
sometimes prescribed variable position wheelchairs that
incorporate powered tilt and/or recline to redistribute
weight off the buttock area (Figure 5).
Most guidelines that suggest weight shift or pressure
relief frequency have been developed for p ersons with
spinal cord injury (SCI) because of the effect of SCI on
sensation and mobility. For the SCI po pulation, recom-
mendations for weight shift frequency have typically
ranged from 15 to 30 seconds every 15 to 30 minutes to
60 seconds every hour [44–47]. Based on the wide range
of these guidelines, one can infer that they were based on
a combination of clinical experience, clinical insight, and
research findings.
In addition to weight shift frequency, one must also
consider the duration for which a weight shift is held . In
other words, not only do wheelchair users have to perform
weight shifts regularly, they must attend to the duration of
these maneuvers. The ability to sustain a weight shift is
dependent on myriad factors, including functional ability,
strength, flexibility, and postural control [46]. A 2003 study
measured tissue perfusion to investigate the length of time
required for tissue to rep erfuse in an SCI cohort ( n = 46)
[48]. The mean duration of weight shift required to return
transcutaneous partial pressure of oxygen to unloaded lev-
els following upright sitting was 1 minu te 51 seconds
(range = 42– 210 seconds). This fin ding suggests that the
Figure 3.
(a) Pelvic obliquity from sitting on sling seat and (b) posterior
pelvic
tilt loads sacrum and coccyx.
209
SPRIGLE and SONENBLUM. Redistributing pressure to
prevent pressure ulcers
duration of weight shifts currently recommended (i.e., 15–
30 seconds) is inadequ ate. Further, this suggests that th e
common practice of sitting push-ups is not sustainable for
many to achieve reperfusio n. Consequently, the authors
supported the use o f alternate, sustainab le methods of
weight shift, namely fo rward lean, lateral lean, and rear -
ward tilt. Partial weight shifts may also allow for better sus-
tainability by persons with SCI.
Figure 4.
(a) Push-up weight shift, (b) forward-lean weight shift, and (c)
side-
lean weight shift.
Figure 5.
(a) Manual Tilt-in-Space wheelchair and (b) Power T ilt-in-
Space
wheelchair. Images used with permission. ©Invacare
Corporation.
210
JRRD, Volume 48, Number 3, 2011
Three recent studies inve stigating PU prevalence in
an SCI cohort considered weight shift behavior as a
potential risk factor [49–51]. None of the st udies found
weight shift behavior or frequency of weight shifts to be
associated with PU occ urrence. However, each of the
studies used self-report to measure weight shift practices.
Further objective analyses ar e needed to determine the
role of weight shifts in PU prevention.
CONCLUSIONS
The review of res earch corroborated the clinical
interventions commonly used for load redistribution but
also identified areas of uncertainty. As with all means of
prevention, some interventions are better supported than
others and some interventions have a legacy quality to
them and little el se. Nonetheless, several clinically ori-
ented suggestions can be made.
Support Surface Assessment
Selections of mattre sses, overlays, and cushions
should be based upon as sessment. Research is cle ar that
individual factors can contribute to PU susceptibility, and
all the PU risk assessment scales are based upon indi -
vidualized evaluation. Research has also shown that indi-
vidualized evaluation improves the selection of mattress
[52] and wheelchair cus hions [53]. Long-standing evi-
dence supports the use of seating clinics to select and pre-
scribe wheelchair cushions [54]. One of the benefits of
this type of individuali zed evaluation is its educational
aspect in informing patients and clients about skin health
and proper equipment use.
Interface Pressure
Interface pressure can be used to identify a reas of
unacceptably high pressures and to ensure a s ite is a de-
quately off-loaded during posture changes or a weight
shift. We advocate for use of pressure mapping to rule out
products rather than as a sole means to presc ribe a par-
ticular product [21]. For exa mple, if the interface pres-
sure under the ischial tuberosity is deemed too high for a
particular person by a clinician, then the clinician should
deem that p roduct unacceptable. That said, one cannot
infer that published IPM va lues will generalize to other
clients or patients. Another useful role for IPM is as sess-
ing how posture or position changes influence loading on
tissue. Repositioning in bed or while seated is necessary
to unweight different parts of the body. IPM can offer
visual feedback to clinicians, patients, and clients as they
sequence through different postures.
Weight Shift and Turning Frequency
Periodic repositioning is an important preventative
measure. Patients and clients who can independently
redistribute pressure should be educated to do so and
taught strategies to ensure compliance. Persons who can-
not reposition must rely on others to set and follow a rou-
tine. Evidence on how often a weight shi ft should be
performed and evidence behind turning schedules is lim-
ited. The odds are that repositioning frequency is not the
same for all people and surfaces. This can be inferred by
the wealth of evidence in dicating the individualized
nature of PU ris k and supports the approach that reposi-
tioning frequency should reflect the person, his or her
equipment, and the environment of use.
• Standard hospital beds are poor support surfaces.
Ample evidence has show n that standard ma ttresses
are inadequate to prevent PU s. Even relati vely “low
tech” mattresses and overlays offer better prevention
[12].
• Increasing activity has many health benefits, includ-
ing tissue health. In a study of more than 600 persons
with SCI with and without a history of recurrent PUs,
Krause and Broderick identif ied behaviors that were
shown to be protective [50]. These behaviors included
a healthy lifestyle, fitness, and exercise. Putting peo-
ple into equipment and postures that permit functional
activity addresses the key PU risk fac tor of immobil-
ity. We should promote reaching, leaning, and moving
as a means of promoting functional independence and
maintaining skin integrity.
• The European and U.S. National Pressure Ulcer Advi-
sory panels have recently released their joi nt Interna-
tional Pressure Ulcer Guidelines for Prevention and
Treatment. The document addresses both PU preven-
tion and PU trea tment by assessing many clinical
interventions.
• When reviewing conflicting literature, pay close atten-
tion to external validity. Literature regarding pressure
redistribution and support surfaces is o ften equivocal
and may be contradictory. This can oc cur because of
differences in methods, measurements, and subjects.
When reviewing literature, pay attention to how the
studies reflect your clinical situation. P erhaps some
studies better reflect your patient mix or techniques.
211
SPRIGLE and SONENBLUM. Redistributing pressure to
prevent pressure ulcers
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Study concept and design: S. Sprigle, S. Sonenblum.
Analysis and interpretation of data: S. Sprigle, S. Sonenblum.
Drafting of manuscript: S. Sprigle, S. Sonenblum.
Critical revision of manuscript for important intellectual
S. Sprigle, S. Sonenblum.
Administrative, technical, or materia
S. Sonenblum.
Financial Disclosures: The authors have declared that no
competing
interests exist.
Funding/Support: This material was based on work supported by
the
Rehabilitation Engineering Research Center on Wheeled
Mobility
(Mobility RERC) and the Georgia Institute of Technology. The
Mobil-
ity RERC is funded by the National Institute on Disability and
Reha-
bilitation Research of the U.S. Department of Education (grant
H133E080003).
Additional Contributions: We thank Dr. Kath Bogie for her
guid-
ance in outlining the manuscript and offering important
feedback.
Disclaimer: The opinions contained in this article are those of
the
authors and do not necessarily reflect those of the U.S.
Department of
Education or the Georgia Institute of Technology.
REFERENCES
1. Kosiak M. Etiology and pathology of ischemic ulcers. Arch
Phys Med Rehabil. 1959;40(2):62–69. [PMID: 13618101]
2. Reswick JB, Rogers JE. Experience at Rancho Los Amigos
Hospital with devices and techniques to prevent pressure
sores. In: Kenedi RM, Cowden JM, Scales JT, editors. Bed-
sore biomechanics. Baltimore (MD): University Park Press;
1976. p. 301–10.
3. Dinsdale SM. Decubitus ulcers in swine: Light and elec-
tron microscopy study of pathogenesis. Arch Phys Med
Rehabil. 1973;54(2):51–56. [PMID: 4692634]
4. Daniel RK, Wheatley D, Priest D. Pressure sores and para-
plegia: An experimental model. Ann Plast Surg. 1985;15(1):
41–
DOI:10.1097/00000637-198507000-00005
5. Linder-Ganz E, Gefen A. Mechanical compression-induced
pressure sores in rat hindlimb: Muscle stif fness, histology,
and computational models. J Appl Physiol. 2004;96(6):
2034–
DOI:10.1152/japplphysiol.00888.2003
6. Lassen NA, Holstein P. Use of radioisotopes in assessment
of distal blood flow and d istal blood pressure in arterial
insufficiency. Surg Clin North Am. 1974;54(1):39–
[PMID: 4814522]
7. Holloway GA, Daly CH, Kennedy D, Chimoskey J. Effects
of external pressure loadi ng on human skin blood flow
measured by 133Xe clearance. J Appl Physiol. 1976;40(4):
597–600. [PMID: 931880]
8. Ek AC, Gustavsson G, Lewis DH. Skin blood flow in rela-
tion to external pressure an d temperature in the supine
position on a standard hospital mattress. Scand J Rehabil
Med. 1987;19(3):121–26. [PMID: 3441774]
9. Sangeorzan BJ, Harrington RM, Wyss CR, Czerniecki JM,
Matsen FA 3rd. Circulatory and mech anical response of
skin to loading. J Orthop Res. 1989;7(3):425–
DOI:10.1002/jor.1100070315
10. Bennett L, Kavner D, Lee BK, Trainor FA. Shear vs pres-
sure as causative factors in skin blood flow occlusion. Arch
Phys Med Rehabil. 1979;60(7):309–14. [PMID: 454129]
11. Bar CA. The resp onse of tissues to applied pressure [dis-
sertation]. [Cardiff (UK)]: University of Wales College of
Medicine; 1988.
12. Cullum N, McIn nes E, Bell-Syer SE, Legood R. Support
surfaces for pressure ulcer prevention. C ochrane Database
Syst Rev. 2004;(3):CD001735. [PMID: 15266452]
13. Bar CA. Ev aluation of cushions using dynamic pressure
measurement. Prosthet Orthot Int. 1991;15(3):232–
[PMID: 1780227]
14. Ferguson-Pell MW, Wilkie IC, Reswick JB, Barbenel JC.
Pressure sore prevention for the wheelchair-bound spinal
injury patient. Paraplegia. 1980;18(1):42–
[PMID: 7375126]
15. Garber SL, Krouskop TA. Body build and its relationship to
pressure distribution in the seated wheelchair patient. Arch
Phys Med Rehabil. 1982;63(1):17–20. [PMID: 7055413]
16. Swain ID, Peters E. T he effects of posture, body mass
index and wheelchair adjustment on interface pressure. Sal-
isbury (England): Medical Devices Agency; 1997.
17. Brienza DM, Karg PE, Geyer MJ, Kelsey S, Trefler E. The
relationship between pressure ulcer incidence and buttock-
seat cushion interface pressure in at-risk elderly wheelchair
users. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 2001;82(4):529–
DOI:10.1053/apmr.2001.21854
18. Drummond D, Breed AL, Narechania R. Relationship of
spine deformity and pelvic obliquity on sitting pressure dis-
tributions and decubitus ulceration. J Pediatr Orthop. 1985;
5(4):396–402. [PMID: 3894415]
19. Conine TA, Hershler C, Daechsel D, Peel C, Pearson A.
Pressure ulcer prophylaxis in elderly patients using poly-
urethane foam or Jay wh eelchair cushions. Int J Reh abil
Res. 1994;17(2):123–
DOI:10.1097/00004356-199406000-00003
20. Oomens CW, Loerakker S, Bader DL. The importance of
internal strain as opposed to interface pressure in the p re-
vention of pressure related deep tissue injury. J Tissue Via-
bility. 2010;19(2):35–
DOI:10.1016/j.jtv.2009.11.002
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/13618101
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/4695834
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/4083714
http://dx.doi.org/10.1097/00000637-198507000-00005
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/14766784
http://dx.doi.org/10.1152/japplphysiol.00888.2003
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/4814522
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/931880
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/3441774
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/2703934
http://dx.doi.org/10.1002/jor.1100070315
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/454129
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/15266452
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/1780227
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/7375126
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/7055413
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/11295017
http://dx.doi.org/10.1053/apmr.2001.21854
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/3894415
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/7960335
http://dx.doi.org/10.1097/00004356-199406000-00003
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/20005716
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.jtv.2009.11.002
212
JRRD, Volume 48, Number 3, 2011
21. Pipkin L, Sprigl e S. Effect of model design, cushion con-
struction, and interface pressure mats on interface pressure
and immersion. J Rehabil Res Dev. 2008;45(6):875–
DOI:10.1682/JRRD.2007.06.0089
22. Reenalda J, Jannink M, Nederhand M, IJzerman M. Clini-
cal use of interface pressure to predict pressure ulcer devel-
opment: A systematic review. Assist Technol. 2009;21(2):
76–
DOI:10.1080/10400430903050437
23. Stockton L, Rit halia S. Is dynamic seating a modality
worth considering in the prevent ion of pressure ulcers?
J Tissue Viability. 2008;17(1):15–
DOI:10.1016/j.jtv.2007.09.011
24. Vanderwee K, Grypdonck M, Defloor T. Alternating pres-
sure air mattresses as prevention for pressure ulcers: A lit-
erature review. Int J Nurs Stud. 2008;45(5):784–
DOI:10.1016/j.ijnurstu.2007.07.003
25. De Looze MP, Kuijt-Evers LF, Van Dieën J. Sitting comfort
and discomfort and t he relationships with objective meas-
ures. Ergonomics. 2003;46(10):985–
DOI:10.1080/0014013031000121977
26. Fenety PA, Putnam C, Walker JM. In-chair movement:
Valid-
ity, reliability and implications for measuring sitting discom-
fort. Appl Ergon. 2000;31(4):383–
DOI:10.1016/S0003-6870(00)00003-X
27. Grandjean E. Sitting pos ture of car drivers from the point
of view of er gonomics. In: Ob orne DJ, Levis JA, ed itors.
Human factors in transport research. New York (NY): Aca-
demic Press; 1980. p. 240–48.
28. Reenalda J, Van Geffen P, Nederhand M, Jannink M, IJzer-
man M, Rietman H. An alysis of healthy sitting behavior:
Interface pressure distribution and subcutaneous tiss ue
oxygenation. J Rehabil Res Dev. 2009;46(5):577–
DOI:10.1682/JRRD.2008.12.0164
29. Richardson GM, Gardner S, Frant z RA. Nursing assess-
ment: Impact on type and cost of interventions to prevent
pressure ulcers. J W ound Ostomy Continence Nurs.
1998;25(6):273–
DOI:10.1016/S1071-5754(98)90024-9
30. Hagisawa S, Ferguson-Pell M. Evidence supporting the use
of two-hourly turning for pressure ulcer prevention. J Tis-
sue Viability. 2008;17(3):76–
DOI:10.1016/j.jtv.2007.10.001
31. Pressure ulcers in adults: Prediction and prevention. Wash-
ington (DC): Agency for Health Care Policy and Research;
1992.
32. Clark M. Repositioning to prevent pressure sores—What is
the
evidence? Nurs Stand. 1998;13(3):58–60. [PMID: 9847811]
33. Krapfl LA, Gray M. Does regular repositioning prevent
pressure ulcers? J Wound Ostomy Continence Nurs. 2008;
35(6):571–77. [PMID: 19018196]
34. Defloor T, De Bacquer D, Grypdonck MH. The ef fect of
various combinations of t urning and pressure reducing
devices on the incidence of pressure ulcers. Int J Nurs Stud.
2005;42(1):37–
DOI:10.1016/j.ijnurstu.2004.05.013
35. Gefen A. How much time do es it take to get a pressure
ulcer? Integrated evidence from human, a nimal, and in
vitro studies. Ostomy Wound Manage. 2008;54(10):26–
[PMID: 18927481]
36. Vanderwee K, Grypdonck MH, De Bacquer D, Defloor T.
Effectiveness of turning with unequal time intervals on the
incidence of pressure ulcer lesions. J Ad v Nurs. 2007;
57(1):59–
DOI:10.1111/j.1365-2648.2006.04060.x
37. Knox DM, Anderson TM, Anderson PS. Effects of differ-
ent turn in tervals on skin of healthy older adults. Adv
Wound Care. 1994;7(1):48–52. [PMID: 8149048]
38. Harada C, Shigematsu T, Hagisawa S. The effect of 10-
degree
leg elevation and 30-degree head elevation on body displace-
ment and sacral interface pressures over a 2-hour period.
J Wound Ostomy Continence Nurs. 2002;29(3):143–
DOI:10.1067/mjw.2002.123645
39. Peterson M, Schwab W, McCutcheon K, Van Oostrom JH,
Gravenstein N, Caruso L. Effects of elevating the head of
bed on inte rface pressure in volunteers. Crit Care Med.
2008;36(11):3038–
DOI:10.1097/CCM.0b013e31818b8dbd
40. Hobson DA, Tooms RE. Seated lumbar/pelvic alignment.
A comparison between spinal cord-injured and noninjured
groups. Spine. 1992;17(3):293–98. [PMID: 156616
DOI:10.1097/00007632-199203000-00009
41. Sprigle S, S chuch JZ. Using seat contour measurements
during seating evaluations of in dividuals with SCI. Assist
Technol. 1993;5(1):24–
DOI:10.1080/10400435.1993.10132204
42. Bergstrom N, Braden B, Boynton P, Bruch S. Using a
research-based assessment scale in clinical practice. Nurs
Clin North Am. 1995;30(3):539–51. [PMID: 7567578]
43. Salzberg CA, Byrne DW , Cayten CG, Van Niewerburgh P,
Murphy JG, Viehbeck M. A new pressure ulcer risk assess-
ment scale for in dividuals with spinal cord injury. Am
J Phys Med Rehabil. 1996;75(2):96–
DOI:10.1097/00002060-199603000-00004
44. Regan M, Teasell RW, Keast D, Mortenson WB, Aubut J.
Pressure ulcers following spinal cord in jury. In: Eng JJ,
Teasell RW, Miller WC, W olfe DL, T ownson AF, Aubut
JA, Abramson C, Hsieh JT, Connolly S, edit ors. Spinal
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/19009473
http://dx.doi.org/10.1682/JRRD.2007.06.0089
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/19715252
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/19715252
http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/10400430903050437
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/18293767
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.jtv.2007.09.011
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/17919638
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.ijnurstu.2007.07.003
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/12850935
http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/0014013031000121977
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/10975665
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S0003-6870%2800%2900003-X
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/19882492
http://dx.doi.org/10.1682/JRRD.2008.12.0164
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/9919142
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S1071-5754%2898%2990024-9
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/18722313
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.jtv.2007.10.001
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/9847811
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/19018196
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/15582638
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.ijnurstu.2004.05.013
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/18927481
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/17184374
http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2648.2006.04060.x
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/8149048
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/12011906
http://dx.doi.org/10.1067/mjw.2002.123645
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/18824905
http://dx.doi.org/10.1097/CCM.0b013e31818b8dbd
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/1566167
http://dx.doi.org/10.1097/00007632-199203000-00009
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/10148621
http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/10400435.1993.10132204
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/7567578
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/8630201
http://dx.doi.org/10.1097/00002060-199603000-00004
213
SPRIGLE and SONENBLUM. Redistributing pressure to
prevent pressure ulcers
cord injury rehabilitation evidence. Vancouver (Canada):
SCIRE; 2006.
45. Alverzo JP, Rosenberg JH, Sorensen CA, DeLeon SS. Nurs-
ing care and education for patients with spinal cord injury.
In: Sisto SA, D ruin E, Sl iwinski MM, editors. Spinal cord
injuries: Management and rehabilitation. St. Louis (MO):
Mosby; 2009. DOI:10.1016/B978-032300699-6.10003-6
46. Sliwinski MM, Druin E. Intervention principles and position
change. In: Sisto SA, Druin E, Sliwinski MM, editors. Spinal
cord injuries: Management and rehabilitation. St. Louis (MO):
Mosby; 2009. DOI:10.1016/B978-032300699-6.10007-3
47. Nawoczenski DA. Pressure sores: Prevention and manage-
ment. In: Buchanan LE, Nawo czenski DA, edito rs. Spinal
cord injury: Concepts and management approaches. Balti-
more (MD): Williams & Wilkins; 1987.
48. Coggrave MJ, Rose LS. A s pecialist seating asses sment
clinic: Changing pressure relief practice. Spinal Cord.
2003;41(12):692–
DOI:10.1038/sj.sc.3101527
49. Raghavan P, Raza WA, Ahmed YS, Chambe rlain MA.
Prevalence of pressure sores in a community sample of spi-
nal injury patients. Clin Rehabil. 2003;17(8):879–
DOI:10.1191/0269215503cr692oa
50. Krause JS, Broderick L. Patterns of recu rrent pressure
ulcers after s pinal cord injury: Identification of risk and
protective factors 5 or more years after onset. Arch Phys
Med Rehabil. 2004;85(8):1257–
DOI:10.1016/j.apmr.2003.08.108
51. Garber SL, Rintala DH, Ha rt KA, Fuhrer MJ. Pressure
ulcer risk in spinal cord injury: Predictors of ulcer status
over 3 years. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 2000;81(4):465–
DOI:10.1053/mr.2000.3889
52. Russell T, Bsn AL, Lohman JA. A medical center’s experi-
ence with managing specialty bed usage. J Wound Ostomy
Continence Nurs. 2001;28(6):274–
DOI:10.1067/mjw.2001.119011
53. Garber SL, Dyerly LR. Wheelchair cushions for persons
with spinal cord injury: An update. Am J Occup Ther.
1991;45(6):550–54. [PMID: 2063944]
54. Krouskop TA, Noble PC, Garber SL, Spencer W A. The
effectiveness of preventive management in reducing the
occurrence of pressu re sores. J Rehabil Res Dev . 1983;
20(1):74–83. [PMID: 6887068]
Submitted for publication May 26, 2010. Accepted in
revised form August 16, 2010.
This article and any supplementary material should be
Sprigle S, Sonenblum S. As sessing evidence supporting
redistribution of pressure for pressure ulcer prevention: A
review. J Rehabil Res Dev. 2011;48(3):203–
DOI:10.1682/JRRD.2010.05.0102
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/B978-032300699-6.10003-6
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/B978-032300699-6.10007-3
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/14639449
http://dx.doi.org/10.1038/sj.sc.3101527
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/14682560
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/14682560
http://dx.doi.org/10.1191/0269215503cr692oa
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/15295750
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.apmr.2003.08.108
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/10768537
http://dx.doi.org/10.1053/mr.2000.3889
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/11707759
http://dx.doi.org/10.1067/mjw.2001.119011
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/2063944
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/6887068
Copyright of Journal of Rehabilitation Research & Development
is the property of VA Prosthetics Research &
Development Center and its content may not be copied or
emailed to multiple sites or posted to a listserv
without the copyright holder's express written permission.
However, users may print, download, or email
articles for individual use.
This content is in the Public Domain.
477
JRRDJRRD Volume 50, Number 4, 2013Pages 477–488
Patient repositioning and pressure ulcer risk—Monitoring
interface
pressures of at-risk patients
Matthew J. Peterson, PhD;1* Nikolaus Gravenstein, MD;2
Wilhelm K. Schwab, PhD;2 Johannes H. van
Oostrom, PhD;1 Lawrence J. Caruso, MD2
1J. Crayton Pruitt Family Department of Biomedical
Engineering, University of Florida College of Engineering,
Gainesville, FL; 2Department of Anesthesiology, University of
Florida College of Medicine, Gainesville, FL
Abstract—Repositioning patients regularly to prevent pres-
sure ulcers and reduce interface pressures is the standard of
care, yet prior work has found that standard repositioning does
not relieve all areas of at-risk tissue in nondisabled subjects. To
determine whether this holds true for high-risk patients, we
assessed the effectiveness of routine repositioning in relieving
at-risk tissue of the perisacral area using interface pressure
mapping. Bedridden patients at risk for pressure ulcer forma-
tion (n = 23, Braden score <18) had their perisacral skin-bed
interface pressures recorded every 30 s while they received
routine repositioning care for 4–6 h. All participants had spe-
cific skin areas (206 +/– 182 cm2) that exceeded elevated pres-
sure thresholds for >95% of the observation period. Thirteen
participants were observed in three distinct positions (supine,
turned left, turned right), and all had specific skin areas (166
+/–
184 cm2) that exceeded pressure thresholds for >95% of the
observation period. At-risk patients have skin areas that are
likely always at risk throughout their hospital stay despite
repositioning. Healthcare providers are unaware of the actual
tissue-relieving effectiveness (or lack thereof) of their reposi-
tioning interventions, which may partially explain why pressure
ulcer mitigation strategies are not always successful. Relieving
at-risk tissue is a necessary part of pressure ulcer prevention,
but the repositioning practice itself needs improvement.
Key words: decubitus ulcer, interface pressure, patient reposi-
tioning, pressure, pressure sore, pressure ulcer, pressure ulcer
risk, prevention, standard of care, triple-jeopardy area.
INTRODUCTION
Pressure ulcers are a high-risk, high-volume, and
high-cost problem for hospitalized and bedridden
patients. Overall pressure ulcer prevalence rates have
been reported at 12.3 percent across all facilities, with
prevalence being highest in long-term acute care facili-
ties (22%), and facility-acquired prevalence being high-
est in adult intensive care units (8.8%–10.3%) [1].
Preventing pressure ulcers and reducing their incidence is
an ongoing challenge because they are associated with
increased cost, length of stay, morbidity, and mortality.
Managing one full-thickness ulcer can cost up to $70,000
[2], and over $17 billion is spent on pressure ulcer treat-
ments annually in the United States [3].
Note: The authors would like to dedicate this article
to the memory of their colleague Dr. Schwab.
Abbreviations: BMI = body mass index, HOB = head of bed,
NPUAP = National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel, q2h =
every 2 h, SLR = supine-left-right.
*Address all correspondence to Matthew J. Peterson, PhD;
James A. Haley Department of Veterans Affairs Medical
Center (151R), HSR&D/RR&D Center of Excellence, 8900
Grand Oak Circle, Tampa, FL 33637; 813-558-3979; fax:
813-558-3990. Email: [email protected]
http://dx.doi.org/10.1682/JRRD.2012.03.0040
mailto:[email protected]
478
JRRD, Volume 50, Number 4, 2013
A pressure ulcer, as defined by the National Pressure
Ulcer Advisory Panel (NPUAP), is a “localized injury to the
skin and/or underlying tissue usually over a bony promi-
nence, as a result of pressure, or pressure in combination
with shear and/or friction” [4]. It is widely accepted that
this mechanical loading is the main cause of pressure
ulcer formation; however, the pathophysiological
responses to this loading are less agreed upon [5]. Theo-
ries include localized ischemia [6], reperfusion injury [7],
impaired interstitial fluid flow [8], and sustained cell
deformation [9]. Tissue-loading models have been devel-
oped to study pressure ulcer formation, and results have
shown that acute stresses and strains in the deep tissue
(fat, muscle), which is more susceptible to damage than
the skin, present themselves before they are apparent in
the superficial tissue [5,10–11]. However, tissue pres-
sures greater than capillary pressure can be endured for
some time before ischemia results [12].
Pressure ulcers result when increased pressure on the
skin and subcutaneous tissues exceeds the local capillary
pressure, which compromises blood flow and results in
ischemia and decreased oxygen delivery [13]. Healthy
capillary pressures typically range from 10 to 30 mm Hg
[14]; however, capillary pressures may be lower for indi-
viduals in poor health [15–16]. Studies on blood flow in
response to loading vary in the amount of pressure
required to stop or reduce blood flow and oxygen deliv-
ery as well as by anatomical location or tissue type [17–
21]. Therefore, no widely accepted value exists that will
ultimately lead to pressure ulceration [5,22]. When pres-
sures exceed capillary pressure, tissue hypoperfusion,
accumulation of metabolites, and impairment of tissue
reperfusion may occur, all of which can damage the tis-
sue [23–25]. It is well established in animal and human
studies that not only is the magnitude of pressure a factor
for tissue damage but the duration is important as well—
the greater the pressure, the less time it takes until dam-
age occurs [6,22,26–29]. Over time, prolonged high pres-
sure applied to a tissue area will inevitably cause damage.
Interface pressure is the perpendicular force per unit area
between the support surface and the body. Interface pres-
sures are greatest around the sacrum, coccyx, and ischial
tuberosities, so it is not surprising that the majority of
pressure ulcers develop near these locations [30–31]. How-
ever, note that tissue interface pressures do not directly
measure internal tissue and capillary pressures [22].
The Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services
recently designated pressure ulcers as a quality measure,
and consequently, they will not reimburse additional
patient expenses resulting from a reasonably preventable
condition that occurs while providing care [32–33]. Thus,
pressure ulcers have become a liability for hospitals,
long-term care facilities, and other healthcare providers
[34–35]. However, disagreement persists about the pre-
sumed inherent preventability of all pressure ulcers [36–
37]. To address this issue, the NPUAP hosted a multidis-
ciplinary consensus conference in 2010 and redefined
what is generally considered avoidable and unavoidable.
The group unanimously agreed that most, but not all,
pressure ulcers are avoidable [37]. Consensus was
reached that “unavoidable pressure ulcers may develop in
patients who are hemodynamically unstable, terminally
ill, have certain medical devices in place, and are nonad-
herent with artificial nutrition or repositioning” [37].
PATIENT REPOSITIONING
Repositioning patients regularly—every 2 h (q2h)—
to prevent sustained high pressures on any particular tis-
sue area is the standard of care [2,16,37–40]. However,
several recent studies in which repositioning was used as
the primary intervention strategy failed to reduce the
incidence of pressure ulcer formation [39–41]. Addition-
ally, the NPUAP conference could not reach a consensus
that q2h repositioning should be the standard of care.
However, they did agree that q2h repositioning should be
the “guideline for care” when clinically appropriate [37].
It was also unanimously agreed that pressure-redistributing
surfaces cannot replace patient repositioning care [37].
Our prior work found that standard, lateral turning by
experienced nurses does not reliably relieve all areas of
high skin-bed interface pressures in the perisacral region
of nondisabled adult subjects [42], i.e., the collective tis-
sue area around the sacrum, coccyx, and ischial tuberosi-
ties. Even though subjects are repositioned and the
perisacral area is no longer touching the mattress, this
perisacral skin area remains exposed to significant levels
of interface pressure between the pillow or wedge that is
supporting the laterally turned position. Furthermore,
specific skin areas remain at risk even after being placed
in all three positions: supine, turned left, and turned right.
These specific skin regions are termed “triple-jeopardy
areas” because the same tissue remains at risk while in any
of the three different positions [42]. This may help explain
why pressure ulcers still develop despite implementation of
479
PETERSON et al. Patient repositioning and pressure ulcer risk
standard preventive measures, including scheduled
patient repositioning. To determine whether this is the
case for at-risk patients, this study examined the effect of
routine repositioning over an extended time period on the
interface pressures of the perisacral skin area of bedrid-
den patients at risk for pressure ulcer formation using
interface pressure mapping.
METHODS
Study Design
We performed a descriptive, observational study, col-
lecting data at a tertiary care, university-affiliated hospi-
tal with 170 intensive and intermediate care beds from
2007 to 2009. Subjects were invited to enroll in the study
during regular care by their physician. We hypothesized
that bedridden patients undergoing q2h repositioning
would demonstrate a triple-jeopardy area (i.e., triple-
jeopardy area is not zero). To achieve a power of 80 per-
cent, a one-tailed test with an effect size of 0.8, and an
error probability of 5 percent required a minimum sample
size of 12. The effect size, though seemingly large, is
conservative based on results from our previous study
with nondisabled subjects [42] and, since a negative area
does not exist, a one-tailed test is appropriate. We enrolled
participants in the study until we monitored at least 12 in
all three distinct positions: supine, turned left, and turned
right. To compute the power, we used G*Power 3.0
(Institut für Experimentelle Psychologie, Heinrich Heine
Universität Düsseldorf; Düsseldorf, Germany).
Subjects
We enrolled 23 participants in the study from a con-
venience sampling of intensive care (n = 20) and interme-
diate care (n = 3) unit patients. We obtained written
informed consent from the patient or his or her proxy.
The patient inclusion criteria were bedridden, residing in
intensive care or intermediate care unit, at risk for pres-
sure ulcer formation determined by a Braden score of
-
ing as part of routine care. Not all patients were intubated
or sedated, but none was able to reposition themselves in
bed. Table 1 shows the demographics of the study cohort
(sex, age, height, weight, and body mass index [BMI])
and Braden scores (on date of data collection). The
subgroup of patients that we observed in all three posi-
tions will be referred to as the supine-left-right (SLR)
group (n = 13).
Instrumentation
We obtained interface pressure measurements using a
pressure mapping system (XSENSOR Technology Cor-
poration; Calgary, Canada). The pressure sensor is a flexi-
ble, thin pad with 48 × 48 half-inch sensors forming a 24 ×
24 in.2 array. The 2,304 independent sensors use proprie-
tary capacitive technology to discretely measure the pres-
sures applied to the sensor array. The interface box relays
individual pressure information from each sensor to a
computer for real-time visualization and recording. We
calibrated the sensor array according to the manufac-
turer’s recommendations to measure pressures from 10 to
200 mm Hg, with a reported accuracy of ±10 percent,
placing the sensor array between two air bladders held
together in a metal frame and inflated to specific pres-
sures. During calibration, sensor readings were all within
±10 percent of the measured value across the calibrated
range. We used the same calibration file for all subjects.
Before use in the clinical environment, we wrapped the
sensor array in very thin (0.0254 mm) plastic sheeting to
protect it from contamination and placed it beneath the
patient’s underpads (thin, towel-like incontinence pads).
We disinfected the sensor array after each use. We used a
modern hospital bed with low air-loss technology for all
measurements (Total Care or Total Care SpO2RT, Hill-
Rom; Batesville, Indiana). The bed’s built-in ball-bearing
indicator located in the side rail of the bed indicated the
head of bed (HOB) elevation.
Protocol
We placed the sensor array beneath the patient, span-
ning from the lower back to mid-thigh to ensure data col-
lection of the perisacral area. Placing the sensor array
required the nurses to roll the patient to one side and then
the other so that the array could be positioned, without
wrinkles, beneath the patient.
We recorded interface pressure measurements every
30 s as the patient lay in bed and received routine care,
which included lateral turning by his or her nurse. The
lateral turning methods included the use of pillows and/or
wedges placed behind the back and thighs. The reposi-
tioning technique was not prescribed by the study, and
the nursing technique was unconstrained so that the
results would reflect current clinical practice. Any pil-
lows or wedges that were used to maintain a laterally
Patient Sex Age (yr) Height (m) Weight (kg) BMI Braden Score
SLR Group
1 M 65 1.78 111 35.0 13 —
2 F 73 1.65 75 27.5 — —
3 M 69 1.83 80 23.9 16 —
5 M 70 1.78 86 27.3 15 —
8 F 53 1.68 70 24.9 12 —
9 M 58 1.73 120 40.1 15 —
10 M 71 1.80 65 20.1 16 —
14 M 76 1.75 79 25.7 11 —
15 F 74 1.60 71 27.7 15 —
16 F 67 1.40 55 28.2 12 —
Total 14 M, 9 F 63.3 ± 12.7 1.70 ± 0.11 85.9 ± 21.9 29.3 ± 5.6
13.3 ± 2.8 —
SLR Group 8 M, 5 F 60.1 ± 15.2 1.71 ± 0.09 89.6 ± 23.2 30.3 ±
480
JRRD, Volume 50, Number 4, 2013
turned position were placed beneath the sensor array to
allow continuous measurement of interface pressures
between the patient and the supporting device. The sensor
array was inspected after each turn to confirm that the
patient’s perisacral area was recorded. If the sensor array
got bunched up or if the patient’s perisacral area moved
off the array, adjustments were made only when the
patient was already in the process of being repositioned
to avoid interfering with patient care.
We monitored patients for 4 to 6 h. We chose this
time frame to allow for observation of the three distinct
positions (supine, turned left, and turned right) during the
q2h repositioning protocol. The same investigator (M.P.)
recorded the general positioning of the patient (direction
of turn and HOB elevation) for all of the data collection
periods for all patients. We obtained demographic infor-
mation from the patients’ charts.
Data Variables
Definitions of four data variables of interest and how
we calculated them include—
• At-risk areas (centimeters squared) for pressure ulcer
formation are the skin areas exposed to various inter-
face pressure thresholds (32 mm Hg—a historical and
contested value [5,16,20,22]—used for statistical
analyses, 40 mm Hg, and 50 mm Hg). We calculated
at-risk areas for every position experienced by each
patient, as well as for how long these particular skin
Table 1.
Patient demographics and Braden score data. These data
represent mean ± standard deviation for demographic and
Braden score data for study
cohort and for supine-left-right (SLR) group.
female, M = male.
481
PETERSON et al. Patient repositioning and pressure ulcer risk
areas were at risk. At-risk areas could be located over
any load-bearing tissue, such as the greater trochanter
while laterally turned.
• Always-at-risk areas (centimeters squared) are the
skin areas at risk for >95 percent of the total observa-
tion period, regardless of the number of positions
experienced. We used >95 percent of the patient’s
monitoring time rather than 100 percent to provide a
more realistic representation of what the patients actu-
ally experienced. For example, if a patient momen-
tarily rolled to one side and then back during a
recording, the pressure profile could indicate that spe-
cific tissue areas were relieved, though just briefly.
• Triple-jeopardy areas (centimeters squared) refer to
the same always-at-risk areas of skin that coincide in
all three positions. This term only applies to the
patients observed in all three distinct positions and to
areas in the perisacral region.
• Peak pressure over time (millimeters of mercury) was
calculated by averaging the peak interface pressure
measurement of each pressure profile obtained over
the duration of each position (supine, turned left, or
turned right). This value demonstrates the constancy
of the maximal pressures experienced, rather than just
a one-time value experienced for 30 s of a 2 h time
period.
Data Analysis
We used MATLAB (MathWorks; Natick, Massachu-
setts) and Excel (Microsoft; Redmond, Washington) to
image, align, analyze, compile, plot, and compare the
interface pressure data. Each pressure profile provided
the interface pressure (millimeters of mercury) at each of
the 2,304 discrete sensors. We determined peak interface
pressures and confined them to the tissues surrounding the
perisacral area, buttocks, and greater trochanters. We also
calculated the skin areas that were subjected to various
pressure thresholds over time. In addition to the 32 mm Hg
threshold, we also analyzed the data using more strin-
gent at-risk area interface pressure thresholds of 40 and
50 mm Hg, an increase of 25 and 56 percent, respectively.
We used the pressure profiles of the various positions
obtained for each patient to determine how repositioning
affected the patients’ interface pressures. We anatomi-
cally aligned the pressure profile images by maximizing
normalized two-dimensional cross-correlation, as con-
ducted in previous work [42], and then adjusted them fur-
ther, if necessary, by visual inspection to ensure that skin
areas from one position were compared with the same
skin areas of another position. We used a one-sample
Wilcoxon signed rank test to test the hypothesis that the
triple-jeopardy area was not zero. Wilcoxon rank sum
and signed rank tests were used, as appropriate, to com-
pare interface pressures, at-risk areas, and triple-jeopardy
areas between positions. We also compared these at-risk
patients with the nondisabled subject findings from
Peterson et al. [42] using similar statistical techniques;
we considered p < 0.05 significant.
RESULTS
Pressure Profiles and Patient Positioning
We recorded a total of 15,784 pressure profiles from
more than 131 h of patient monitoring; each patient was
monitored an average of 5.7 ± 1.0 h. We could not ana-
lyze some of the pressure profiles (<8%) because data
were recorded during patient repositioning or because the
perisacral area had moved off the sensor array. After
removing these profiles, we analyzed 14,527 pressure
profiles from 121 h of monitoring. The SLR group con-
sisted of 8,028 profiles from 66.9 h of monitoring time.
Table 2 shows the specific positions observed for
each patient. We recorded the HOB elevations for each of
the positions periodically throughout the study. For the
supine position, the average HOB elevation was 30°
–65°); for the turned-left position, the average
–40°); and for the
turned-right position, the average HOB elevation was
–45°).
Interface Pressures and At-Risk Areas
The peak interface pressures, peak pressures over
time, and at-risk areas did not differ significantly by posi-
tion (Table 3). However, on an individual basis, the peak
interface pressures and specific areas of at-risk skin were
susceptible to significant changes upon patient reposi-
tioning. For example, the peak interface pressures for one
patient upon being turned to the left from a supine posi-
tion increased nearly threefold due to shifting of the
patient’s body weight directly over the greater trochanter
(Figure 1).
Always-at-Risk and Triple-Jeopardy Areas
All 23 patients demonstrated always-at-risk areas,
with a mean always-at-risk area of 206 ± 182 cm2 (Table 2).
Patient Positions No. of Positions Always-at-Risk Area (cm2)
Triple-Jeopardy Area
(cm2)
1 R, L, R, L 4 297 —
2 R, L 2 5 —
3 S, L 2 469 —
4 S, L, R, L 4 8 8
5 S, L, S 3 73 —
6 S, R, S, L 4 108 108
7 S, L, R 3 119 119
8 S, L 2 169 —
9 S 1 261 —
10 R 1 247 —
11 S, R, L, R 4 110 110
12 R, S, L 3 456 456
13 S, R, L 3 613 613
14 S, Sit, S, R 4 516 —
15 S, L 2 427 —
16 R, L, R, L 4 105 —
17 S, L, S, R 4 76 76
18 R, S, L 3 15 15
19 R, L, R, S 4 195 195
20 S, L, R 3 248 248
21 S, R, L 3 2 2
22 S, L, R 3 15 15
23 S, L, R 3 194 194
Mean ± SD — 3.00 ± 0.95 206 ± 182 166 ± 184
482
JRRD, Volume 50, Number 4, 2013
Accordingly, all 13 patients in the SLR group demon-
strated triple-jeopardy areas as well and had a mean tri-
ple-jeopardy area of 166 ± 184 cm2 (Table 2). These
unambiguous results support our hypothesis that bedrid-
den, at-risk patients do demonstrate a triple-jeopardy area
(SLR group, p < 0.001) or always-at-risk area (all
patients, p < 0.001). To view the areas of skin that were
always-at-risk and for how long, we compiled the at-risk
areas from every pressure profile from each patient’s
entire monitoring period. Figure 2 illustrates the typical
interface pressure profiles for the three different positions
and how the at-risk skin areas were affected over time.
We also analyzed the data with more stringent inter-
face pressure thresholds. At 40 mm Hg, 18 of 23 patients
(9 of 13 in SLR group) had always-at-risk areas, and at
50 mm Hg, 10 of 23 patients (3 of 13 in SLR group) still
had always-at-risk areas. Since the at-risk patients dif-
fered in age, Braden score, and body type, we also ana-
lyzed the data to see whether any of these factors affected
the results. However, no trend emerged upon analyzing
always-at-risk or triple-jeopardy areas with respect to
age, height, weight, BMI, or Braden score.
DISCUSSION
Regular q2h repositioning of patients is the standard
of care that is routinely implemented to reduce the risk of
pressure ulcer formation. Our results clearly demonstrate
that bedridden, at-risk patients have substantial areas of
Table 2.
At-risk patient positions observed and corresponding always-at-
risk and/or triple-jeopardy areas.
Note: In “Sit” position, head of bed was 65°.
L = left, R = right, S = supine, SD = standard deviation.
Peak Interface Pressures (mm Hg) PositionSupine Left Right
At-Risk Patients with HOB Elevation
Peak Pressures*† 122.5 ± 45.1 134.2 ± 43.7 119.8 ± 33.8
Peak Pressures Over Time* 99.1 ± 34.3 99.5 ± 30.0 88.9 ±
17.1
Nondisabled Subjects — 69.2 ± 12.8 64.8 ± 9.1
Left Side
68.6 ± 19.5 — —
Right Side
65.8 ± 11.7 — —
— 84.5 ± 17.5 80.4 ± 11.4
At-Risk Areas (cm2) PositionSupine Left Right
At-Risk Patients with HOB Elevation‡ 716 ± 290 742 ± 304 744
± 287
Nondisabled Subjects — 468 ± 151 434 ± 147
Left Side
470 ± 170 — —
Right Side
480 ± 170 — —
— 569 ± 192 558 ± 159
Triple-Jeopardy and Always-at-Risk
Areas (cm2) Triple-Jeopardy Area Always-at-Risk Area
At-Risk Patients 166 ± 184 206 ± 182§
Nondisabled Subjects 60 ± 54 —
483
PETERSON et al. Patient repositioning and pressure ulcer risk
skin that do not get relieved and remain at risk despite
repositioning by experienced nurses. This observation
was not isolated to only a few patients—all 23 patients
monitored in this study demonstrated always-at-risk
areas. We monitored patients for approximately 6 h con-
secutively, and they had specific skin areas that remained
at risk during the entire observation period. Based on
these results, we can reasonably assume that these skin
areas are at risk for the majority of time a patient is bed-
ridden. These results mirror those of the nondisabled sub-
ject study that first described the triple-jeopardy area
phenomenon [42] and confirm that at-risk patients also
have substantial always-at-risk skin areas despite routine
repositioning.
Since there is no widely accepted value for an inter-
face pressure threshold for tissue risk or damage, we also
used more stringent interface pressure thresholds. Upon
evaluation with greater interface pressure thresholds, the
results revealed that always-at-risk areas and triple-jeopardy
areas still continued to exist in a significant subset of at-
risk patients, which suggests that the current standard of
care is not sufficient. However, of the patients that dem-
onstrated an always-at-risk area, the fraction of those
patients that were from the SLR group decreased as the
interface pressure thresholds increased. Furthermore, the
mean always-at-risk area was less for the SLR group (tri-
ple-jeopardy area) than for the overall study population
as a whole. These results provide objective support that
routine patient repositioning, when done properly,
reduces always-at-risk areas, which should, in turn,
reduce pressure ulcer risk. Accordingly, future studies are
needed to assess whether patients with always-at-risk
Table 3.
Comparison of interface pressure (mm Hg), at-risk areas (cm2),
triple-jeopardy areas (cm2), and always at-risk areas (cm2)
between patients at
risk for pressure ulcer formation and nondisabled subjects. Data
were taken on
same brand of modern hospital bed. Nondisabled subject data
from Peterson et al. [42].
*At-risk patient values were significantly larger than
nondisabled subjects for corresponding supine and laterally
turned positions (p < 0.001).
†At-risk patient values were significantly larger than
nondisabled subjects for corresponding turned with HOB
elevation positions (p < 0.001).
‡At-risk patient values were significantly larger than
nondisabled subjects for corresponding supine and laterally
turned positions (p < 0.003).
§At-risk patient values were significantly larger than
nondisabled subjects (p < 0.006).
HOB = head of bed.
484
JRRD, Volume 50, Number 4, 2013
areas are more likely to develop (1) pressure ulcers,
(2) more severe pressure ulcers, and/or (3) pressure
ulcers at these specific
Figure 1.
Interface pressure changes by position. Peak interface pressures
over time are displayed for two different patients. Peak
pressures
were located around perisacral area and greater trochanters.
Repositioning at times resulted in large sustained changes in
peak pressures (bottom graph) but not always (top graph).
(a) Peak interface pressures for patient 6 initially in supine
posi-
tion, turned right at minute 7, supine at minute 210, and turned
left at minute 325. (b) Peak interface pressure for patient 18
initially
turned right, supine at minute 147, and turned left at minute
268.
tissue locations.
Despite the standard of care (q2h), repositioning
intervals varied between patients (Table 2, “Positions”)
and none was effective in relieving all at-risk tissue areas.
For example, two patients were not repositioned during
the entire monitoring period. It was not clear why the
repositioning procedures were different, but we believe
our observations mirror typical interoperator reposition-
ing technique differences. All the same, it may not matter
exactly how repositioning is accomplished, but rather
that the at-risk tissue gets relieved regularly from pres-
sure. To put our observations in perspective, the average
always-at-risk area was over 200 cm2; therefore, an area
one-third the size of an 8.5 × 11 in. sheet of paper is not
getting relieved and remains at risk for pressure ulcer for-
mation. Hence, future research is needed to establish how
pressure mapping, implemented as a patient monitoring
device or as a means to educate caregivers to improve
their repositioning techniques, can further reduce or elim-
inate high skin-bed interface pressures, at-risk areas, and
always-at-risk areas (including triple-jeopardy areas) in
at-risk patients to reduce pressure ulcer risk.
We are not aware of any prior work examining the
interface pressures of a cohort of patients during an inter-
val of care that covers the spectrum of positions experi-
enced by patients who typically have the highest
prevalence of pressure ulcer formation. Comparing the
at-risk patients of this study with nondisabled subjects
[42] (for values and statistical significance, see Table 3),
we found the peak interface pressures were 49 to 59 per-
cent and 85 to 94 percent higher for the at-risk patients
than for nondisabled subjects, with and without HOB ele-
vation, respectively. The peak pressures over time of at-
risk patients were 11 to 18 percent and 37 to 51 percent
greater than the peak pressures of nondisabled subjects,
with and without HOB elevation, respectively. The at-risk
areas were 30 to 33 percent and 52 to 71 percent larger
for the at-risk patients than nondisabled subjects in the
supine and laterally turned positions, with and without
HOB elevation, respectively. The triple-jeopardy and
always-at-risk areas were also considerably larger for the
at-risk patients than for nondisabled subjects, 277 and
343 percent, respectively. Perhaps due to pain, frailty,
medical condition, or the reservation of nurses to not dis-
turb the patient too much, bedridden at-risk patients
experience higher interface pressures and larger at-risk
and always-at-risk areas (including triple-jeopardy areas)
than nondisabled subjects. These results that demonstrate
at-risk patients have higher interface pressures than non-
disabled subjects are consistent with data reported by
Berjian et al. [43].
Our study had a few limitations. First, tissue interface
pressures do not directly measure internal tissue and cap-
illary pressures. We are not implying that an at-risk area
485
PETERSON et al. Patient repositioning and pressure ulcer risk
is ischemic, but we feel these areas are at-risk due to ele-
vated interface pressures. Moreover, interface pressure
mapping is currently the best noninvasive method to
measure pressures applied to the skin. The use of peak
interface pressures has been reported to be unreliable for
test-retest scenarios [44], but this did not affect our
always-at-risk and triple-jeopardy results. Second,
patient shifting and/or raising the HOB could result in a
patient moving off the sensor array, generating unusable
pressure profiles
Figure 2.
Interface pressure profiles by position and triple-jeopardy areas.
(a) Typical perisacral interface pressure profiles from one
intensive
care unit patient; color bar is in millimeters of mercury with
color denoting at-risk areas. (b) Total amount of triple-jeopardy
(always-at-
risk) area. (c) Schematic of patient lying in bed on pressure
sensor. Pressure profiles should be viewed as if you are facing
patient.
(d) Amounts of time specific areas of skin were at risk across
all positions experienced by patient. Color bar indicates time (in
hours)
that specific skin areas were at risk. Areas at risk for maximal
amount of time (dark red) were always at risk and never
relieved.
(<8% of total data collected). However,
active movements (absent shear) are likely beneficial
because they redistribute the patient’s weight similar to
nondisabled people, for example, when shifting weight
while sitting in a chair. Third, we anatomically aligned
patient interface pressure profiles when necessary to
ascertain that specific areas of skin were correctly
tracked over time. We needed alignment for half of the
patients we observed. This adjustment, or any patient
movement, could have led to minor errors in tracking
specific skin areas, but we found no significant difference
in triple-jeopardy or always-at-risk areas between patients
who had their pressure profiles aligned compared with
those who did not. Last, we placed the sensor array beneath
the patient’s underpads to protect it from the patient and
additional contaminants and so that it would not be used
in place of the underpads to help lift and reposition the
486
JRRD, Volume 50, Number 4, 2013
patient. The underpads may aid in slight pressure relief,
thus resulting in lower measured pressures.
CONCLUSIONS
Bedridden patients at risk for pressure ulcer forma-
tion exhibit high skin-bed interface pressures and specific
skin areas that are likely always at risk (i.e., triple-jeopardy
and always-at-risk areas) for the vast majority of the time
patients are in bed despite routine repositioning care.
Healthcare providers are unaware of the actual tissue-
relieving effectiveness (or lack thereof) of their reposi-
tioning interventions, which may partially explain why
pressure ulcer mitigation strategies are not always suc-
cessful. Relieving at-risk tissue is a necessary part of
pressure ulcer prevention, but the repositioning practice
itself needs improvement. Further research is needed to
determine how pressure mapping can be used to develop
better patient repositioning techniques and improve at-
risk tissue pressure relief to help prevent pressure ulcer
formation.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Author Contributions:
Study concept and design: M. J. Peterson, N. Graven
W. K. Schwab, J. H. van Oostrom, L. J. Caruso.
Data collection: M. J. Peterson, W. K. Schwab, L. J. Caruso.
Data analysis: M. J. Peterson.
Data interpretation: M. J. Peterson, N. Gravenstein, W. K.
J. H. van Oostrom, L. J. Caruso.
Drafting of manuscript: M. J. Peterson.
Critical revision of manuscript for important intellectual
M. J. Peterson, N. Gravenstein, W. K. Schwab, J. H. van
L. J. Caruso.
Financial Disclosures: The authors have declared that no
competing
interests exist.
Funding/Support: This material was based on work supported by
the
Department of Anesthesiology, University of Florida College of
Engineering, University of Florida College of Engineering;
Shands
Hospital, University of Florida College of Medicine; and Health
Development Center of Excellence, James A. Haley Department
of
Veterans Affairs Medical Center.
Additional Contributions: This work was presented in part at the
2010 National Patient Safety Foundation Patient Safety
Congress,
Orlando, Florida (May 17–19, 2010), and the NPUAP Biennial
Con-
ference, Las Vegas, Nevada (February 25–26, 2011). Dr.
Peterson is
now with the Health Services Research &
Development/Rehabilita-
tion Research & Development Center of Excellence, James A.
Haley
Department of Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Tampa,
Florida.
Institutional Review: This study received institutional review
board
approval and all patients or their proxies provided informed
consent.
Participant Follow-up: The authors have no plans to inform the
par-
ticipants of the publication of this study.
Disclaimer: The contents of this manuscript are those of the
authors
alone and do not represent the views of the Department of
Veterans
Affairs, the University of Florida, or the U.S. Government.
REFERENCES
1. VanGilder C, Amlung S, Harrison P, Meyer S. Results of
the 2008–2009 International Pressure Ulcer Prevalence
Survey and a 3-year, acute care, unit-specific analysis.
Ostomy Wound Manage. 2009;55(11):39–
[PMID:19934462]
2. Reddy M, Gill SS, Rochon PA. Preventing pressure ulcers:
a systematic review. JAMA. 2006;296(8):974–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1001/jama.296.8.974
3. Akins JS, Karg PE, Brienza DM. Interface shear and pres-
sure characteristics of wheelchair seat cushions. J Rehabil
Res Dev. 2011;48(3):225–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1682/JRRD.2009.09.0145
4. National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel. Pressure ulcer
cate-
gory/staging illustrations [Internet]. Washington (DC):
http://www.npuap.org/pr2.htm
5. Bouten CV, Oomens CW, Baaijens FP, Bader DL. The eti-
ology of pressure ulcers: skin deep or muscle bound? Arch
Phys Med Rehabil. 2003;84(4):616–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1053/apmr.2003.50038
6. Kosiak M. Etiology of decubitus ulcers. Arch Phys Med
Rehabil. 1961;42:19–29. [PMID:13753341]
7. Herrman EC, Knapp CF, Donofrio JC, Salcido R. Skin per-
fusion responses to surface pressure-induced ischemia:
implication for the developing pressure ulcer. J Rehabil
Res Dev. 1999;36(2):109–20. [PMID:10661527]
8. Reddy NP, Cochran GV. Interstitial fluid flow as a factor in
decubitus ulcer formation. J Biomech. 1981;14(12):879–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/0021-9290(81)90015-4
9. Bouten CV, Bosboom EM, Oomens CW. The aetiology of
pressure sores: A tissue and cell mechanics approach. In:
van der Woude LH, Hopman MT, van Kemenade CH, edi-
tors. Biomedical aspects of manual wheelchair propulsion:
The state of the art II. Washington (DC): IOS Press; 1999.
p. 52–62.
10. Berlowitz DR, Brienza DM. Are all pressure ulcers the
result of deep tissue injury? A review of the literature.
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=19934462&dopt=Abstract
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=16926357&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1001/jama.296.8.974
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=21480097&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1682/JRRD.2009.09.0145
http://www.npuap.org/pr2.htm
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=12690603&dopt=Abstract
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=12690603&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1053/apmr.2003.50038
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=13753341&dopt=Abstract
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=10661527&dopt=Abstract
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=7328094&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/0021-9290(81)90015-4
487
PETERSON et al. Patient repositioning and pressure ulcer risk
Ostomy Wound Manage. 2007;53(10):34–
[PMID:17978413]
11. Linder-Ganz E, Shabshin N, Itzchak Y, Gefen A. Assess-
ment of mechanical conditions in sub-dermal tissues during
sitting: a combined experimental-MRI and finite element
approach. J Biomech. 2007;40(7):1443–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.jbiomech.2006.06.020
12. Bader DL. The recovery characteristics of soft tissues fol-
lowing repeated loading. J Rehabil Res Dev. 1990;27(2):
141–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1682/JRRD.1990.04.0141
13. Colin D, Abraham P, Preault L, Bregeon C, Saumet JL.
Comparison of 90 degrees and 30 degrees laterally inclined
positions in the prevention of pressure ulcers using transcu-
taneous oxygen and carbon dioxide pressures. Adv Wound
Care. 1996;9(3):35–38. [PMID:8716272]
14. Guyton AC, Hall JE. Textbook of medical physiology. 10th
ed. Philadelphia (PA): Saunders; 2000. p. 63–174.
15. Dealey C. Mattresses and beds. A guide to systems avail-
able for relieving and reducing pressure. J Wound Care.
1995;4(9):409–12. [PMID:7584660]
16. Lyder CH. Pressure ulcer prevention and management.
JAMA. 2003;289(2):223–26. [P
http://dx.doi.org/10.1001/jama.289.2.223
17. Bennett L, Kavner D, Lee BK, Trainor FA. Shear vs pres-
sure as causative factors in skin blood flow occlusion. Arch
Phys Med Rehabil. 1979;60(7):309–14. [PMID:454129]
18. Ek AC, Gustavsson G, Lewis DH. Skin blood flow in rela-
tion to external pressure and temperature in the supine
position on a standard hospital mattress. Scand J Rehabil
Med. 1987;19(3):121–26. [PMID:3441774]
19. Holloway GA Jr, Daly CH, Kennedy D, Chimoskey JE.
Effects of external pressure loading on human skin blood
flow measured by 133Xe clearance. J Appl Physiol.
1976;40(4):597–600. [PMID:931880]
20. Landis E. Micro-injection studies of capillary blood pres-
sure in human skin. Heart. 1930;15(15):209–28.
21. Sangeorzan BJ, Harrington RM, Wyss CR, Czerniecki JM,
Matsen FA 3rd. Circulatory and mechanical response of
skin to loading. J Orthop Res. 1989;7(3):425–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1002/jor.1100070315
22. Swain I. The measurement of interface pressure. In: Bader
DL, Bouten CV, Colin D, Oomens CW, editors. Pressure
ulcer research: Current and future perspectives. New York
(NY): Springer; 2005. p. 51–71.
23. Gebhardt KS. Research in biomedical engineering: an
overview of recent literature. J Tissue Viability. 2005;15(1):
17–18. [PMID:15693584]
24. Reddy NP. Effects of mechanical stresses on lymph and
interstitial fluid flows. In: Bader DL, editor. Pressure sores:
Clinical practice and scientific approach. London (Eng-
land): Macmillan; 1990. p. 203–20.
25. Rithalia SV, Gonsalkorale M. Assessment of alternating air
mattresses using a time-based interface pressure threshold
technique. J Rehabil Res Dev. 1998;35(2):225–
[PMID:9651895]
26. Reswick JB, Rogers JE. Experience at Rancho Los Amigos
Hospital with devices and techniques to prevent pressure
sores. In: Kenedi RM, Cowden JM, Scales JT, editors. Bed-
sore biomechanics: Proceedings of a seminar on tissue via-
bility and clinical applications. Baltimore (MD): University
Park Press; 1976. p. 301–10.
27. Stekelenburg A, Oomens C, Bader D. Compression-
induced tissue damage: animal models. In: Bader DL,
Bouten CV, Colin D, Oomens CW, editors. Pressure ulcer
research: Current and future perspectives. New York (NY):
Springer; 2005. p. 187–204.
28. Husain T. An experimental study of some pressure effects
on tissues, with reference to the bed-sore problem. J Pathol
Bacteriol. 1953;66(2):347–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1002/path.1700660203
29. Goldstein B, Sanders J. Skin response to repetitive
mechanical stress: a new experimental model in pig. Arch
Phys Med Rehabil. 1998;79(3):265–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S0003-9993(98)90005-3
30. Baumgarten M, Margolis DJ, Localio AR, Kagan SH,
Lowe RA, Kinosian B, Holmes JH, Abbuhl SB, Kavesh W,
Ruffin A. Pressure ulcers among elderly patients early in
the hospital stay. J Gerontol A Biol Sci Med Sci. 2006;
61(7):749–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/gerona/61.7.749
31. Dealey C. The size of the pressure-sore problem in a teach-
ing hospital. J Adv Nurs. 1991;16(6):663–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2648.1991.tb01724.x
32. Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services. Medicare
program; changes to the hospital inpatient prospective pay-
ment systems and fiscal year 2008 rates. Fed Regist.
2007;72(162):47129–48175. [PMID:17847578]
33. Milstein A. Ending extra payment for “never events”—
stronger incentives for patients’ safety. N Engl J Med.
2009;360(23):2388–90. [PMI
http://dx.doi.org/10.1056/NEJMp0809125
34. Clark M, Price PE. Is wound healing a true science or a
clinical art? Lancet. 2004;364(9443):1388–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(04)17240-1
35. Agostini JV, Baker DI, Bogardus ST Jr. Prevention of pres-
sure ulcers in older patients. In: Making health care safer:
A critical analysis of patient safety practices. Rockville
(MD): Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality, U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services; 2001. p. 301–6.
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=17978413&dopt=Abstract
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=16920122&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.jbiomech.2006.06.020
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=2366198&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1682/JRRD.1990.04.0141
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=8716272&dopt=Abstract
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=7584660&dopt=Abstract
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=12517234&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1001/jama.289.2.223
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=454129&dopt=Abstract
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=3441774&dopt=Abstract
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=931880&dopt=Abstract
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=2703934&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1002/jor.1100070315
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=15693584&dopt=Abstract
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=9651895&dopt=Abstract
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=13118439&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1002/path.1700660203
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=9523777&dopt=Abstract
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=9523777&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S0003-9993(98)90005-3
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=16870639&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/gerona/61.7.749
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=1869714&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2648.1991.tb01724.x
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/17847578
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=19494212&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1056/NEJMp0809125
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=15488204&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(04)17240-1
488
JRRD, Volume 50, Number 4, 2013
36. Wound, ostomy and continence nurses society position
statement on avoidable versus unavoidable pressure ulcers.
J Wound Ostomy Continence Nurs. 2009;36(4):378–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1097/WON.0b013e3181a9e9c8
37. Black JM, Edsberg LE, Baharestani MM, Langemo D,
Goldberg M, McNichol L, Cuddigan J; National Pressure
Ulcer Advisory Panel. Pressure ulcers: avoidable or
unavoidable? Results of the National Pressure Ulcer Advisory
Panel Consensus Conference. Ostomy Wound Manage.
2011;57(2):24–37. [PMID:21350270]
38. Bergstrom N. Patients at risk for pressure ulcers and evi-
dence-based care for pressure ulcer prevention. In: Bader
DL, Bouten CV, Colin D, Oomens CW, editors. Pressure
ulcer research: Current and future perspectives. New York
(NY): Springer; 2005. p. 35–50.
39. Defloor T, De Bacquer D, Grypdonck MH. The effect of
various combinations of turning and pressure reducing
devices on the incidence of pressure ulcers. Int J Nurs Stud.
2005;42(1):37–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.ijnurstu.2004.05.013
40. Vanderwee K, Grypdonck MH, De Bacquer D, Defloor T.
Effectiveness of turning with unequal time intervals on the
incidence of pressure ulcer lesions. J Adv Nurs. 2007;
57(1):59–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2648.2006.04060.x
41. Hobbs BK. Reducing the incidence of pressure ulcers:
implementation of a turn-team nursing program. J Gerontol
Nurs. 2004;30(11):46–51. [PMID:15575191]
42. Peterson MJ, Schwab W, van Oostrom JH, Gravenstein N,
Caruso LJ. Effects of turning on skin-bed interface pres-
sures in healthy adults. J Adv Nurs. 2010;66(7):1556–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2648.2010.05292.x
43. Berjian RA, Douglass HO Jr, Holyoke ED, Goodwin PM,
Priore RL. Skin pressure measurements on various mattress
surfaces in cancer patients. Am J Phys Med. 1983;62(5):
217–26. [PMID:6624882]
44. Sprigle S, Dunlop W, Press L. Reliability of bench tests of
interface pressure. Assist Technol. 2003;15(1):49–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/10400435.2003.10131889
Submitted for publication March 5, 2012. Accepted in
revised form September 10, 2012.
This article and any supplementary material should be
Peterson MJ, Gravenstein N, Schwab WK, van Oostrom
JH, Caruso LJ. Patient repositioning and pressure ulcer
risk—Monitoring interface pressures of at-risk patients. J
Rehabil Res Dev. 2013;50(4):477–
http://dx.doi.org/10.1682/JRRD.2012.03.0040
ResearcherID/ORCID: Johannes H. van Oostrom, PhD:
B-1407-2008
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=19421074&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1097/WON.0b013e3181a9e9c8
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=21350270&dopt=Abstract
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=15582638&dopt=Abstract]
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.ijnurstu.2004.05.013
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=17184374&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2648.2006.04060.x
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=15575191&dopt=Abstract
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=20497272&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2648.2010.05292.x
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=6624882&dopt=Abstract
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
b=PubMed&list_uids=14760981&dopt=Abstract
http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/10400435.2003.10131889
This content is in the Public Domain.
This content is in the Public Domain.
CochraneDatabaseof SystematicReviews
Repositioningforpressureulcerpreventioninadults(Review)
Gillespie BM, ChaboyerWP, McInnes E, Kent B, Whitty JA,
Thalib L
Gillespie BM, Chaboyer WP, McInnes E, Kent B, Whitty JA,
Thalib L.
Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults.
CochraneDatabaseof SystematicReviews 2014, Issue4. Art. No.:
CD009958.
DOI: 10.1002/14651858.CD009958.pub2.
www.cochranelibrary.com
Repositioning forpressure ulcerprevention inadults(Review)
Copyright © 2014The CochraneCollaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons,Ltd.
http://www.cochranelibrary.com
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S
1HEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1ABSTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
2PLAIN LANGUAGE SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
3BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
4OBJECTIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
4METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Figure 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Figure 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
18DISCUSSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
19AUTHORS’ CONCLUSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
19ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .
20REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . .
23CHARACTERISTICS OF STUDIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
33DATA AND ANALYSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Analysis 1.1. Comparison 1 2h versus 3h repositioning on
standard hospital mattresses, Outcome 1 Pressure ulcer risk
(category 1 to 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
Analysis 1.2. Comparison 1 2h versus 3h repositioning on
standard hospital mattresses, Outcome 2 Pressure ulcer risk
(category 2 to 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
Analysis 2.1. Comparison 2 4h versus 6h repositioning on
viscoelastic foam mattresses, Outcome 1 Pressure ulcer risk
(category 1 to 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
Analysis 2.2. Comparison 2 4h versus 6h repositioning on
viscoelastic foam mattresses, Outcome 2 Pressure ulcer risk
(category 2 to 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
Analysis 3.1. Comparison 3 30o tilt 3-hourly overnight versus
90o tilt overnight, Outcome 1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1
to 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
36APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
41WHAT’S NEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . .
42CONTRIBUTIONS OF AUTHORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
42DECLARATIONS OF INTEREST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
42SOURCES OF SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
43DIFFERENCES BETWEEN PROTOCOL AND REVIEW . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43INDEX TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . .
iRepositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
[Intervention Review]
Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
Brigid M Gillespie1, Wendy P Chaboyer1 , Elizabeth McInnes2
, Bridie Kent3, Jennifer A Whitty4, Lukman Thalib5
1NHMRC Centre of Research Excellence in Nursing, Centre for
Health Practice Innovation, Menzies Health Institute
Queensland,
Griffith University, Brisbane, Australia. 2Nursing Research
Institute, St Vincent’s Health Australia (Sydney) and Australian
Catholic
University (ACU), School of Nursing, Midwifery and
Paramedicine, Australian Catholic University, Darlinghurst,
Australia. 3School
of Nursing and Midwifery, Deakin Centre for Quality and Risk
Management, Deakin University, Melbourne, Burwood,
Australia.
4School of Pharmacy, The University of Queensland, Brisbane,
Australia. 5Department of Community Medicine, Kuwait
University,
Safat, Kuwait
Contact address: Wendy P Chaboyer, NHMRC Centre of
Research Excellence in Nursing, Centre for Health Practice
Innovation,
Menzies Health Institute Queensland, Griffith University,
Brisbane, Queensland, Australia. [email protected]
Editorial group: Cochrane Wounds Group.
Publication status and date: New, published in Issue 4, 2014.
Review content assessed as up-to-date: 6 September 2013.
Citation: Gillespie BM, Chaboyer WP, McInnes E, Kent B,
Whitty JA, Thalib L. Repositioning for pressure ulcer
prevention in adults.
Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews 2014, Issue 4. Art.
No.: CD009958. DOI: 10.1002/14651858.CD009958.pub2.
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
A B S T R A C T
Background
A pressure ulcer (PU), also referred to as a ’pressure injury’,
’pressure sore’, or ’bedsore’ is defined as an area of localised
tissue damage
that is caused by unrelieved pressure, friction or shearing forces
on any part of the body. PUs commonly occur in patients who
are
elderly and less mobile, and carry significant human and
economic impacts. Immobility and physical inactivity are
considered to be
major risk factors for PU development and the manual
repositioning of patients in hospital or long-term care is a
common pressure
ulcer prevention strategy.
Objectives
The objectives of this review were to:
1) assess the effects of repositioning on the prevention of PUs
in adults, regardless of risk or in-patient setting;
2) ascertain the most effective repositioning schedules for
preventing PUs in adults; and
3) ascertain the incremental resource consequences and costs
associated with implementing different repositioning regimens
compared
with alternate schedules or standard practice.
Search methods
We searched the following electronic databases to identify
reports of the relevant randomised controlled trials: the
Cochrane Wounds
Group Specialised Register (searched 06 September 2013), the
Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials (CENTRAL)
(2013,
Issue 8); Ovid MEDLINE (1948 to August, Week 4, 2013); Ovid
EMBASE (1974 to 2013, Week 35); EBESCO CINAHL (1982 to
30 August 2013); and the reference sections of studies that were
included in the review.
Selection criteria
Randomised controlled trials (RCTs), published or unpublished,
that assessed the effects of any repositioning schedule or
different
patient positions and measured PU incidence in adults in any
setting.
1Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
mailto:[email protected]
Data collection and analysis
Two review authors independently performed study selection,
risk of bias assessment and data extraction.
Main results
We included three RCTs and one economic study representing a
total of 502 randomised participants from acute and long-term
care
settings. Two trials compared the 30º and 90º tilt positions
using similar repositioning frequencies (there was a small
difference in
frequency of overnight repositioning in the 90º tilt groups
between the trials). The third RCT compared alternative
repositioning
frequencies.
All three studies reported the proportion of patients developing
PU of any grade, stage or category. None of the trials reported
on pain,
or quality of life, and only one reported on cost. All three trials
were at high risk of bias.
The two trials of 30º tilt vs. 90º were pooled using a random
effects model (I² = 69%) (252 participants). The risk ratio for
developing
a PU in the 30º tilt and the standard 90º position was very
imprecise (pooled RR 0.62, 95% CI 0.10 to 3.97, P=0.62, very
low quality
evidence). This comparison is underpowered and at risk of a
Type 2 error (only 21 events).
In the third study, a cluster randomised trial, participants were
randomised between 2-hourly and 3-hourly repositioning on
standard
hospital mattresses and 4 hourly and 6 hourly repositioning on
viscoelastic foam mattresses. This study was also underpowered
and at
high risk of bias. The risk ratio for pressure ulcers (any
category) with 2-hourly repositioning compared with 3-hourly
repositioning
on a standard mattress was imprecise (RR 0.90, 95% CI 0.69 to
1.16, very low quality evidence). The risk ratio for pressure
ulcers
(any category) was compatible with a large reduction and no
difference between 4-hourly repositioning and 6-hourly
repositioning on
viscoelastic foam (RR 0.73, 95% CI 0.53 to 1.02, very low
quality evidence).
A cost-effectiveness analysis based on data derived from one of
the included parallel RCTs compared 3-hourly repositioning
using the
30º tilt overnight with standard care consisting of 6-hourly
repositioning using the 90º lateral rotation overnight. In this
evaluation
the only included cost was nursing time. The intervention was
reported to be cost saving compared with standard care (nurse
time cost
per patient EURO206.6 vs EURO253.1, incremental difference
EURO-46.5; 95%CI: EURO-1.25 to EURO-74.60).
Authors’ conclusions
Repositioning is an integral component of pressure ulcer
prevention and treatment; it has a sound theoretical rationale,
and is widely
recommended and used in practice. The lack of robust
evaluations of repositioning frequency and position for pressure
ulcer prevention
mean that great uncertainty remains but it does not mean these
interventions are ineffective since all comparisons are grossly
under-
powered. Current evidence is small in volume and at risk of bias
and there is currently no strong evidence of a reduction in
pressure
ulcers with the 30° tilt compared with the standard 90º position
or good evidence of an effect of repositioning frequency. There
is a
clear need for high-quality, adequately-powered trials to assess
the effects of position and optimal frequency of repositioning
on pressure
ulcer incidence.
The limited data derived from one economic evaluation means it
remains unclear whether repositioning every 3 hours using the
30º
tilt is less costly in terms of nursing time and more effective
than standard care involving repositioning every 6 hours using a
90º tilt.
P L A I N L A N G U A G E S U M M A R Y
Repositioning to prevent pressure ulcers
Pressure ulcers, also called pressure injury, pressure sores,
decubitus ulcers and bed sores are caused by pressure, rubbing
or friction at
the weight-bearing bony points of the body (such as hips, heels
and elbows). A pressure ulcer is characterised by an area of
localised
injury to the skin or underlying tissue over a bony prominence
that results from pressure or shearing, or a combination of both.
Pressure
ulcers most commonly occur in the elderly, or those who are
immobile, either when in bed or sitting. Repositioning (i.e.
turning) is one
strategy used alongside other preventative strategies to relieve
pressure, and so prevent development of pressure ulcers.
Repositioning
involves moving the person into a different position to remove
or redistribute pressure from a particular part of the body.
We identified three studies which recruited 502 people.
Evidence to support the use of repositioning to prevent pressure
ulcers is low in
volume and quality and we still do not know if particular
positions or frequencies of repositioning reduce pressure ulcer
development.
None of the trials reported on pain or quality of life. There is a
need for further research to measure the effects of repositioning
on pressure
ulcer development and to find the best repositioning regimen in
terms of frequency and position. It is important to emphasise
that this
2Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
lack of evidence showing that repositioning is effective or
which repositioning regimen is the best does not mean that
repositioning is
ineffective.
B A C K G R O U N D
Description of the condition
A pressure ulcer (PU) (also known as pressure sore, pressure in-
jury, or bedsore) is “a localised injury to skin or underlying
tissue
usually over a bony prominence as a result of pressure or
pressure
in combination with shear” (European Pressure Ulcer Advisory
Panel 2009; NPUAP 2009). PUs occur when the soft tissue is
compressed between a bony prominence and an external surface
for a prolonged period of time.
PU classification systems provide an accurate and consistent
means
by which the severity and level of tissue injury of a PU can
be described and documented (Australian Wound Management
Association 2011).The words ’stage’ (European Pressure Ulcer
Advisory Panel 2009), ’grade’, and ’category’ are used
interchange-
ably to describe the levels of soft-tissue injury. The original
stag-
ing system includes Stages 1 to 4. Stage 1 reflects persistent
non-blanching erythema (redness) of the skin (Australian
Wound
Management Association 2011; European Pressure Ulcer
Advisory
Panel 2009). Stage 2 involves partial-thickness skin loss (epi-
dermis and dermis). Stage 3 reflects full-thickness skin loss in-
volving damage, or necrosis, of subcutaneous tissue, whereas in
Stage 4 the damage extends to the underlying bone, tendon or
joint capsule. However, more recently, two additional
classifica-
tions have been identified, namely: ’unclassified/unstageable’
and
’deep tissue injury’ (Australian Wound Management
Association
2011; European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2009; National
Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2007). PUs are associated with
pain,
an increased risk of infection and sepsis, longer hospital stays,
higher hospitalisation costs and mortality (Institute for
Healthcare
Improvement 2008; Thomas 1996).
Despite a general consensus that PUs are preventable (Brandeis
2001), hospital-acquired PUs are among the top five adverse
events
reported. Estimates of PU incidence in hospitalised patients
have
ranged from less than 3% to over 30% (Nixon 2006;Queensland
Health 2008 Mulligan 2011,Schuurman 2009). Costs of treating
PUs vary globally, but represent a considerable financial burden
on hospital budgets wherever they occur. Costs to the
Australian
healthcare system have been estimated at AUD 285 million per
annum (Mulligan 2011). The total cost for treatment of PUs in
the UK was GBP 1.4 billion to GBP 2.1 billion annually (4%
of total National Health Service’s expenditure) (Bennett 2004),
whilst the total cost in the US was estimated at USD 11 billion
per year (Institute for Healthcare Improvement 2008). Much of
this cost is allocated to nursing time (Bennett 2004).
Immobility and physical inactivity are considered to be major
risk
factors for PU development in hospitalised patients (Allman
1995;
Institute for Healthcare Improvement 2008; Lindgren 2004),
however, the aged and individuals who have severely
compromised
states of health are particularly at risk (Institute for Healthcare
Improvement 2008). For example, of the 3.55 million hospital
admissions in Australia each year (excluding day cases), 50% of
pa-
tients will be at risk of PUs and 10% or more will develop an
ulcer
(Queensland Health 2009). Screening tools based on
individuals’
levels of activity and mobility scores have been widely used for
the assessment of PU risk (Braden 2005; Jalali 2005; Thompson
2005). Various interventions are in use and believed to reduce
the incidence of PUs with varying levels of supporting evidence
including different mattresses and overlays (Nixon 2006; Reddy
2006; Vanderwee 2005) and regular position changes (Buss
2002;
Krapfl 2008; Reddy 2006).
Description of the intervention
Repositioning (i.e. turning people to change their body position
to
relieve or redistribute pressure) has long been a fundamental
com-
ponent of pressure ulcer prevention (PUP). Manual
repositioning
regimens are used in PU risk-prevention programs to re-
distribute
pressure between the body and the support surface (Manorama
2010).The 90o lateral position has been shown in laboratory
stud-
ies to decrease blood flow and transcutaneous oxygen tension
close
to anoxic levels (extremely low levels of oxygen) and to
increase
interface pressure. Conversely, this appears not to be the case
when
the patient is placed in a 30o lateral inclined tilt position. Repo-
sitioning is regarded as also important for the prevention of
other
complications associated with prolonged immobility such as
pneu-
monia, joint contractures, and urinary tract infections.
Best practice guidelines developed in Europe, USA and Aus-
tralia advocate routine repositioning of people at risk of PUs.
These guidelines commonly advocate two-hourly repositioning
(Australian Wound Management Association 2011; Defloor
2000;
European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 1998; Queensland
Health
2009). These recommendations appear to be based on small
stud-
ies (not RCTs) conducted 20 or more years ago, that either com-
pared different repositioning schedules or repositioning
schedules
3Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
with no manual repositioning (spontaneous body movements)
(Exton-Smith 1961; Norton 1962; Palmen 1987; Smith 1990).
The usefulness of these studies for today’s decision making is
fur-
ther compromised since the standard of hospital mattresses has
greatly improved since then.
How the intervention might work
Pressure, from lying or sitting on a particular part of the body
results in oxygen deprivation to the particular area (Defloor
2000).
Normally, this results in pain and discomfort, which stimulates
the person to change position. However, if the person is unable
to reposition themselves, or has impaired sensation and
therefore
does not experience the discomfort, assistance will be required.
Repositioning reduces the duration of pressure experienced by
the tissues and so decreases tissue hypoxia (Catania 2007) and
consequently the theoretical risk of pressure ulceration (Braden
1987).
Negative aspects of frequent repositioning
Whilst frequent repositioning underpins current practice guide-
lines, it may also be associated with negative consequences for
pa-
tients, nursing staff and health care (Australian Institute of
Health
and Welfare 2009; Bureau of Labor Statistics 2002; Carskadon
2005; Dawson 2007; Humphries 2008; Raymond 2004; Vieira
2009). Repositioning can lead to disruption of sleep,
particularly
sleep fragmentation (Humphries 2008). In acutely ill people,
dis-
ruption of sleep can lengthen recovery, suppress immune
function
and predispose people to infection (Carskadon 2005; Raymond
2004). A sleep cycle, which has light and deep stages of sleep,
oc-
curs about every 90 minutes. Consequently if repositioning is
un-
dertaken every two hours, it may result in fragmentation of
sleep
at a detrimental stage of the sleep cycle (Dawson 2007).
Other negative effects of repositioning include possible
increases
in patients’ pain perception. Although regular movement is
impor-
tant, unnecessary repositioning may cause increased discomfort
for people with wounds, stiff joints, bony pain or contractures.
In addition to people experiencing the negative effects of
reposi-
tioning, nurses experience musculoskeletal disorders at a rate
ex-
ceeding that of workers in construction, mining, and
manufactur-
ing (Bureau of Labor Statistics 2002). These injuries are
attributed
partly to repeated manual patient-handling activities, often
asso-
ciated with repositioning patients and working in extremely
awk-
ward positions (Bureau of Labor Statistics 2002; Vieira 2009).
Back pain and injury have a major impact on the efficiency of
the
nursing workforce (Trinkoff 2001). Registered nurses rank
seventh
across all occupations for back injuries involving days away
from
work in private industry (Bureau of Labor Statistics 2002).
Back
injuries and the resultant workers’ compensation claims for
nurses
are expensive (Dawson 2007). For example, injuries in the
health-
care sector cost Australia over AUD 4.3 billion in 2005 to 2006
(Australian Safety and Compensation Council 2009). Reducing
the amount of manual handling undertaken by nurses when
repo-
sitioning patients could have major nursing and hospital
benefits.
Why it is important to do this review
PUs may be painful, distressing and life-threatening (causing
in-
fection, sepsis and even death), yet many are preventable
(Allman
1997; Schuurman 2009). Manual repositioning regimens are
used
in PU risk-prevention programs to alternate areas of pressure
dis-
tribution between the body and the support surface, including
when sitting or lying in a chair (Manorama 2010). These strate-
gies have major implications for repositioning hospitalised
patients
and warrant investigation.
Whilst the potential negative aspects of repositioning have been
described, the magnitude of any benefits are also uncertain, as
is
the optimum frequency of repositioning and the best position.
It is noteworthy that, more recently, the National Pressure Ulcer
Advisory Panel 2007 and the European Pressure Ulcer Advisory
Panel 2009 Guidelines did not advocate 2-hourly repositioning
as best practice due to a lack of empirical evidence. A rigorous
systematic review is required to summarise current evidence for
the effects of repositioning of adults, the optimal repositioning
schedules, and to ensure that future trials are based on the best
available evidence.
O B J E C T I V E S
The objectives of this review were to:
1. assess the effects of repositioning on the prevention of PUs
in adults, regardless of risk or in-patient setting;
2. ascertain the most effective repositioning schedules for
preventing PUs in adults; and
3. ascertain the incremental resource consequences and costs
associated with implementing different repositioning regimens
compared with alternate schedules or standard practice.
M E T H O D S
Criteria for considering studies for this review
Types of studies
Any RCT that used a method of random allocation of adult pa-
tients (without an existing PU at baseline) between two or more
4Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
alternative repositioning interventions for PU prevention was
el-
igible. We also included cluster-RCTs, irrespective of the
cluster
group (i.e. patient, nurse, hospital). We excluded cross-over
trials
(even if randomised) and quasi-randomised studies, i.e. studies
where treatment allocation was, for example, alternate or by
date
of birth.
The review of health economic evidence included comparative
full and partial economic evaluations conducted within the
frame-
work of eligible RCTs (i.e. cost-effectiveness analyses, cost-
utility
analyses, cost-benefit analyses and cost-analyses of a
repositioning
intervention and a relevant comparator), as well as RCTs report-
ing more limited information, such as estimates of resource use
or
costs associated with repositioning and a comparator. The
review
considered only health economics studies conducted alongside
ef-
fectiveness studies included in the effectiveness component of
the
review.
Types of participants
Any adult, without an existing PU, admitted to any healthcare
or
long-term care setting.
Types of interventions
We anticipated that likely comparisons would include
reposition-
ing regimens compared with other standard practices or with al-
ternative repositioning regimens. We included studies
evaluating
the following comparisons:
1. Comparisons between the frequencies of repositioning, for
example 2-hourly turning, 3-hourly turning, 4-hourly turning
etc. where the only systematic difference between groups was
the
frequency of repositioning.
2. Comparisons between different positions for repositioning,
for example chair positioning, 30o recumbent tilt versus 90o
lateral rotation, where the only systematic difference between
groups was the positioning.
3. Comparisons of the repositioning regimen with standard
practice (as defined by the author(s)).
Types of outcome measures
Primary outcomes
The proportion of participants with a new PU of any stage,
grade,or category using previously defined criteria (European
Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 1998; European Pressure Ulcer
Advisory Panel 2009; National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel
2007), or however defined by the trial authors, anywhere on the
body following recruitment into the study. We excluded trials
where the unit of analysis was the PU and not the person or
group.
Secondary outcomes
1. Health-related quality of life (HRQoL) including utility
scores (however reported by the author(s)).
2. Procedural pain (however reported by the author(s)).
3. Patient satisfaction (however reported by the author(s)).
4. Cost including: costs of PU prevention; costs of related
health practitioner time or visits; costs avoided by PU
prevention
(e.g. treatment costs per patient per PU wound; costs to treat
adverse events, infections or complications of PU; duration or
costs of hospital stay for PU wound healing, adverse events and
complications; indirect costs to society associated with PU such
as lost productivity).
5. Incremental cost per event avoided, such as per additional
PU prevented; incremental cost per life year gained;
incremental
cost per quality adjusted life year (QALY) gained, and cost-
benefit ratio.
Search methods for identification of studies
Electronic searches
We searched the following electronic databases to identify
reports
of relevant RCTs:
1. The Cochrane Wounds Group Specialised Register
(searched 06 September 2013);
2. The Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials
(CENTRAL) (2013, Issue 8);
3. Ovid MEDLINE (1948 to August, Week 4, 2013);
4. Ovid MEDLINE (In-Process & Other Non-Indexed
Citations September 04, 2013);
5. Ovid EMBASE (1974 to 2013 Week 35);
6. EBSCO CINAHL (1982 to 30 August 2013).
We searched the Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials
(CENTRAL) using the following exploded MeSH headings and
keywords:
#1 MeSH descriptor Pressure Ulcer explode all trees
#2 pressure NEXT (ulcer* or sore*):ti,ab,kw
#3 decubitus NEXT (ulcer* or sore*):ti,ab,kw
#4 (bed NEXT sore*) or bedsore*:ti,ab,kw
#5 (#1 OR #2 OR #3 OR #4)
#6 MeSH descriptor Posture explode all trees
#7 (reposition* or re-position*):ti,ab,kw
#8 position*:ti,ab,kw
#9 (turn* NEAR/5 patient*):ti,ab,kw
#10 (turn* NEAR/5 interval*):ti,ab,kw
#11 (turn* NEAR/5 frequen*):ti,ab,kw
#12 (body NEAR/5 postur*):ti,ab,kw
#13 turning:ti,ab,kw
#14 (pressure NEXT relie*):ti,ab,kw
#15 (mobilis* or mobiliz*):ti,ab,kw
5Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
#16 (#6 OR #7 OR #8 OR #9 OR #10 OR #11 OR #12
OR #13 OR #14 OR #15)
#17 (#5 AND #16).
We adapted this strategy to search Ovid MEDLINE, Ovid EM-
BASE and EBSCO CINAHL (See Appendix 1). We combined
the Ovid MEDLINE search with the Cochrane Highly Sensi-
tive Search Strategy for identifying randomised trials in MED-
LINE: sensitivity- and precision-maximising version (2008 revi-
sion) (Lefebvre 2011). We combined the EMBASE and
CINAHL
searches with the trial filters developed by the Scottish
Intercolle-
giate Guidelines Network (SIGN 2011).
We conducted separate searches to identify economic studies in
the following databases:
1. NHS Economic Evaluation Database (2013, Issue 8);
2. Ovid MEDLINE (In-Process & Other Non-Indexed
Citations August, week 4, 2013);
3. Ovid EMBASE (1948 to 2013 week 35);
4. EBSCO CINAHL (1982 to 30 August 2013);
5. EURONHEED (http://infodoc.inserm.fr/euronheed/);
6. Health Economics Evaluations Database HEED (http://
onhttp://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/book/).
We used the economics search strategy shown in Appendix 2 to
search Ovid MEDLINE and adapt this strategy to search other
databases.
We also searched the following clinical trials registries for
details
of relevant protocols and contacted the relevant research teams
in
November 2012:
1. Clinical trials.gov;
2. International Clinical Trials Registry Platform search Portal;
3. Australian and New Zealand Clinical Trials Registry;
4. Current Controlled Trials.
We did not restrict searches by language, study setting, date of
publication or publication status. We made every effort to
obtain
translations of papers that were not published in English.
Searching other resources
We searched the reference lists of included studies and any sys-
tematic reviews identified by the search process and contacted
cor-
responding authors of identified studies. Where appropriate, we
contacted experts in the field (e.g. council members of the
Euro-
pean Wound Management Association, the National Pressure
Ul-
cer Advisory Panel, the World Union of Wound Healing
Societies,
and the Australian Wound Management Association) to ask for
information about any unpublished studies. We included confer-
ence proceedings or programme abstracts in our search. Where
we
were unable to obtain details of the full study, we contacted the
author(s).
Data collection and analysis
Selection of studies
Two review authors (BG, EM) independently assessed all titles
and abstracts of studies retrieved from searching. Full reports of
all
potentially relevant trials were retrieved for further assessment
of
eligibility based on the inclusion criteria. Differences of
opinion
were resolved by consensus or referral to a third review author
(WC). We recorded reasons for exclusion and were not blind
study
authorship.
Data extraction and management
For eligible studies, two review authors (BG, EM)
independently
extracted data using a pre-designed data collection tool while a
third author (WC) adjudicated where there were differences of
opinion. For studies where there was an economic component
included, JW (Health Economist) and BG extracted the relevant
data. We included studies published in duplicate, but extracted
data to ensure that information was not missed and identified
the primary reference for the purpose of this review. If data
were
missing from reports, we attempted to contact the trial authors
to
obtain the missing information. One review author (BG) entered
the data into Review Manager 5 software (RevMan) and data
were
checked for accuracy by EM. Abstracted data included the
follow-
ing information.
1. Author, title, journal title, year of publication, country.
2. Healthcare setting.
3. Inclusion/exclusion criteria.
4. Sample size.
5. Patient characteristics by treatment group.
6. Methods (number eligible and randomised, adequacy of
randomisation, allocation concealment, blinding, completeness
of follow-up).
7. Treatment of missing values (e.g. use of intention-to-treat,
per protocol or other imputation method).
8. Intervention details.
9. Types of outcome measures in relation to primary
(percentage of new PU) and secondary outcomes.
10. Analysis; results and conclusions relevant to review.
11. Funding sources.
For economic studies, we planned to extract additional data
extract
in relation to the following.
1. Estimates of specific items of resource use per person.
2. Estimates of unit costs (extracted separately to resource use).
3. Price year and currency.
4. Decision-making jurisdiction.
5. Analytic perspective.
6. A point estimate and a measure of uncertainty (e.g.
standard error or confidence interval) for measures of
incremental resource use, costs and cost-effectiveness, if
reported.
7. Details of any sensitivity analyses undertaken, and any
information regarding the impact of varying assumptions on the
magnitude and direction of results.
6Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
http://infodoc.inserm.fr/euronheed/
http://infodoc.inserm.fr/euronheed/
http://infodoc.inserm.fr/euronheed/
http://infodoc.inserm.fr/euronheed/
http://onhttp:/onlinelibrary.wiley.com/book/
http://onhttp:/onlinelibrary.wiley.com/book/
http://onhttp:/onlinelibrary.wiley.com/book/
http://onhttp:/onlinelibrary.wiley.com/book/
http://onhttp:/onlinelibrary.wiley.com/book/
http://onhttp:/onlinelibrary.wiley.com/book/
Assessment of risk of bias in included studies
Two review authors independently assessed the risk of bias of
el-
igible trials (BG, EM) using The Cochrane Collaboration tool
for assessing risk of bias (Higgins 2011c).This tool addresses
six
specific domains; namely sequence generation, allocation
conceal-
ment, blinding, incomplete outcome data, selective outcome re-
porting and other issues that may potentially bias the study (see
Appendix 3 for details of the criteria on which the judgments
were
based). Items were rated as low risk of bias, high risk of bias or
unclear (unknown) risk of bias. In assessing bias, the review au-
thors were not blinded to the names of trial authors, institutions,
or journals.
In assessing the risk of bias, we distinguished between primary
outcome (proportion of participants with a new PU), secondary
subjective outcomes (HRQoL, procedural pain, patient satisfac-
tion), and the objective economic outcome. As the primary out-
come for this review, regardless of how it was measured, was
sub-
ject to potential observer bias, blinding of outcome assessment
was
particularly important. We planned to make separate judgements
for secondary outcomes for the domain of incomplete outcome
data. We classified trials as being at overall high risk of bias if
they
were rated as ’high’ for any one of three key domains
(allocation
concealment, blinding of outcome assessors and completeness
of
outcome data).
Disagreements between review authors were resolved by
consensus
or referral to another review author (WC). Where there was a
high risk of bias in any of the key domains, we endeavoured to
contact the trial authors, and asked open-ended questions about
the design and conduct of the study. We reported bias, and
within
economic evaluations, planned to use the Drummond checklist,
as recommended by The Cochrane Collaboration (Shemilt
2011),
to assess the methodological quality of full and partial
economic
evaluations.
We presented an assessment of risk of bias using ’Risk of bias’
sum-
mary figures, which detail all the judgments in a cross-
tabulation
of study by entry. This display of internal validity indicates the
weight the reader may give the results of each study. We
classified
studies as being at high risk of bias overall if any one of the
criteria
was judged to be at high risk of bias. We recorded trials as
being
at unclear risk of bias if authors did not report validity criteria.
Measures of treatment effect
We have reported effect estimates for dichotomous outcomes
(e.g.
relative proportions of people developing PU during follow up)
as risk ratios (RR) with 95% confidence intervals. RR is the
pro-
portion of participants developing PUs in the experimental
group
divided by proportion in the control group and indicates the
like-
lihood of PU development on the experimental regimen (turning
frequency or position) compared with a standard treatment. We
have used the RR rather than odds ratio (OR), since ORs may be
misinterpreted as RR, and can give an inflated impression of the
effect size when event rates are greater than 20% (Deeks 2002).
We planned to use MD as a summary statistic in meta-analysis
when outcome measurements in all studies were made on the
same
scale.
Review of economic evaluations
We planned to present a tabled analysis of economic data in
accor-
dance with current guidance on the use of economics methods in
the preparation of Cochrane reviews (Shemilt 2011). We
planned
to classify economic evaluations according to the framework in
Drummond 2005, and to assess the methodology using the
check-
list published by Drummond and colleagues. We planned to
tabu-
late the main characteristics and results of the identified
economic
evaluation studies, and to expand these with a narrative descrip-
tion.
For any included studies, given the likely lack of direct compa-
rability in resource use and cost data between different health-
care contexts and settings, we did not intend to pool economic
outcomes. Rather, we planned to incorporate a discussion of key
drivers and impact of assumptions on the available economic
eval-
uations, scenarios that are likely to lead to the most and least
cost-
effective use of repositioning for PUP, as well as guidance on
future
research that might be required to assess the economic value of
repositioning as an intervention for PUP.
Costs
If we found any economic studies, all substantial costs that were
observed to differ between people repositioned for PUP and
peo-
ple administered the comparator treatment were intended to be
captured and reported as part of the review of economic evalua-
tions.
We planned to report resource utilisation and unit costs
separately,
along with the currency and price year in each original study.
These
costs would then be converted to 2012 values by employing a
web-
based conversion tool that applies implicit price deflators for
gross
domestic product (GDP) of that currency and then converted
into the currency most frequently observed in the articles
reviewed
using Purchasing Power Parities (PPP) (Shemilt 2010).
The main costs were likely to be those associated with the
devel-
opment of PUs, specialist and other practitioner costs as
measured
by time or number of visits, potential cost-savings from a
change
in the number of bed days in hospital, and costs stemming from
differing rates of adverse events and complications (including
pro-
cedures initiated due to the failure of wounds to heal, such as
am-
putation). We planned to identify key cost drivers that would
en-
able users of the review to gain a clear understanding of the
nature
of resource use associated with repositioning for PUP.
Health state utility weights
7Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
We planned to examine information on the change in HRQoL
re-
ported by included trials via utilities measured by a multi-
attribute
utility instrument (MAUI) or other approaches (such as the time
trade-off, standard gamble). We planned to assess the utility
data
for comparability and representativeness considering issues
such
as the stages of PU, the patient populations, timing of the
baseline
point and follow-up collection, the MAUI used and the
algorithm
for scoring the MAUI. We planned to present a discussion of the
potential impact on HRQoL attributable to the intervention as
part of the review.
Unit of analysis issues
In all trials included in our review, we treated the person as the
unit of analysis and we took into account the level at which ran-
domisation occurred. For a parallel group design, we collected
and
analysed a single measurement for each outcome for each
person.
In these types of studies, it was possible that the unit of
analysis
was the PU rather than the individual person. We considered in-
stances where there were multiple observations per person for
the
same outcome. Where this occurred we first used the PU that
was
the most advanced in relation to its staging. If this could not be
determined, then we contacted the trial author(s).
For cluster-randomised trials that had not taken clustering into
account in the study analysis, we considered adjusted sample
sizes
using the methods described in Chapter 16 of the Cochrane
Hand-
book for Systematic Reviews of Interventions (Higgins 2011a).
How-
ever the best estimate of a relevant intraclass correlation
coefficient
(ICC) for estimating the design effect was so small (0.001) that
we used the original reported study data without adjustment.
This
ICC (0.001) was estimated from a relevant cluster trial (Moore
2011) and identical to that estimated from a falls study (similar
patient group, similar context of care) (Cumming 2008) so we
felt
justified in this approach.
Dealing with missing data
If some outcome data remained missing despite our attempts to
obtain complete outcome data from authors, we planned to per-
form an available-case analysis, based on the numbers of people
for whom outcome data were known since this is a more con-
servative approach in this context than using numbers originally
randomised and assuming that losses to follow up did not incur
pressure injury. We also planned to conduct best-case and
worst-
case analysis where we needed to test the robustness of findings
to different assumptions about the outcomes of people who did
not contribute endpoint data. If standard deviations (SD) were
missing, we planned to impute them from other studies or,
where
possible, computed them from standard errors (SE) using the
for-
mula SD = SE x
√
N, where these values were available (Higgins
2011a).
Assessment of heterogeneity
We considered clinical and statistical heterogeneity in relation
to
the primary outcomes, PU incidence, and secondary outcomes
such as HRQoL patient satisfaction, and procedural pain. For
cluster-trials, we assessed the outcome at the same level as the
group allocation (Deeks 2011).
We assessed clinical heterogeneity by examining the types of
par-
ticipants, and/or groups, interventions and their duration, and
the
outcomes of each study. If appropriate, we pooled data using
meta-
analysis (using RevMan 5). We did not plan to pool studies for
economic outcomes as the variability in, and generalisability of,
these outcomes were considered problematic.
Statistical heterogeneity was assessed visually and by using the
Chi
2 statistic with significance being set at P value less than 0.10.
In
addition we investigated the degree of heterogeneity by
calculating
the I2 statistic (Deeks 2002). The I2 test examines the
percentage
of total variation across studies due to heterogeneity rather than
chance. Values over 50% indicate a substantial level of
heterogene-
ity. Where appropriate, in the absence of clinical heterogeneity
and
in the presence of statistical heterogeneity (I2 greater than
60%),
we used a random effects model, Where studies were
sufficiently
similar to consider pooling, we planned to use a fixed effect
model
for low to moderate levels of heterogeneity (I2 values between
0%
and under 60%). We did not plan to pool studies where hetero-
geneity exceeded 75% (Higgins 2011b).
Assessment of reporting biases
We planned to assess potential publication bias using funnel
plots
and to assess funnel plot asymmetry visually (Sterne 2011).
Subgroup analysis and investigation of heterogeneity
We planned a subgroup analysis, if possible, to examine the
effect
of potentially influential factors on outcome, e.g. care setting
and
patient characteristics.
Sensitivity analysis
We planned to perform sensitivity analyses where necessary to
test whether findings were robust to the method used to obtain
them, and compared the results of two or more meta-analyses
using different assumptions (Higgins 2011c).
Presentation of results
We planned to include the following primary and secondary out-
comes (both desirable and undesirable) in the summary of find-
ings tables:
1. development of a new PU;
2. HRQoL;
3. pain;
8Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
4. patient satisfaction;
5. costs;
6. incremental cost.
R E S U L T S
Description of studies
See Characteristics of included studies; Characteristics of
excluded
studies; and, Characteristics of studies awaiting classification.
With
the exception of the TURN trial (Bergstrom), we are not aware
of
any relevant ongoing trials (ISRCTN register checked
September,
2013).
Results of the search
Interventions search
Electronic searches yielded 258 results of which we excluded
254
because they did not meet one or more of our inclusion criteria.
We retrieved full text versions of the remaining four papers for
inspection, and included three trials in the review (Defloor
2005;
Moore 2011; Young 2004). See Figure 1 study flow diagram.
All
the included trials had been published in the last 10 years. One
ongoing study was identified (Bergstrom) which will be
considered
for inclusion in the next update of this review.
9Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Figure 1. Study flow diagram for clinical studies
10Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Economic analysis search
Electronic searches yielded 238 references, of which 237 were
ex-
cluded because they did not meet our inclusion criteria. One
eco-
nomic substudy by Moore 2013 was identified. See Figure 2
study
flow diagram.
11Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Figure 2. Study flow diagram for economic studies
12Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Included studies
Types of participants
We did not adjust sample sizes for clustering in the two cluster
RCTs (see above) (Defloor 2005; Moore 2011). A total of 1097
participants were enrolled in the three trials included in this re-
view (Defloor 2005; Moore 2011; Young 2004). Total numbers
randomised in the included studies were 838 (Defloor 2005),
213
(Moore 2011), and 46 (Young 2004). However, in Defloor 2005
only 262 participants were randomised to arms relevant to this
re-
view meaning a total of 521 randomised participants were
poten-
tially considered here. Ultimately 502 participants were
included
in the analyses reported here as 19 people were lost to follow up
and we conducted a complete case analysis. Within these trials
the
majority of participants were residents of long-term care
settings
(Defloor 2005; Moore 2011), whilst one small study recruited
46
participants from a single acute care facility (Young 2004).
Partic-
ipants in all three trials were aged over 65 years and all trials
were
conducted in Europe (Belgium (Defloor 2005), Ireland (Moore
2011), and Wales (Young 2004)).
Types of interventions
In two of the three trials (Moore 2011; Young 2004), a 30º tilt
position was compared with a standard 90º supine/lateral
position.
Participants in both the intervention and control groups were
tilted
left side, back, right side, and back. Essentially, the Moore
2011
and Young 2004 trials compared the same tilts (30º vs 90º) and
the same repositioning frequency for the 30º tilt. However,
there
was a difference in the frequency of repositioning overnight for
the 90º tilt groups. In the Moore 2011 trial, patients in the 90º
tilt
group were repositioned 6-hourly overnight compared with two
to 3-hourly overnight in the Young 2004 trial.
The third trial (Defloor 2005) evaluated different repositioning
frequencies (2-, 3-, 4- and 6-hourly) using a semi-Fowler or lat-
eral position, in combination with standard or viscoelastic mat-
tresses. The participants receiving the 2 hourly and 3 hourly
repo-
sitioning all received the standard hospital mattress whilst those
receiving the 4 and 6 hourly repositioning received viscoelastic
foam mattresses. In this study there was also a large “standard
care”
arm comprising 576 people allocated care based on nurses’
clinical
judgement (a range of support surfaces but no repositioning).
We
disregarded this treatment arm for the purposes of this review as
it
systematically differed from the other 4 arms in both the
allocation
of support surface and repositioning. In the other 4 groups, co-
interventions such as the use of nutritional supplements, skin
care
and allocation of pressure relieving cushions during chair
sitting
were also used.
Types of outcomes
The primary outcome in each of the included trials was the
propor-
tion of participants developing a new PU (Defloor 2005; Moore
2011; Young 2004). Two trials reported the incidence of PU and
included Stages 1 to 4 over a 28-day period (Defloor 2005;
Moore
2011), while the third trial reported a much briefer follow-up
pe-
riod of 24 hours and reported only Stage 1 PU (i.e. non-blanch-
able erythema) (Young 2004).
Excluded studies
One trial was excluded after the full text had been screened
(Vanderwee 2007). In this trial, participants who had pre-
existing
Stage 1 non-blanchable erythema at baseline were included, and
those who did not have non-blanchable erythema were excluded.
We had pre-specified that only studies where patients had no
ex-
isting PU skin damage were eligible for inclusion.
Risk of bias in included studies
We present an assessment of the risk of bias using ’Risk of
bias’
summary figures (Figure 3 and Figure 4), which detail all of the
judgements in cross-tabulations of study by entry. All three
trials
were at unclear or at high risk of bias.
13Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Figure 3. Risk of bias summary: review authors’ judgements
about each risk of bias item for each included
study
14Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Figure 4. Risk of bias graph: review authors’ judgements about
each risk of bias item presented as
percentages across all included studies
Allocation
Random sequence generation
All three trials described a process to generate the random allo-
cation list (Defloor 2005; Moore 2011; Young 2004). Two tri-
als used a computer-based random number generator (Defloor
2005; Moore 2011), while the Young 2004 trial used
sequentially-
numbered envelopes that contained a randomisation code. In the
Defloor 2005 trial, randomisation also occurred over a second
4-
week period. During this second period, each ward used a
differ-
ent prevention scheme than used in the first 4-week period.
Allocation concealment
Assessment of allocation concealment in the three included
trials
involved examination of whether trial authors described how the
assignment sequence was protected before and until allocation.
We
could not adequately assess the extent of allocation concealment
for the Defloor 2005 trial since the randomisation was
influenced
during the trial by resources and we therefore rated this
“unclear”.
In the Young 2004 trial, the allocation was concealed from the
researcher and the nurses in a sealed and sequentially numbered
envelope (low risk of bias). In the Moore 2011 study, allocation
concealment was achieved using remote randomisation (also low
risk of bias).
Blinding
Blinding of participants and personnel
It is hard to envisage how blinding of participants and personnel
to the frequency and nature of repositioning could be possible
and
therefore all three trials are likely to be at risk of performance
bias.
Two out of three trial reports did not state whether participants
and nursing staff were blinded (Defloor 2005; Young 2004).
The
Moore 2011 trial was described as “open label”, usually
meaning
that the participants, care givers and researchers were aware of
group allocation. The Defloor 2005 and Moore 2011 trials were
classified as at high risk of performance bias while the Young
2004
trial was classified as unclear risk of bias.
Blinding of outcome assessors
There was considerable variability in assessment of all grades
of
PU among the three trials (Defloor 2005; Moore 2011; Young
2004). Such variability is problematic, as the use of a subjective
primary outcome measure is open to ascertainment bias.
Outcome measurement was not blinded in two trials (Defloor
2005; Moore 2011) and these were rated as high risk. In the
Young 2004 trial, the outcome assessor was “unaware” of group
allocation, as the positioning aids (pillows) were removed from
under the patient prior to outcome measurement (low risk). Only
15Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Moore 2011 considered the reliability of outcome using several
outcome assessors to minimise this form of bias. However,
inter-
rater reliability data were not presented.
Incomplete outcome data
Assessment of whether incomplete outcome data had been ade-
quately addressed in each trial involved examining whether
reasons
for attrition or exclusion were reported, whether there was re-
in-
clusion of participants, and whether completeness of data for
each
main outcome was described. In two of the three trials (Defloor
2005; Young 2004), participants were excluded from the
analysis
in sufficient numbers to threaten bias. Defloor 2005 excluded
77
(9.2%) of 838 randomised participants from the analysis, and in
the Young 2004 trial, seven (15.2%) of the 46 randomised
partici-
pants were excluded; two due to death (both in the control
group)
and five in the experimental group, who were unable to tolerate
the
intervention and for whom outcome data collection then ceased.
For both the Young 2004 and Defloor 2005 trials, we conducted
a complete case analysis (which makes no assumption about the
outcomes for patients lost to follow up as this was felt more
con-
servative than analysing losses as if they had not sustained
pressure
injury). Attrition bias and lack of intention-to-treat analysis
were
contributing factors to incomplete outcome data. In Moore
2011,
all randomised participants were included in the analysis.
Selective reporting
Each study reported all pre-specified outcomes - as defined in
the
papers - in the results. No published protocol was available for
any
of these trials.
Other potential sources of bias
We planned to assess potential publication bias using funnel
plots
and to assess funnel plot asymmetry visually, however, as only
three studies were included in this review, this was not
appropriate
(Sterne 2011).
Effects of interventions
Comparison 1: frequencies of repositioning (one trial)
One cluster randomised trial (Defloor 2005) was included in
this
comparison however we did not adjust the data for clustering as
the ICC of 0.001 (from Moore 2011 and Cumming 2008) was so
small as to make no difference.
Primary outcomes
The proportion of new pressure ulcers of any grade, stage or
category
In the Defloor 2005 trial, various repositioning regimens of dif-
ferent frequencies (2-, 3-, 4- and 6-hourly), positions (i.e. semi-
Fowlers and lateral), and support surfaces (i.e. viscoelastic and
standard mattresses) were compared.
For the purposes of this review we compared the outcomes for
repositioning frequency where the support surface was the same
for both groups i.e., 2-hourly vs. 3-hourly repositioning (all on
the
standard hospital mattress) and 4-hourly vs. 6-hourly
reposition-
ing (all on the viscoelastic foam mattress). On the standard
hospi-
tal mattress, 39/63 (62%) participants receiving 2 hourly reposi-
tioning developed a pressure ulcer of any severity compared
with
40/58 (69%) receiving 4-hourly repositioning (RR 0.90, 95% CI
0.69 to 1.16) (Analysis 1.1).
For participants nursed on viscoelastic foam mattresses, 30/66
(46%) of participants receiving 4-hourly repositioning
developed
a pressure ulcer of any severity compared with 39/63 (62%) of
those receiving 6-hourly repositioning (RR 0.73, 95% CI 0.53 to
1.02) (Analysis 2.1).
The proportion of new pressure ulcers category 2 to 4
We also examined whether there was a treatment effect when
only
breaks in the skin (category 2 to 4 ulcers) were analysed
however
we did not pre-specify this analysis in our protocol and the
results
are merely exploratory.
On the standard hospital mattress, 9/63 (14%) of participants re-
ceiving 2 hourly repositioning developed an ulcer of Category 2
and above compared with 14/58 participants (24%) receiving 3-
hourly repositioning (RR 0.59, 95% CI 0.28 to 1.26) (Analysis
1.2). On the viscoelastic foam mattress, 2/66 (3%) participants
receiving 4-hourly repositioning developed an ulcer of Category
2 or above compared with 10/63 (16%) receiving 6-hourly repo-
sitioning (RR 0.19, 95% CI 0.04 to 0.84) (Analysis 2.2).
Comparison 2: different positions for repositioning
Primary outcomes
The proportion of new pressure ulcers of any grade, stage or
category (two trials)
Both trials reported this outcome (Moore 2011; Young 2004).
Moore 2011 examined the use of 30° 3-hourly tilt (overnight)
compared with repositioning 6-hourly 90° tilt (overnight) in a
study involving 259 randomised (252 analysed) participants.
The
16Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
incidence of pressure ulcers (Categories 1 and 2) was
significantly
lower in the 30° tilt group (RR 0.27, 95% CI 0.08, 0.91)
compared
with the 90° tilt group (Analysis 3.1). This study was at high
risk
of bias due to unblinded outcome assessment.
In the small trial by Young 2004 (46 randomised, 39 analysed
par-
ticipants), the main outcome was Category/Stage 1 non-blanch-
able erythema, and the follow-up period was 24 hours. A 3-
hourly
30o tilt compared with a 3-hourly 90o lateral (overnight) and
supine position (overnight) was used. There was no statistically
significant difference in risk of pressure ulceration (RR 1.37,
95%
CI 0.25 to 7.41) (Analysis 3.1) however this comparison is
grossly
underpowered with only 5 events.The trials of Moore 2011 and
Young 2004 compared the same tilts (30º vs 90º) using simi-
lar repositioning frequencies; 3-hourly for the 30º tilt; 6-hourly
overnight for the 90º tilt in Moore 2011; and 2- to 3-hourly
overnight in the Young 2004 trial therefore we pooled them us-
ing a random effects model (moderate to high heterogeneity, I2
= 69%). Overall there was no difference in the risk of Category/
Stage 1 or 2 pressure injury (persistent erythema) between 30º
and
90º tilts however this comparison is at risk of a Type II error
due
to the lack of statistical power (pooled RR 0.62, 95% CI 0.10 to
3.97) (Analysis 3.1).
Secondary outcomes
Health-related quality of life (HRQoL)
No trial reported health-related quality of life (HRQoL).
Procedural pain
No trial reported procedural pain.
Patient satisfaction
No trial reported patient satisfaction.
Cost
One within-trial cost evaluation by Moore 2013 is included in
this review. Moore 2013 performed a cost-effectiveness analysis
based on data derived from their cluster randomised controlled
trial (Moore 2011) comparing 3-hourly repositioning using the
30° tilt overnight (n=99, unadjusted for clustering) with
standard
care consisting of 6-hourly repositioning using the 90° lateral
rota-
tion overnight (n=114, unadjusted for clustering), in
participants
recruited from 12 long term aged-care facilities in Ireland.
Moore 2013 compared the nursing time costs and incidence of
PU development over the four week trial period. Nurse time was
calculated from information recorded in the clinical study
indicat-
ing number of turns per patient, nurses per turn, and nurse time
per turn. A unit cost of EURO23.94 per nurse hour was then ap-
plied, based on the rate for a staff nurse scale point 8 in mid-
2009.
Efficacy was measured as PU incidence (the primary outcome of
the clinical trial), which would appear to be represented as the
number of patients developing a new PU during the four week
trial period. Moore 2013 also reported some data for the total
cost
of dressings for treating PUs that developed during the trial, but
did not report a unit cost and did not include dressing costs in
the
incremental analysis.
Incremental cost per event avoided
The 30° 3-hourly tilt positioning intervention was reported to be
cost saving in nurse time compared with standard care (mean
nurse
time cost per patient EURO206.6 vs EURO253.1, incremental
difference EURO-46.5; 95%CI: EURO-1.25 to EURO-74.60)
(Moore 2013). The intervention dominated the control in terms
of cost-effectiveness, since the trial also found the intervention
to
be more effective than the control. The lower nurse time cost
for
the intervention group despite the greater turning frequency was
due to the lower time and reduced number of nurses required for
each turn.
Given the intervention dominated the control, it was
unnecessary
for Moore 2013 to estimate an incremental cost-effectiveness
ra-
tio although they did. There is some inconsistency in the report-
ing and interpretation of the incremental analysis made by
Moore
2013, leading to a lack of clarity in the paper around the
estimated
cost-effectiveness. Moore 2013 suggest their efficacy outcome
in
the incremental analysis as both “patient free of PU” and “PU
avoided”. The rationale for changing between outcome measures
of “patient free of PU” and “PU avoided” is unclear. Neverthe-
less, in this instance these outcome measures would appear to
be
equivalent since the number of patients developing an ulcer and
the number of PUs developing during the trial was the same (n=
16) (Moore 2011). Moore 2013 reported the incremental cost
per
patient free of PU (-EURO73.40) and per pressure ulcer avoided
(-EURO547.00). Although not explicitly stated, the estimated
in-
cremental cost effectiveness ratios appear to be intended to rep-
resent an incremental cost per additional incremental outcome.
However, these values are inconsistent with each other, given
the
incidence of PUs developing was the same in the trial (Moore
2011) regardless of whether defined as number of patients
devel-
oping PU or number of PUs developing during the trial. Further,
neither of these values could be confirmed from the data
provided
in the main body of the Moore 2013 paper. The former value (-
EURO73.40 per patient free of PU) appears to have been incor-
rectly estimated from the data presented in the paper. The lat-
ter value of -EURO547 per (additional) PU avoided is
consistent
with the efficacy data presented in the abstract, but the efficacy
data presented in the abstract is inconsistent with efficacy data
presented in the main body of the report, and does not precisely
match the efficacy data provided in the original clinical trial
report
(Moore 2011).
Despite this limitation in interpretation, the reported findings
17Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
suggest that for every 100 patients treated with the 3-hourly
repositioning intervention rather than standard care,
EURO4,650
would be saved in nurse time costs and an additional 8 patients
would avoid a PU. Moore 2013 concluded that repositioning ev-
ery 3 hours using the 30° tilt is less costly in terms of nursing
time
and more effective than standard care involving repositioning
ev-
ery 6 hours using 90° tilt.
D I S C U S S I O N
Summary of main results
The proportion of new pressure ulcers of any grade,
stage or category
The main aim of this systematic review was to present and ap-
praise all existing evidence regarding the relative effectiveness
of
repositioning on the prevention of PUs in adults. There is
limited
evidence, with only three small trials and data from a total of
502
participants contributing to this analysis. Moreover the three
trials
were at high risk of bias.
The results of the review are that we have insufficient evidence
to
draw a reliable conclusion of whether more frequent
repositioning
(in this review we report 2-hourly vs. 3-hourly, and 4-hourly vs.
6-
hourly) or different positions (the 30° tilt compared with the
90°
lateral position) are more effective in reducing pressure
damage.
The lack of statistical power means we cannot say there is no
bene-
fit associated with more frequent repositioning since in each
com-
parison the proportion of people developing pressure ulcers was
lower in the groups receiving more frequent changes of position
but the differenced did not reach conventional levels of
statistical
significance and so may be chance rather than “real”
differences.
There was a statistically significant reduction in pressure ulcers
of Category 2 and above with 4-hourly repositioning compared
with 6-hourly (Defloor 2005) however we did not prespecify
this
outcome and this finding is exploratory.
It is noteworthy that in Defloor 2005, 46% of participants
receiv-
ing 4-hourly repositioning and 62% of those receiving 6-hourly
developed pressure damage, despite being nursed on
viscoelastic
foam mattresses. This suggests that although another Cochrane
re-
view (McInnes 2011) found that more advanced foam mattresses
reduce pressure damage relative to the standard hospital
mattress,
high rates of pressure damage are still observed and careful
moni-
toring of skin condition is required.
Repositioning regimens are widely used and recommended in
best
practice guidelines (European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel
1998;
Australian Wound Management Association 2011), however
there
is limited empirical evidence of their effect on the prevention
of pressure ulcers. That said, the theoretical rationale for
reposi-
tioning (to reduce isolated tissue ischaemia by relieving
pressure)
makes physiological sense. However current evidence does not
en-
able conclusions to be drawn regarding the optimum position or
frequency of re-positioning. The lack of experimental evidence
for repositioning per se, or for specific positions and
frequencies,
should not be interpreted as evidence of ineffectiveness.
Overall completeness and applicability of
evidence
There was limited evidence available to assess the benefits of
dif-
ferent regimens for the prevention of pressure ulcers. Overall
the
three studies in this review had sample sizes resulting in a lack
of
statistical power to detect a treatment effect if it exists. Small
sam-
ple sizes increase the risk of Type 2 errors and reduce the
precision
of the estimates.
There was wide variation in sample sizes among the trials. Only
one
of the trials was conducted in an acute care setting and included
only hospital patients over the age of 65 years (Young 2004).
The
primary study outcome reported in all three trials was the inci-
dence of pressure ulcers. None of the included trials examined
out-
comes such as pain, quality of life or participant satisfaction.
Only
one trial author performed a parallel economic substudy (Moore
2013).
The focus of the interventions of the three trials that met our in-
clusion criteria varied, with two trials using tilts and three-
hourly
overnight repositioning (Moore 2011; Young 2004), while the
third used various repositioning frequencies and positions in
com-
bination with different types of mattresses (Defloor 2005). An-
other limitation was the inconsistency in follow-up periods,
which
ranged between 24 hours (Young 2004) to 28 days (Defloor
2005
and Moore 2011). All three trials were conducted in Europe
which
may limit the generalisability of the findings. Furthermore,
tech-
nological developments in mattress composition and materials,
as
well as bed design, has occurred since the two earliest studies
were
conducted, which also limits the external validity of these
results,
as it is likely that other support surfaces are now in use.
Quality of the evidence
The quality of the body of evidence has been appraised using
the
GRADE approach in relation to study limitations, inconsistency
of results,indirectness, imprecision and risk of bias,as specified
in
the Handbook (Schünemann 2011) and a Summary of Findings
Table will be included in the next update. There is very low
quality
of evidence from the three trials that assessed the use of
different
repositioning regimens. The evidence was downgraded because
of the low number of participants with consequent imprecision
together with high risk of bias. The primary outcome, pressure
ulcer development, requires a subjective judgement of whether
18Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
tissue damage has occurred (at least for Grade 1 pressure ulcer)
and
only one study (Young 2004) used blinded outcome assessment.
Potential biases in the review process
We followed clearly defined, pre-specified procedures to
prevent
potential bias in the review process. A comprehensive and
system-
atic literature search was conducted, that was both transparent
and
reproducible. That notwithstanding, it is possible that we
missed
trials published in journals that were outside our search
strategy.
Whilst we had intended to conduct a sensitivity analysis to test
the robustness of the results to different assumptions about the
outcomes of people who were lost to follow up, we felt that this
was not necessary due to the poor volume and quality of the
evi-
dence and our consequent inability to draw any conclusions (no
sensitivity analysis would help in this regard).
None of the review authors has any conflict of interest.
Agreements and disagreements with other
studies or reviews
Our results are consistent with others’ assessment of the
evidence
for repositioning. The systematic review by Reddy 2006, was
pub-
lished before one of our included trials, Moore 2011, was
under-
taken. The results of the review by Reddy 2006 suggested that
the evidence around repositioning remains somewhat inconclu-
sive, and the methodology for PUP trials sub optimal.
A U T H O R S ’ C O N C L U S I O N S
Implications for practice
There is currently insufficient evidence that the 30° tilt is more
effective than the 90° tilt (two trials, only 21 events in total).
Repositioning in some form is recommended in all clinical
guide-
lines though implementation is probably variable and highly de-
pendent on the available resources (particularly staffing levels).
It
is noteworthy that more recent clinical guidelines no longer ad-
vocate repositioning patients every two hours (European
Pressure
Ulcer Advisory Panel 2009; National Pressure Ulcer Advisory
Panel 2007).
It is surprising that, to date, there is little evidence available
from
RCTs that addresses the question of whether repositioning pa-
tients does decrease the risk of acquiring pressure ulcers. The
lack
of evidence is a cause for concern considering that estimates of
incidence of hospital-acquired pressure ulcers range from less
than
3% to over 30% of patients (Mulligan 2011; Queensland Health
2008; Schuurman 2009; Nixon 2006).
The aetiology of pressure ulcer development is linked to
localised
vascular obstruction that reduces capillary blood flow to the
skin
surface area (European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2009).
Thus,
there are reasonable grounds to expect that repositioning hospi-
talised patients will minimise the risk of oxygen deprivation and
nutrients that are required for tissue repair. However, the opti-
mal frequency with which this should occur must consider the
other negative effects of turning such as the potential for sleep
disruption,heightened increases in patients’ pain perception and,
for nurses, musculoskeletal injuries
Implications for research
There is an urgent need for appropriately-powered, high-quality,
multicentre trials to evaluate the clinical and cost effectiveness
of
repositioning regimens on the prevention of pressure ulcers. The
modest sample sizes in the trials reviewed is a major limitation.
Thus in future trials, larger numbers of participants are needed,
particularly if cluster trials are conducted. Two of the thee trials
reviewed here were conducted in long-term care settings,
therefore,
there is a need to use acute care settings to address the rise in
prevalence of hospital acquired pressure ulcers (Mulligan
2011).
Consistency in the measures used to classify pressure ulcers of
any severity is essential. Given the high costs associated with
the
prevention and treatment of pressure ulcers, priority should be
given to robust RCTs with economic evaluations. Trialists
should
consider comparisons of:
1. the repositioning frequencies and optimal positioning;
2. the effects of repositioning in patients with limited mobility
(e.g. paraplegia);
3. the economic costs (including incremental costs) of PUs;
and,
4. the economic and social impacts of PUs on patients’
HRQoL using valid and reliable HRQoL measures.
Good quality trials also need to address the methodological
limi-
tations identified in the trials of this review. Trialists must
ensure
transparency of research process and adhere to the CONSORT
statement for reporting RCTs (The CONSORT Statement 2010).
To minimise the sources of bias, trialists need to pay careful at-
tention to elements of research design and execution with regard
to allocation concealment, randomisation, blinding, and partici-
pant attrition (Polit 2010). For instance, having an observer who
is blinded to the outcome perform the outcome assessment. If
cluster-RCTs are used, trialists need also to consider the
potential
for bias in terms of selection bias, baseline comparability,
analysis,
and loss of clusters (Higgins 2011a).
A C K N O W L E D G E M E N T S
19Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
The authors would like to thank the following referees: Wounds
Group Editors Nicky Cullum and Andrea Nelson; Trials
Search Co-odinator Ruth Foxlee; Statistical Consultant
Giovanni
Casazza; and, Expert Referees Zena Moore and Carol
Dealey.The
authors also thank Ms Jodie Vickery from Griffith University
for
assistance with selection of the economic studies and Elizabeth
Royle for copy editing.
R E F E R E N C E S
References to studies included in this review
Defloor 2005 {published data only}
Defloor T, De Bacquer D, Grypdonck MH. The effect of
various combinations of turning and pressure reducing
devices on the incidence of pressure ulcers. International
Journal of Nursing Studies 2005;42(1):37–46.
Moore 2011 {published data only (unpublished sought but not
used)}
Moore Z, Cowman S, Conroy RM. A randomised
controlled clinical trial of repositioning, using the 30o tilt,
for the prevention of pressure ulcers. Journal of Clinical
Nursing 2011;20(17-18):2633–44.
Young 2004 {published data only}
Young T. The 30 degree tilt position vs the 90 degree lateral
and supine positions in reducing the incidence of non-
blanching erythema in a hospital inpatient population:
a randomised controlled trial. Journal of Tissue Viability
2004;14(3):88, 90, 92-6.
References to studies excluded from this review
Vanderwee 2007 {published data only}
Vanderwee K, Grypdonck MHF, De Bacquer D, Defloor
T. Effectiveness of turning with unequal time intervals on
the incidence of pressure ulcer lesions. Journal of Advanced
Nursing 2007;57(1):59–68.
References to ongoing studies
Bergstrom {unpublished data only}
TURN Study. Ongoing study Started in 2008 and
completed in June 2011.
Additional references
Allman 1995
Allman RM, Goode PS, Patrick MM, Burst N, Bartolucci
AA. Pressure ulcer risk factors among hospitalised patients
with activity limitation. JAMA 1995;273:865–70.
Allman 1997
Allman RM. Pressure ulcer prevalence, incidence, risk
factors, and impact. Clinics in Geriatric Medicine 1997;13
(3):421–36.
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare 2009
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. Australian
Hospital Statistics 2007-08. Health services series no.
33. Cat. No. HSE 71. Report. Canberra: Australian
Governement, 2009.
Australian Safety and Compensation Council 2009
Australian Safety and Compensation Council. The costs of
work-related injury and illness for Australian employers,
workers and the community. ASCC. Canberra, 2009.
Australian Wound Management Association 2011
Australian Wound Management Association. Pan
Pacific clinical practice guideline for the prevention and
management of pressure Injury. Clinical Guideline October
2011.
Bennett 2004
Bennett G, Dealey C, Posnett J. The cost of pressure ulcers
in the UK. Age and Ageing 2004;33(3):230–5.
Braden 1987
Braden BJ, Bergstrom N. A conceptual scheme for the study
of the aetiology of pressure sores. Rehabilitation Nursing
1987;12:8–16.
Braden 2005
Braden BJ, Maklebust J. Preventing pressure ulcers with the
Braden scale: an update on this easy-to-use tool that assess
a patient’s risk. American Journal of Nursing 2005;105(5):
70–2.
Brandeis 2001
Brandeis GH, Berlowitz DR, Katz P. Are pressure ulcers
preventable? A survey of experts. Advances in Skin and
Wound Care 2001;14(5):244–8.
Bureau of Labor Statistics 2002
United States Department of Labor. Case and demographic
characteristics for work-related injuries and illnesses
involving days away from work. Resource table 10: detailed
occupation by selected parts of body affected. Report.
Canberra, 2002.
Buss 2002
Buss I, Halfens R, Abu-Saad H. The most effective time
interval for repositioning subjects at risk of pressure sore
development. Rehabilitation Nursing 2002;27(2):59–66.
Carskadon 2005
Carskadon MA, Dement WC. Normal human sleep: an
overview. In: Kryger, MH, Roth T, Dement WC editor
(s). Principles and Practice of Sleep Medicine. 4th Edition.
Philadelphia: Elsevier Sanders, 2005.
20Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Catania 2007
Catania K, James P, Moran M. PUPPI: The Pressure Ulcer
Prevention Protocol Interventions. American Journal of
Nursing 2007;107(4):44–52.
Cumming 2008
Cumming RG, Sherrington C, Lord SR, Simpson JM,
Vogler C, Cameron ID, Naganathan V, Prevention of
Older People’s Injury Falls Prevention in Hospitals Research
Group. Cluster randomised trial of a targeted multifactorial
intervention to prevent falls among older people in hospital..
BMJ 2008;336:758.
Dawson 2007
Dawson A, McLennan S, Schiller S, Jull GA, Hodges PW,
Stewart S. Interventions to prevent back pain and back
injury in nurses: a systematic review. Occupational and
Environmental Medicine 2007;64:642–50.
Deeks 2002
Deeks J. Issues in the selection of a summary statistic
for meta analysis of clinical trials with binary outcomes.
Statistics in Medicine 2002;21(1):575–600.
Deeks 2011
Deeks JJ, Higgins JPT, Altman DG, on behalf of the
Cochrane Statistical Methods Group and the Cochrane
Bias Methods Group (Editors). Chapter 9: Analysing
data and undertaking meta-analyses. In Higgins JPT,
Green S (editors). Cochrane Handbook for Systematic
Reviews of Interventions Version 5.1.0 [updated March
2011]. The Cochrane Collaboration, 2011. Available from
www.cochrane-handbook.org.
Defloor 2000
Defloor T. The effect of position and mattress on interface
pressure. Applied Nursing Research 2000;13:2–11.
Drummond 2005
Drummond MF, Sculpher MJ, Torrance GW, O’Brien BJ,
Stoddart GL. Methods for the Economic Evaluation of Health
Care Programs. 3rd Edition. Oxford: Oxford University
Press, 2005.
European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 1998
European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel. Policy statement
on the prevention of pressure ulcers. British Journal of
Nursing 1998;7(7):888–90.
European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2009
European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel and National
Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel. Treatment of pressure ulcers:
quick reference guide. www.npuap.org 2009.
Exton-Smith 1961
Exton-Smith AN, Sherwin RW. The prevention of pressure
sores: significance of spontaneous bodily movements.
Lancet 1961;2:1124–6.
Higgins 2011a
Higgins JPT, Deeks JJ, Altman DG (editors). Chapter
16: Special topics in statistics. In: Higgins JPT, Green
S editor(s). Cochrane Handbook for Systematic Reviews of
Interventions. Version 5.1.0. [updated March 2011]. The
Cochrane Collaboration, 2011.
Higgins 2011b
Higgins JPT, Deeks JJ. Chapter 7: Selecting studies and
collecting data. In Higgins JPT, Green S (editors). Cochrane
Handbook for Systematic Reviews of Interventions Version
5.1.0 [updated March 2011]. The Cochrane Collaboration,
2011. Available from www.cochrane-handbook.org.
Higgins 2011c
Higgins JPT, Altman DG, on behalf of the Cochrane
Statistical Methods Group and the Cochrane Bias Methods
Group (editors). Chapter 8: Assessing risk of bias in
included studies. In Higgins JPT, Green S (editors). Cochrane
Handbook for Systematic Reviews of Interventions Version
5.1.0 [updated March 2011]. The Cochrane Collaboration,
2011.
Humphries 2008
Humphries J. Sleep disruption in hospitalised adults.
Medical-Surgical Nursing 2008;17(6):391–5.
Institute for Healthcare Improvement 2008
Institute for Healthcare Improvement. Getting started
kit: prevent pressure ulcers how-to guide 5 million lives
campaign. Available at http://www.in.gov/isdh/files/
IHI˙PU˙Getting˙Started˙Supplement˙for˙Rural˙Hospitals.pdf
2008.
Jalali 2005
Jalali R, Rezaie M. Predicting pressure ulcer risk: comparing
the predictive validity of 4 scales. Advances in Skin and
Wound Care 2005;18(2):92–7.
Krapfl 2008
Krapfl LA, Gray M. Does regular repositioning prevent
pressure ulcers?. Journal of Wound, Ostomy and Continence
Nursing 2008;35(6):571–7.
Lefebvre 2011
Lefebvre C, Manheimer E, Glanville J. Chapter 6: Searching
for studies. In: Higgins JPT, Green S (editors). Cochrane
Handbook for Systematic Reviews of Interventions Version
5.1.0 [updated March 2011]. The Cochrane Collaboration,
2011. Available from www.cochrane-handbook.org.
Lindgren 2004
Lindgren M, Unosson M, Fredrikson M, Ek AC.
Immobility--a major risk factor for development of pressure
ulcers among adult hospitalised patients: a prospective
study. Scandinavian Journal of Caring Sciences 2004;18(1):
57–63.
Manorama 2010
Manorama AA, Baek S, Vorro J, Sikorskii A, Bush
TR. Blood perfusion and transcutaneous oxygen level
characterizations in human skin with changes in normal
and shear loads--implications for pressure ulcer formation.
Clinical Biomechanics 2010;25(8):823–8.
McInnes 2011
McInnes E, Jammali-Blasi A, Bell-Syer S, Dumville J,
Cullum N. Support surfaces for pressure ulcer prevention.
Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews 2011, Issue 4.
[DOI: 10.1002/14651858.CD001735.pub4]
21Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Moore 2013
Moore Z, Cowman S, Posnett J. An economic analysis of
repositioning for the prevention of pressure ulcers. Journal
of Clinical Nursing 2013;22:2354-60.
Mulligan 2011
Mulligan S, Prentice J, Scott L. WoundsWest Wound
Prevalence Survey 2011 State-wide Overview Report.
Ambulatory Care Services, Department of Health: Perth,
Western Australia. 2011:1–41.
National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2007
NPUAP pressure ulcer staging and 2007 update. National
Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2007.
Nixon 2006
Nixon J, Nelson EA, Cranny G, Iglesias CP, Hawkins K,
Cullum NA, et al. Pressure relieving support surfaces: a
randomised evaluation. Health Technology Assessment 2006;
10(22):1–180.
Norton 1962
Norton D, McLaren R, Exton-Smith AN. An Investigation
of Geriatirc Nursing Problems in Hospital. New York:
Churchill Livingstone, 1962.
NPUAP 2009
National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel & European
Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel. Prevention and treatment
of pressure ulcers: clinical practice guideline. NPUAP &
EPUAP. Washington, 2009.
Palmen 1987
Palmen NGM. Prevention of pressure sores in a general
hospital: a study into the effect of a nursing intervention
focusing on pressure sore prevention. Unpublished Masters
Thesis, Maastricht University 1987.
Polit 2010
Polit D, Gillespie B. Intention-to-treat in randomized
controlled trials: recommendations for a total trial strategy.
Research in Nursing & Health 2010;33:355–68.
Queensland Health 2008
Queensland Health. Pressure ulcer prevalence audit, 2008.
Queensland Health Patient Safety Centre 2008.
Queensland Health 2009
Queensland Health. Pressure ulcer prevention and
management resource guidelines. The State of Queensland.
Queensland Health, Brisbane 2009.
Raymond 2004
Raymond I, Ancoli-Israel S, Choiniere M. Sleep
disturbances, pain and analgesia in adults hospitalised for
burn injuries. Sleep Medicine 2004;5:551–9.
Reddy 2006
Reddy M, Gill S, Rochon P. Preventing pressure ulcers: A
systematic review. JAMA 2006;296(8):974–84.
Schuurman 2009
Schuurman JP, Schoonhoven L, Defloor T, Van Engelshoven
I, Van Ramshorst B, Buskens E. Economic evaluation
of pressure ulcer care: a cost minimization analysis of
preventative strategies. Nurse Economics 2009;27(6):
390–400.
Schünemann 2011
Schünemann HJ, Oxman AD, Higgins JPT, Vist GE,
Glasziou P, Guyatt GH. Chapter 11. Presenting results
and ’Summary of findings’ tables. In Higgins JPT, Green
S (editors). Cochrane Handbook for Systematic Reviews
of Interventions Version 5.1.0 [updated March 2011].
The Cochrane Collaboration, 2011. Available from
www.cochrane-handbook.org.
Shemilt 2010
Shemilt I, Thomas J, Morciano M. A web-based tool for
adjusting costs to a specific target currency and price year.
Evidence and Policy 2010;6:51–9.
Shemilt 2011
Shemilt I, Mugford M, Byford S, Drummond M, Eisenstein
E, Knapp M. Chapter 15: Incorporating economics
evidence. In: Higgins JPT, Green S (editors). Cochrane
Handbook for Systematic Reviews of Interventions Version
5.1.0 [updated March 2011]. The Cochrane Collaboration,
2011. Available from www.cochrane-handbook.org.
SIGN 2011
Scottish Intercollegiate Guidelines Network. Search Filters.
http://www.sign.ac.uk/methodology/filters.html 2011.
Smith 1990
Smith AM, Malone JA. Preventing pressure ulcers in
institutionalised elders: assessing the effects of small,
unscheduled shifts in body position. Decubitus 1990;3(4):
20–4.
Sterne 2011
Sterne JAC, Egger M, Moher D, on behalf of the
Cochrane Bias Methods Group (editors). Chapter 10:
Addressing reporting biases. In: Higgins JPT, Green S
(editors). Cochrane Handbook for Systematic Reviews
of Interventions Version 5.1.0 [updated March 2011].
The Cochrane Collaboration, 2011. Available from
www.cochrane-handbook.org.
The CONSORT Statement 2010
The CONSORT Group. The CONSORT Statement
. http://www.consort-statement.org/consort-statement/
2012.
Thomas 1996
Thomas DR, Goode PS, Tarquine PH, Allman RM.
Hospital-acquired pressure ulcers and risk of death. Journal
of the American Geriatrics Society 1996;44:1435–40.
Thompson 2005
Thompson D. An evaluation of the Waterlow pressure ulcer
risk-assessment tool. British Journal of Nursing 1995;14(8):
455–9.
Trinkoff 2001
Trinkoff A, Storr C, Lipscomb J. Physically demanding
work and inadequate sleep, pain, medication use and
absenteeism in registered nurses. Journal of Occupational
and Environmental Medicine 2001;43(4):355–63.
22Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Vanderwee 2005
Vanderwee K, Grypdonck M, Defloor T. Effectiveness of
an alternating pressure air mattress for the prevention of
pressure ulcers. Age and Ageing 2005;34:261–7.
Vieira 2009
Vieira E, Kumar S. Safety analysis of patient transfers and
handling tasks. Quality and Safety in Health Care 2009;18:
380–4.
∗ Indicates the major publication for the study
23Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
C H A R A C T E R I S T I C S O F S T U D I E S
Characteristics of included studies [ordered by study ID]
Defloor 2005
Methods Study design: 5-armed cluster RCT with a 4-week (28-
day) follow-up period (only 4
arms analysed in this review - see below)
Quote: “Each ward applied the prevention scheme selected for a
period of 4 weeks. The
randomisation procedure was repeated for a second period of 4
weeks. During the second
period each ward used a different prevention scheme than used
in the first period” (pp
39)
Ethics and informed consent: ethics approval and consent
obtained.
Sample size calculation: yes.
ITT analysis: participants analysed in the groups to which they
were assigned, but data
were incomplete for 24 participants, and they were not included
in the analysis
Quote: “The observations were incomplete in the case of 24
patients.”
Participants Location: 32 wards across 11 nursing homes in
Flanders, Belgium
Baseline data reported in relation to group comparisons for age,
gender and Braden scale
scores
Mean ages:
Group A: 85.2 years (± 7.2)
Group B: 85.2 years (± 6.2)
Group C: 84.7 years (± 7.7)
Group D: 85.4 years (± 7.3)
Inclusion criteria: 838 people fulfilled inclusion criteria. This
review excludes partici-
pants from the usual care group who received care that was
different in terms of both
support surface AND repositioning
1. Geriatric residents with a Braden score of < 17 or a Norton
score of < 12
2. Informed consent of the patient/family.
3. No PU at time of recruitment to study.
Exclusion criteria: none stated, but total of 1114 people
excluded.
Interventions Aim(s): to investigate the effect of 4 different
preventative regimes involving either fre-
quent turning (2- to 3-hourly) or the use of a pressure-reducing
mattress in combination
with less frequent turning (4- to 6-hourly)
Group A: 2-hourly turning regimen on standard mattress (65
randomised, 63 analysed)
Group B: 3-hourly turning regimen on standard mattress (65
randomised, 58 analysed)
Group C: 4-hourly turning regimen on viscoelastic polyurethane
(pressure-relieving)
mattress (67 randomised, 66 analysed)
Group D: 6-hourly turning regimen on viscoelastic polyurethane
(pressure-relieving)
mattress (65 randomised, 63 analysed)
Alternating turning positions: semi-Fowlers with feet elevated
30o alternating with 30
o lateral rotation, pillow placement under back from shoulder
on standard mattress
Specified sitting position: experimental group sitting periods
were recorded but not
standardised; they sat on thick air cushions. Backrest tilt on
chair, legs on footrest but
heels not supported. Cushion for back
Group 2 Control: n = 576 patients.
Care given according to patients’ level of risk; water
mattresses, alternating mattresses,
24Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Defloor 2005 (Continued)
sheepskins and gel cushions; based on nurses’ clinical
judgement. No PU risk assessment
tool used. For the purposes of this review we have disregarded
this group since their
care was highly heterogeneous and differed systematically from
the others in terms
of BOTH the support surface provision policy AND the
(absence of a) repositioning
policy.
Study date(s): not stated.
Outcomes Primary outcome: incidence of a PU (any category)
during a 28-day period.
Seondary outcomes: risk assessment using Braden and Norton
scores.
Time points: twice weekly for 4 weeks
Notes Not reported whether water mattresses, alternating
mattresses, sheepskins and gel cush-
ions were used singly or in combination with each other
Risk of bias
Bias Authors’ judgement Support for judgement
Random sequence generation (selection
bias)
Low risk Quote:“Using computerised randomisa-
tion tables, the prevention schemes were
randomly allocated to 32 wards (table 1)
Randomisation also occurred over a sec-
ond 4-week period. During this second pe-
riod, each ward used a different prevention
scheme than used in the first 4-week period
(pp. 39)
Diagram of randomisation schedule in-
cluded in the paper as a table pp 39
Allocation concealment (selection bias) Unclear risk Quote: “a
sealed envelope containing all
the room numbers in a random order was
opened. The first 5 patients who satisfied
the inclusion criteria were included.”
Quote: “labour intensive nature of some
of the prevention schemes, the number of
patients participating in the experimental
groups was limited to 5 per ward.”
Comment: concern that allocation not
fully concealed
Blinding of participants and personnel
(performance bias)
All outcomes
High risk Quote: “’It was impossible to blind the
nurses for preventative care.”
Comment: Not blinded
Blinding of outcome assessment (detection
bias)
All outcomes
High risk Quote: “The nurses were blinded for the
Braden and Norton scores of their individ-
ual patients.”
Comment: impossible for nursing staff to
be blinded due to the differences in the
25Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Defloor 2005 (Continued)
types and varieties of turning regimens
Incomplete outcome data (attrition bias)
All outcomes
High risk Flow chart (fig 1, pp 41) showed patient
attrition across each of the 5 groups
Quotes:
“Of the 838 included patients, 761 patients
completed the 4-week study period.”
“The data on three patients were incom-
plete and it could not be guaranteed that
the protocol was strictly followed. Those
patients were excluded.”
Comment: ITT analysis not implemented
Selective reporting (reporting bias) Unclear risk Comment:
clinical outcomes were pre-
sented in Tables 2 and 3 of the paper. A
published protocol was not available. Mea-
sures used reflect aims of the intervention
and outcomes
Other bias Low risk None identified.
Moore 2011
Methods Study design: 2-armed cluster RCT with a 4-week (28-
day) follow-up period
Ethics and informed consent: ethics approval and consent
obtained.
Sample size calculation: yes.
ITT analysis: yes, all participants randomised were analysed.
Participants Location: 12 hospital sites with long-term residents
in Ireland.
Mean age: not reported
Baseline data reported in relation to group comparisons for age,
gender and Braden scale
scores
Inclusion criteria:
1. In-patient in a long term geriatric facility.
2. Over 65 years of age.
3. At risk of PU development using the activity and mobility
components of Braden
scale
4. No PU at time of recruitment to study.
5. No medical condition that would preclude the use of
repositioning
6. Consent.
Exclusion criteria: patients with existing PU. Total of 57
patients excluded.
Interventions Aim(s): to examine whether repositioning using
30° tilt and 3-h repositioning reduces
the incidence of PU compared with usual care
Group 1: 30° tilt (n = 99 participants randomised, 99 analysed)
Repositioning by clinical staff using 30° tilt at night (left side,
back, right side, back) 3-
h overnight (8 pm-8 am). During the day, position changes
occurred 2-3h
Group 2: Usual care (n = 114 participants randomised, 99
analysed)
Usual care consisted of repositioning by clinical staff every 6-h
using the 90° tilt (left
26Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Moore 2011 (Continued)
side, back, right side, back) overnight, (8 pm-8 am). During the
day, position changes
occurred 2- to 3-h
Co-interventions : participants in both groups nursed as per
planned care regarding
nutritional regimens, toileting, changing of incontinence pads,
preparation for feeding,
and pressure redistribution devices on chairs. Repositioned
every 2- to 3-h during the
day.
Outcomes Primary outcome: incidence of all PUs during a 28-
day period
Quote: “The EPUAP pressure ulcer (PU) classification system,
ranging from non-blanch-
ing erythema of intact skin to full scale tissue destruction”
(Grades I to IV)
Quote: “A pressure ulcer was defined as localised areas of
tissue damage caused to skin
and underlying soft tissue caused by sustained mechanical
loading and shearing forces.”
Secondary outcomes:
• Risk assessment using Braden scale components to predict PU
development:
• Activity scores
• Mobility
• Economic outcomes: 1) mean daily nurse time for
repositioning, 2) nurse time
cost per patient, 3) cost of patient free of PU; and, 4) projected
annual cost
Validity of measures: inter-rater reliability not reported, but
quote: “The skin was then
assessed by the assigned key staff member, the clinical
manager, and the researcher. Agree-
ment between assessors was reached by comparing patients’
skin condition to images of
the EPUAP grading system.”
Time points: weekly follow-up over 4 weeks.
Notes PU risk status on study entry not stated by group.
Imbalances in cluster size.
ICC used in analysis and reported in text, Kish design effect
reported (pp 2639)
Risk of bias
Bias Authors’ judgement Support for judgement
Random sequence generation (selection
bias)
Low risk Quote: “The clusters were the specific study
sites (n=12) and these were randomly al-
located to either the intervention group or
the control group.”
Quote: “The allocation was generated by
a statistician not directly involved with the
study and was determined using comput-
erised randomisation.”
Allocation concealment (selection bias) Low risk Quote: “The
allocation was generated by
a statistician not directly involved with the
study and was determined using comput-
erised randomisation.”
Quote: “ . . . allocation concealment was
achieved through use of distance randomi-
sation, meaning that the statistician, not
the researcher, controlled the randomisa-
27Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Moore 2011 (Continued)
tion sequence.”
Blinding of participants and personnel
(performance bias)
All outcomes
High risk Quote: ’The research design employed was
. . . open label, pragmatic“ (pp 2635)
Comment: Impossible for participants and
nurses to be blinded.
Blinding of outcome assessment (detection
bias)
All outcomes
High risk Quote: “The skin was then assessed by
the assigned key staff member, the clinical
nurse manager and the researcher. Agree-
ment between assessors was achieved by
comparing the participant’s skin condition
to the images on the EPUAP grading sys-
tem.”
Comment: not stated, but most likely im-
possible. In an effort to minimise this form
of bias, several assessors were used, although
inter-rater reliability data were not pre-
sented
Incomplete outcome data (attrition bias)
All outcomes
Low risk Quote: ”Data were analysed using SPPS
version 13 on an intention to treat (ITT)
basis.”
Flow chart (fig 3, pp 2639) showed pa-
tient attrition across the 2 groups, but same
number of patients who were randomised
were also analysed
Selective reporting (reporting bias) Low risk Comment: clinical
outcome, development
of PU was reported. A published protocol
was not available. Measures used reflect
aims of the intervention and outcome
Other bias Unclear risk 1. No table/data to show baseline
comparisons for each group and whether
PU risk was equivalent at study entry.
2. Economic data: The rationale for
changing between outcome measures of
“patient free of ulcer” and “pressure ulcer
avoided” is unclear. In this instance these
outcome measures would appear to be
equivalent since the number of patients
developing an ulcer and the number of
PU developing during the trial was the
same (n=16).
28Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Young 2004
Methods Study design: RCT (groupings for allocation not
reported) with a 24-h follow-up period
Ethics and informed consent: ethics approval and consent
obtained
Sample size calculation: yes
ITT analysis: reported as ITT
Participants Location: medical ward of an acute general hospital
in Wales, UK
Mean age:
Group 1: 70.1 years (± 11.1)
Group 2: 70.5 years (± 14.7)
Baseline data reported in relation to group comparisons for age,
gender, weight, height
and Waterlow scale scores
Inclusion criteria:
1. Elderly patients
2. At risk of developing a pressure ulcer using Waterlow
3. Able to lie in 30° tilt position
4. Given informed consent
5. No existing pressure damage
6. Caucasian
Exclusion criteria: not stated
Interventions Aim(s): to examine the effects of the 30° tilt in
reducing non-blanchable erythema
Group 1 Intervention: n = 23 patients randomised, 18 analysed
Repositioning using 30° tilt (left side, back, right side, back) 2-
3-hourly overnight, 2-3-
hourly during the day
Sacrum and heels free from contact with support surface
Support mattress: alternating pressure mattress or low air loss
mattress
Group 2 Control: n = 23 patients randomised, 21 analysed.
90° lateral and supine positions 2-3-hourly overnight, 2-3-
hourly during the day
Support mattress: low air loss mattress.
Study date(s): April-July 1999
Outcomes Primary outcome: incidence of non-blanchable
erythema during a 24-h period
Quote: “NBE was used as a definition for pressure damage.”
Validity of measures: not reported
Time points: one
Notes
Risk of bias
Bias Authors’ judgement Support for judgement
Random sequence generation (selection
bias)
Unclear risk Quote:“The randomisation was based on
block allocation“
Comment: No mention of how the blocks
were generated (i.e., computer or random
number table) or allocation ratio to each
block. Thus the process for electing the
blocks is unclear
29Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Young 2004 (Continued)
Allocation concealment (selection bias) Unclear risk Quote:
“specific intervention being se-
lected by sequential opening of sealed
opaque envelopes.”
Quote: “The ward staff were then handed
the sequentially numbered envelopes con-
taining randomisation code and the re-
searcher left the clinical area.”
Comment: This trial used blocked ran-
domization with group assignments being
revealed after recruitment, therefore there
is the potential to be able to predict future
assignments
Potential for interference with envelopes,
which are more susceptible to manipula-
tion than are other approaches.
Blinding of participants and personnel
(performance bias)
All outcomes
High risk Comment: not stated. Impossible for nurs-
ing staff to be blinded due the differences
in the intervention and usual care. Difficult
to conceal from participants and nursing
staff once patients were randomised
Blinding of outcome assessment (detection
bias)
All outcomes
Low risk Quote: ”The next morning the researcher
was unaware of which method of reposi-
tioning had been used, therefore masking
the researcher to treatment allocation.”
Comment: researcher blinded totreatment
group
Incomplete outcome data (attrition bias)
All outcomes
High risk Quote: “A total of 7 patients had no post
intervention data collected.”
Quote: “Statistical comparisons were made
on an intention-to-treat basis.”
“No post-intervention assessment of pres-
sure damage was performed on any of these
seven subjects.”
Comment: use of ITT stated, however,
participants were excluded from the analy-
sis if they discontinued the intervention or
were nursed on a foam mattress (pp 92)
Selective reporting (reporting bias) Low risk Comment: clinical
outcome, development
of PU was reported. A published protocol
was not available. Measures used reflect
aims of the intervention and outcome
Other bias Low risk Comments: None identified.
30Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Abbreviations
COI = conflict of interest
fig = figure
h = hour(s)
ICC = intra-cluster correlation coefficient
ITT = intention to treat analysis
NBE = non-blanchable erythema
pp = page(s)
PU = pressure ulcer
Characteristics of excluded studies [ordered by study ID]
Study Reason for exclusion
Vanderwee 2007 Inclusion/Exclusion criteria: patients who had
a pre-existing grade 1 PU (i.e. non-blanchable erythema) were
included, and those who did not have non-blanchable erythema
(n = 1944) were excluded (fig 1, pp 63)
Abbreviations
fig = figure
PU = pressure ulcer
Characteristics of ongoing studies [ordered by study ID]
Bergstrom
Trial name or title TURN Study
Methods Cluster RCT
Participants 66 nursing short stay (< 7 days) and long stay (> 90
days) aged care residents 65 years and over
Interventions In-bed repositioning every 2 h compared to 3 h or
4 h and associated continence care
Outcomes Incidence of PU
Starting date Started in 2008 and completed in June 2011
Contact information Nancy Bergstrom
Theodore J and Mary E Trumble Professor of Aging Research
Associate Dean for Research (Interim)
School of Nursing
University of Texas Health Science Center-Houston
6901 Bertner Ave, 6.625
Houston 77030
Email: [email protected]
31Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Bergstrom (Continued)
Notes Correspondence with N Bergstrom. Study has been
submitted for publication and is under review at the time
of writing this review
32Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
D A T A A N D A N A L Y S E S
Comparison 1. 2h versus 3h repositioning on standard hospital
mattresses
Outcome or subgroup title
No. of
studies
No. of
participants Statistical method Effect size
1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to
4)
1 121 Risk Ratio (M-H, Fixed, 95% CI) 0.90 [0.69, 1.16]
2 Pressure ulcer risk (category 2 to
4)
1 121 Risk Ratio (M-H, Fixed, 95% CI) 0.59 [0.28, 1.26]
Comparison 2. 4h versus 6h repositioning on viscoelastic foam
mattresses
Outcome or subgroup title
No. of
studies
No. of
participants Statistical method Effect size
1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to
4)
1 129 Risk Ratio (M-H, Fixed, 95% CI) 0.73 [0.53, 1.02]
2 Pressure ulcer risk (category 2 to
4)
1 129 Risk Ratio (M-H, Fixed, 95% CI) 0.19 [0.04, 0.84]
Comparison 3. 30o tilt 3-hourly overnight versus 90o tilt
overnight
Outcome or subgroup title
No. of
studies
No. of
participants Statistical method Effect size
1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to
4)
2 252 Risk Ratio (M-H, Random, 95% CI) 0.62 [0.10, 3.97]
33Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Analysis 1.1. Comparison 1 2h versus 3h repositioning on
standard hospital mattresses, Outcome 1
Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to 4).
Review: Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
Comparison: 1 2h versus 3h repositioning on standard hospital
mattresses
Outcome: 1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to 4)
Study or subgroup 2h repositioning 3h repositioning Risk Ratio
Weight Risk Ratio
n/N n/N M-H,Fixed,95% CI M-H,Fixed,95% CI
Defloor 2005 39/63 40/58 100.0 % 0.90 [ 0.69, 1.16 ]
Total (95% CI) 63 58 100.0 % 0.90 [ 0.69, 1.16 ]
Total events: 39 (2h repositioning), 40 (3h repositioning)
Heterogeneity: not applicable
Test for overall effect: Z = 0.82 (P = 0.41)
Test for subgroup differences: Not applicable
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
Favours 2h repositioning Favours 3h repositioning
Analysis 1.2. Comparison 1 2h versus 3h repositioning on
standard hospital mattresses, Outcome 2
Pressure ulcer risk (category 2 to 4).
Review: Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
Comparison: 1 2h versus 3h repositioning on standard hospital
mattresses
Outcome: 2 Pressure ulcer risk (category 2 to 4)
Study or subgroup 2h repositioning 3h repositioning Risk Ratio
Weight Risk Ratio
n/N n/N M-H,Fixed,95% CI M-H,Fixed,95% CI
Defloor 2005 9/63 14/58 100.0 % 0.59 [ 0.28, 1.26 ]
Total (95% CI) 63 58 100.0 % 0.59 [ 0.28, 1.26 ]
Total events: 9 (2h repositioning), 14 (3h repositioning)
Heterogeneity: not applicable
Test for overall effect: Z = 1.36 (P = 0.17)
Test for subgroup differences: Not applicable
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
Favours 2h Favours 3h
34Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Analysis 2.1. Comparison 2 4h versus 6h repositioning on
viscoelastic foam mattresses, Outcome 1
Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to 4).
Review: Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
Comparison: 2 4h versus 6h repositioning on viscoelastic foam
mattresses
Outcome: 1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to 4)
Study or subgroup 4h repositioning 6h repositioning Risk Ratio
Weight Risk Ratio
n/N n/N M-H,Fixed,95% CI M-H,Fixed,95% CI
Defloor 2005 30/66 39/63 100.0 % 0.73 [ 0.53, 1.02 ]
Total (95% CI) 66 63 100.0 % 0.73 [ 0.53, 1.02 ]
Total events: 30 (4h repositioning), 39 (6h repositioning)
Heterogeneity: not applicable
Test for overall effect: Z = 1.85 (P = 0.065)
Test for subgroup differences: Not applicable
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
Favours 4h repositioning Favours 6h repositioning
Analysis 2.2. Comparison 2 4h versus 6h repositioning on
viscoelastic foam mattresses, Outcome 2
Pressure ulcer risk (category 2 to 4).
Review: Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
Comparison: 2 4h versus 6h repositioning on viscoelastic foam
mattresses
Outcome: 2 Pressure ulcer risk (category 2 to 4)
Study or subgroup 4h repositioning 6h repositioning Risk Ratio
Weight Risk Ratio
n/N n/N M-H,Fixed,95% CI M-H,Fixed,95% CI
Defloor 2005 2/66 10/63 100.0 % 0.19 [ 0.04, 0.84 ]
Total (95% CI) 66 63 100.0 % 0.19 [ 0.04, 0.84 ]
Total events: 2 (4h repositioning), 10 (6h repositioning)
Heterogeneity: not applicable
Test for overall effect: Z = 2.20 (P = 0.028)
Test for subgroup differences: Not applicable
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
Favours 4h Favours 6h
35Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Analysis 3.1. Comparison 3 30o tilt 3-hourly overnight versus
90o tilt overnight, Outcome 1 Pressure ulcer
risk (category 1 to 4).
Review: Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
Comparison: 3 30
o
tilt 3-hourly overnight versus 90
o
tilt overnight
Outcome: 1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to 4)
Study or subgroup
30
o
tilt
3-hourly
overnight 90
o
tilt overnight Risk Ratio Weight Risk Ratio
n/N n/N
M-
H,Random,95%
CI
M-
H,Random,95%
CI
Moore 2011 3/99 13/114 54.7 % 0.27 [ 0.08, 0.91 ]
Young 2004 3/18 2/21 45.3 % 1.75 [ 0.33, 9.34 ]
Total (95% CI) 117 135 100.0 % 0.62 [ 0.10, 3.97 ]
Total events: 6 (30
o
tilt 3-hourly overnight), 15 (90
o
tilt overnight)
Heterogeneity: Tau2 = 1.24; Chi2 = 3.21, df = 1 (P = 0.07); I2
=69%
Test for overall effect: Z = 0.50 (P = 0.62)
Test for subgroup differences: Not applicable
0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000
Favours 30 tilt Favours 90 tilt
A P P E N D I C E S
Appendix 1. Ovid MEDLINE, Ovid EMBASE and EBSCO
CINAHL effectiveness search strategies
Ovid MEDLINE
1 exp Pressure Ulcer/ (5231)
2 (pressure adj (ulcer* or sore*)).tw. (4365)
3 (decubitus adj (ulcer* or sore*)).tw. (579)
4 (bedsore* or (bed adj sore*)).tw. (245)
5 or/1-4 (6546)
6 exp Posture/ (27564)
7 (reposition* or re-position*).tw. (6619)
8 position*.tw. (235791)
9 (turn* adj5 patient*).tw. (3591)
10 (turn* adj5 interval*).tw. (126)
11 (turn* adj5 frequen*).tw. (777)
12 turning.tw. (7625)
13 (body adj5 posture*).tw. (1092)
14 pressure relie*.tw. (417)
15 (mobilis* or mobiliz*).tw. (34978)
16 or/6-15 (301537)
36Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
17 5 and 16 (834)
18 randomized controlled trial.pt. (240548)
19 controlled clinical trial.pt. (39492)
20 randomized.ab. (195665)
21 placebo.ab. (91366)
22 clinical trials as topic.sh. (79465)
23 randomly.ab. (134439)
24 trial.ti. (72586)
25 or/18-24 (543387)
26 (animals not (humans and animals)).sh. (1612439)
27 25 not 26 (494803)
28 17 and 27 (107)
Ovid EMBASE
1 exp Decubitus/ (9094)
2 (pressure adj (ulcer$ or sore$)).tw. (5623)
3 (decubitus adj (ulcer$ or sore$)).tw. (773)
4 (bedsore$ or (bed adj sore$)).tw. (415)
5 or/1-4 (10271)
6 exp patient positioning/ (10577)
7 (reposition$ or re-position$).tw. (9126)
8 position$.tw. (316430)
9 (turn$ adj5 patient$).tw. (5673)
10 (turn$ adj5 interval$).tw. (168)
11 (turn$ adj5 frequen$).tw. (1215)
12 turning.tw. (10505)
13 (body adj5 posture$).tw. (1519)
14 or/6-13 (344598)
15 5 and 14 (1057)
16 Randomized controlled trials/ (24734)
17 Single-Blind Method/ (15386)
18 Double-Blind Method/ (85329)
19 Crossover Procedure/ (31526)
20 (random$ or factorial$ or crossover$ or cross over$ or cross-
over$ or placebo$ or assign$ or allocat$ or volunteer$).ti,ab.
(930632)
21 (doubl$ adj blind$).ti,ab. (89452)
22 (singl$ adj blind$).ti,ab. (9568)
23 or/16-22 (964333)
24 animal/ (717007)
25 human/ (8542238)
26 24 not 25 (478486)
27 23 not 26 (932575)
28 15 and 27 (175)
EBSCO CINAHL
S16 S5 and S15
S15 S6 or S7 or S8 or S9 or S10 or S11 or S12 or S13 or S14
S14 TI body N5 posture* or AB body N5 posture*
S13 TI turning or AB turning
S12 TI turn* N5 frequen* or AB turn* N5 frequen*
S11 TI turn* N5 interval* or AB turn* N5 interval*
S10 TI turn* N5 patient* or AB turn* N5 patient*
S9 TI position* or AB position*
S8 TI ( reposition* or re-position* ) or AB ( reposition* or re-
position* )
S7 (MH “Patient Positioning+”)
S6 (MH “Posture+”)
37Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
S5 S1 or S2 or S3 or S4
S4 TI ( bedsore or bed sore ) or AB ( bedsore or bed sore )
S3 TI ( pressure ulcer* or pressure sore* ) or AB ( pressure
ulcer* or pressure sore* )
S2 TI decubitus or AB decubitus
S1 (MH “Pressure Ulcer”)
Appendix 2. Ovid MEDLINE economics search strategy
1 exp Pressure Ulcer/
2 (pressure adj (ulcer* or sore*)).tw.
3 (decubitus adj (ulcer* or sore*)).tw.
4 (bedsore* or (bed adj sore*)).tw.
5 or/1-4
6 exp Posture/
7 (reposition* or re-position*).tw.
8 position*.tw.
9 (turn* adj5 patient*).tw.
10 (turn* adj5 interval*).tw.
11 (turn* adj5 frequen*).tw.
12 turning.tw.
13 (body adj5 posture*).tw.
14 pressure relie*.tw.
15 (mobilis* or mobiliz*).tw.
16 or/6-15
17 5 and 16
18 economics/
19 exp “costs and cost analysis”/
20 economics, dental/
21 exp “economics, hospital”/
22 economics, medical/
23 economics, nursing/
24 economics, pharmaceutical/
25 (economic* or cost or costs or costly or costing or price or
prices or pricing or pharmacoeconomic*).ti,ab.
26 (expenditure* not energy).ti,ab.
27 value for money.ti,ab.
28 budget*.ti,ab.
29 or/18-28
30 ((energy or oxygen) adj cost).ti,ab.
31 (metabolic adj cost).ti,ab.
32 ((energy or oxygen) adj expenditure).ti,ab.
33 or/30-32
34 29 not 33
35 letter.pt.
36 editorial.pt.
37 historical article.pt.
38 or/35-37
39 34 not 38
40 Animals/
41 Humans/
42 40 not (40 and 41)
43 39 not 42
44 17 and 43
38Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Appendix 3. Risk of bias criteria
1. Was the allocation sequence adequately generated?
Low risk of bias
The investigators describe a random component in the sequence
generation process such as: referring to a random number table;
using
a computer random number generator; coin tossing; shuffling
cards or envelopes; throwing dice; drawing of lots.
High risk of bias
The investigators describe a non-random component in the
sequence generation process. Usually, the description would
involve some
systematic, non-random approach, for example: sequence
generated by odd or even date of birth; sequence generated by
some rule
based on date (or day) of admission; sequence generated by
some rule based on hospital or clinic record number.
Unclear
Insufficient information about the sequence generation process
to permit judgment of low or high risk of bias.
2. Was the treatment allocation adequately concealed?
Low risk of bias
Participants and investigators enrolling participants could not
foresee assignment because one of the following, or an
equivalent
method, was used to conceal allocation: central allocation
(including telephone, web-based and pharmacy-controlled
randomisation);
sequentially-numbered drug containers of identical appearance;
sequentially-numbered, opaque, sealed envelopes.
High risk of bias
Participants or investigators enrolling participants could
possibly foresee assignments and thus introduce selection bias,
such as allocation
based on: using an open random allocation schedule (e.g. a list
of random numbers); assignment envelopes were used without
appropriate
safeguards (e.g. if envelopes were unsealed or non-opaque or
not sequentially numbered); alternation or rotation; date of
birth; case
record number; any other explicitly unconcealed procedure.
Unclear
Insufficient information to permit judgment of low or high risk
of bias. This is usually the case if the method of concealment is
not
described or not described in sufficient detail to allow a definite
judgment, for example if the use of assignment envelopes is
described,
but it remains unclear whether envelopes were sequentially
numbered, opaque and sealed.
3. Blinding - was knowledge of the allocated interventions
adequately prevented during the study?
Low risk of bias
Any one of the following.
• No blinding, but the review authors judge that the outcome
and the outcome measurement were not likely to be influenced
by
lack of blinding.
• Blinding of participants and key study personnel ensured, and
unlikely that the blinding could have been broken.
• Either participants or some key study personnel were not
blinded, but outcome assessment was blinded and the non-
blinding of
others unlikely to introduce bias.
39Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
High risk of bias
Any one of the following.
• No blinding or incomplete blinding, and the outcome or
outcome measurement is likely to be influenced by lack of
blinding.
• Blinding of key study participants and personnel attempted,
but likely that the blinding could have been broken.
• Either participants or some key study personnel were not
blinded, and the non-blinding of others likely to introduce bias.
Unclear
Either of the following.
• Insufficient information to permit judgement of low or high
risk of bias.
• The study did not address this outcome.
4. Were incomplete outcome data adequately addressed?
Low risk of bias
Any one of the following.
• No missing outcome data.
• Reasons for missing outcome data unlikely to be related to
true outcome (for survival data, censoring unlikely to be
introducing
bias).
• Missing outcome data balanced in numbers across intervention
groups, with similar reasons for missing data across groups.
• For dichotomous outcome data, the proportion of missing
outcomes compared with observed event risk not enough to have
a
clinically relevant impact on the intervention effect estimate.
• For continuous outcome data, plausible effect size (difference
in means or standardised difference in means) among missing
outcomes not enough to have a clinically relevant impact on
observed effect size.
• Missing data have been imputed using appropriate methods.
High risk of bias
Any one of the following.
• Reason for missing outcome data likely to be related to true
outcome, with either imbalance in numbers or reasons for
missing
data across intervention groups.
• For dichotomous outcome data, the proportion of missing
outcomes compared with observed event risk enough to induce
clinically relevant bias in intervention effect estimate.
• For continuous outcome data, plausible effect size (difference
in means or standardised difference in means) among missing
outcomes enough to induce clinically relevant bias in observed
effect size.
• ‘As-treated’ analysis done with substantial departure of the
intervention received from that assigned at randomisation.
• Potentially inappropriate application of simple imputation.
Unclear
Either of the following.
• Insufficient reporting of attrition/exclusions to permit
judgement of low or high risk of bias (e.g. number randomised
not stated,
no reasons for missing data provided).
• The study did not address this outcome.
5. Are reports of the study free of suggestion of selective
outcome reporting?
Low risk of bias
Either of the following.
40Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
• The study protocol is available and all of the study’s pre-
specified (primary and secondary) outcomes that are of interest
in the
review have been reported in the pre-specified way.
• The study protocol is not available, but it is clear that the
published reports include all expected outcomes, including
those that
were pre-specified (convincing text of this nature may be
uncommon).
High risk of bias
Any one of the following.
• Not all of the study’s pre-specified primary outcomes have
been reported.
• One or more primary outcomes are reported using
measurements, analysis methods or subsets of the data (e.g.
subscales) that
were not pre-specified.
• One or more reported primary outcomes were not pre-specified
(unless clear justification for their reporting is provided, such
as
an unexpected adverse effect).
• One or more outcomes of interest in the review are reported
incompletely so that they cannot be entered in a meta-analysis.
• The study report fails to include results for a key outcome that
would be expected to have been reported for such a study.
Unclear
Insufficient information to permit judgment of low or high risk
of bias. It is likely that the majority of studies will fall into this
category.
6. Other sources of potential bias
Low risk of bias
The study appears to be free of other sources of bias.
High risk of bias
There is at least one important risk of bias. For example, the
study:
• had a potential source of bias related to the specific study
design used; or
• has been claimed to have been fraudulent; or
• had some other problem.
Unclear
There may be a risk of bias, but there is either:
• insufficient information to assess whether an important risk of
bias exists; or
• insufficient rationale or evidence that an identified problem
will introduce bias.
W H A T ’ S N E W
Last assessed as up-to-date: 6 September 2013.
41Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Date Event Description
24 February 2015 Amended Contact details updated.
C O N T R I B U T I O N S O F A U T H O R S
Wendy Chaboyer: conceived and designed the review, checked
the quality of data extraction, analysed or interpreted data,
performed
part of data analysis or interpretation, performed part of the
writing or editing, made an intellectual contribution to, secured
funding
for and approved the final version of the review prior to
submission.
Brigid Gillespie: conceived, designed and co-ordinated the
review. Extracted data, undertook quality assessment, analysed
or interpreted
data, performed part of data analysis or interpretation,
performed statistical analysis and completed the first draft of
the review. Performed
part of writing or editing, made an intellectual contribution to
and approved final review prior to submission. Wrote to study
authors,
experts, and companies and acted as guarantor of the review.
Elizabeth McInnes: designed the review, extracted data,
undertook quality assessment, analysed or interpreted data,
performed part
of data analysis or interpretation, performed part of writing or
editing and made an intellectual contribution to the review.
Wrote to
study authors, experts, and companies, performed previous work
that was the foundation of the current review and approved the
final
review prior to submission.
Bridie Kent: analysed or interpreted data, performed part of
data analysis or interpretation, performed part of writing or
editing, made
an intellectual contribution and approved the final review prior
to submission.
Jenny Whitty: analysed or interpreted data, performed part of
data analysis or interpretation, performed part of writing or
editing,
made an intellectual contribution, performed economic analysis
and approved the final review prior to submission.
Lukman Thalib: analysed or interpreted data, performed part of
data analysis or interpretation, performed part of writing or
editing,
made an intellectual contribution and approved the final review
prior to submission.
Contributions of editorial base
Nicky Cullum: advised on methodology, interpretation and
protocol content, edited and re-wrote sections of the final
review including
re-entering and analysing data, approved the final review prior
to publication.
Sally Bell-Syer: co-ordinated the editorial process, advised on
methodology, interpretation and content, edited the protocol.
Jo Dumville: checked the re-analysis of the data and checked
the final version for publication after NC.
Ruth Foxlee: designed the search strategy and edited the search
methods section.
D E C L A R A T I O N S O F I N T E R E S T
Dr Brigid Gillespie; Dr Wendy Chaboyer; Dr Elizabeth
McInnes; Dr Bridie Kent; Dr Jennifer Whitty and Dr Lukman
Thalib have
no conflicts of interest to declare.
42Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
S O U R C E S O F S U P P O R T
Internal sources
• NHMRC, Australia.
The NHMRC provided funding for this review from its Centre
of Research Excellence Scheme, which funds one or more of the
authors
• Jennifer Whitty received a Research Fellowship funded by the
Queensland Government Department of Employment, Economic
Development and Innovation, Queensland Health and Griffith
University, Australia.
External sources
• The National Institute from Health Research (NIHR) is the
sole funder of the Cochrane Wounds Group, UK.
D I F F E R E N C E S B E T W E E N P R O T O C O L A N D
R E V I E W
We had originally planned to undertake subgroup analyses
based on type of setting (long-term and acute care) and the type
of patient.
Although one study was conducted in an acute care setting, the
others were set in long-term care facilities, and all with
geriatric patients.
We have instead, undertaken a subgroup analysis with regard to
tilt regimes (i.e. 30o versus 90o tilt) in relation to participants
who
developed a grade 1 pressure ulcer.
I N D E X T E R M S
Medical Subject Headings (MeSH)
Beds; Cost-Benefit Analysis; Patient Positioning [economics;
∗ methods]; Pressure Ulcer [∗ prevention & control];
Randomized Con-
trolled Trials as Topic; Time Factors
MeSH check words
Adult; Aged; Humans; Middle Aged
43Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
(Review)
Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Gwynedd Mercy University
Frances M. Maguire School of Nursing and Health Professions
NUR 231 Evidence-Based Practice in Nursing
Evidence-Based Practice Paper Guidelines
EBP requires nurses to continuously cultivate a spirit of
inquiry. Nurses must identify and appraise the most relevant
and best evidence to integrate the evidence into clinical
practice. Students will identify and discuss suggested best
practice related to an identified clinical issue/problem.
1. Students may work individually or with a partner on this
assignment (limit to one partner). One paper submitted per
partnership.
2. Using the PICOT question developed in class, perform a
search for research studies from professional, scholarly journals
(nursing journals preferred) and/or best-practice guidelines
from professional organizations.
3. Select at least four studies or guidelines that discuss
evidence-based practice related to the specific PICOT question,
published within the past 10 years. Do not use an article that is
a literature review, synthesis or meta-analysis (consult with
Professor Lynn or the research librarian if you have questions
or need assistance).
4. Complete the Literature Review Template for the selected
sources. This information will form the basis of the written
assignment.
Paper:
5. Introduce the nursing problem. Provide a clear and concise
description of the clinical practice issue/problem. Discuss the
reason this topic is important to nursing practice (significance).
6. Translate the clinical nursing practice issue/problem into an
investigational question. Identify each component of the PICOT
question. The question must include all PICOT components.
7. Provide a discussion of each article, including the clinical
problem and relevant background for the focus of the
study/guideline.
a. If the source discusses a research study, include the research
question (purpose), type of study (quantitative or qualitative)
and results/conclusions (suggested strategies).
b. If the source discusses an evidence-based practice guideline,
summarize the guideline (suggested strategies).
8. Describe potential barriers to implementing the
research/guideline suggestions.
9. Identify potential strategies to address the barriers.
10. This paper must be written following APA guidelines,
Times New Roman 12 double spaced. Include a reference list.
Proper grammar, spelling and professional word choice is
mandatory.
11. The body of the paper is not to exceed 6 pages.
12. Papers will be submitted through SafeAssign in Blackboard.
13. Refer to the Grading Criteria Rubric posted in Blackboard
and the Course Polices in the syllabus.
Evidence-Based Practice Paper Format
· Title Page
· Abstract: Brief summary of the key points of the paper. No
need for keywords.
· Introduction: Provide a clear and concise description of the
clinical practice issue/problem and background. Discuss the
reason this topic is important to nursing practice (significance)
and include a minimum of one reference for your reasoning.
Identify the PICOT question at the end of the Introduction, ,
including all PI(C)O(T) components.
· Review of Literature: Address the required content for each
study/guideline. Try to make use of transitional sentences
between the discussion of each resource.
· Summary of suggested best practices as identified by authors.
· Barriers: Identify potential barriers to implementation of the
best-practice recommendations in the articles.
· Strategies: Identify potential strategies to address the barriers.
· Conclusion
· References
APA format: Make use of the library resources! See APA Style
Guide and sample paper on the library’s webpage.
Headings are optional, but if you decide to use them, be certain
to consult the APA Style Guide.
No first person, no pronouns.
Citations for a direct quote must have page number.
Example: “Donuts make people happy” (Lynn, 2017, p. 3).
Tone of writing: Do not refer to authors by first names, and do
not identify the title of the article. That is what the reference
page is for.
Example: Lynn (2017) examined the relationship between
eating donuts and being happy.

More Related Content

PDF
GeroFinalPoster
PDF
GeroFinalPoster
PDF
Effective, sustainable, and transferable physical exercise interventions for ...
PDF
Falls Prevention Intervention Factsheets
PPTX
Prevention of falls in the elderly- preventive exercise
PPT
Fall Poster
PPT
Fall Poster
DOCX
Development and ImplementationThe development process begins wit.docx
GeroFinalPoster
GeroFinalPoster
Effective, sustainable, and transferable physical exercise interventions for ...
Falls Prevention Intervention Factsheets
Prevention of falls in the elderly- preventive exercise
Fall Poster
Fall Poster
Development and ImplementationThe development process begins wit.docx

Similar to Running head EXERCISE PROGRAMS TO PREVENT FALLS .docx (20)

PPTX
2018: Falls evidence based prevention gwep
PPTX
Capstone EBP fall prevention programming
PDF
Cuidador de idoso_40
PPT
Implementing programmes to encourage active healthy lifestyles in older peopl...
PDF
Multi factorial Fall Prevention
DOCX
Literature Evaluation TableStudent Name Vanessa NoaChange.docx
PPTX
Falls in Elderly People.pptx
PDF
Physical-exercise-and-fall-prevention--A-systematic-review-and-metanalysis.pdf
PPT
Fall prevention in elderly population
DOCX
· Hospital Readmissions Reduction Program. (2015) Colleen McIlvenn.docx
PDF
Falls_Prevention_Guide_2013
PPTX
Fall prevention for the Elderly Population | VITAS Healthcare
PPT
Falls+Pp+Final[1]
PPTX
Yoga for preventing fall among elderly people
PPTX
fall prevention (Motivational physical activity program (MPAP) for fall preve...
PDF
Person Centred Care approach to Fall Prevention in Nursing Homes.
PPTX
falls in elderly main .pptx
PPTX
Falls Fractures and Frailty
PPTX
Fall powerpoint
PPT
Role of physiotherapy in fall prevention in geriatric
2018: Falls evidence based prevention gwep
Capstone EBP fall prevention programming
Cuidador de idoso_40
Implementing programmes to encourage active healthy lifestyles in older peopl...
Multi factorial Fall Prevention
Literature Evaluation TableStudent Name Vanessa NoaChange.docx
Falls in Elderly People.pptx
Physical-exercise-and-fall-prevention--A-systematic-review-and-metanalysis.pdf
Fall prevention in elderly population
· Hospital Readmissions Reduction Program. (2015) Colleen McIlvenn.docx
Falls_Prevention_Guide_2013
Fall prevention for the Elderly Population | VITAS Healthcare
Falls+Pp+Final[1]
Yoga for preventing fall among elderly people
fall prevention (Motivational physical activity program (MPAP) for fall preve...
Person Centred Care approach to Fall Prevention in Nursing Homes.
falls in elderly main .pptx
Falls Fractures and Frailty
Fall powerpoint
Role of physiotherapy in fall prevention in geriatric

More from cowinhelen (20)

DOCX
Case Study 1 Applying Theory to PracticeSocial scientists hav.docx
DOCX
Case Study - Option 3 BarbaraBarbara is a 22 year old woman who h.docx
DOCX
Case Study - Cyberterrorism—A New RealityWhen hackers claiming .docx
DOCX
Case Study - APA paper with min 4 page content Review the Blai.docx
DOCX
Case Study - Global Mobile Corporation Damn it, .docx
DOCX
Case Study #3Apple Suppliers & Labor PracticesWith its h.docx
DOCX
CASE STUDY (Individual) Scotland  In terms of its physical l.docx
DOCX
Case Study #2 T.D. enjoys caring for the children and young peop.docx
DOCX
CASE STUDY #2 Chief Complaint I have pain in my belly”.docx
DOCX
Case Study #1Jennifer is a 29-year-old administrative assistan.docx
DOCX
Case Study # 2 –Danny’s Unhappy DutyEmployee ProfilesCaro.docx
DOCX
Case Study – Multicultural ParadeRead the Case below, and answe.docx
DOCX
Case Study   THE INVISIBLE SPONSOR1BackgroundSome execut.docx
DOCX
CASE STUDY Experiential training encourages changes in work beha.docx
DOCX
Case Study Hereditary AngioedemaAll responses must be in your .docx
DOCX
case studieson Gentrification and Displacement in the Sa.docx
DOCX
Case Studt on KFC Introduction1) Identify the type of .docx
DOCX
Case Study Crocs Revolutionizing an Industry’s Supply Chain .docx
DOCX
Case Studies Student must complete 5 case studies as instructed.docx
DOCX
Case Studies in Telehealth AdoptionThe mission of The Comm.docx
Case Study 1 Applying Theory to PracticeSocial scientists hav.docx
Case Study - Option 3 BarbaraBarbara is a 22 year old woman who h.docx
Case Study - Cyberterrorism—A New RealityWhen hackers claiming .docx
Case Study - APA paper with min 4 page content Review the Blai.docx
Case Study - Global Mobile Corporation Damn it, .docx
Case Study #3Apple Suppliers & Labor PracticesWith its h.docx
CASE STUDY (Individual) Scotland  In terms of its physical l.docx
Case Study #2 T.D. enjoys caring for the children and young peop.docx
CASE STUDY #2 Chief Complaint I have pain in my belly”.docx
Case Study #1Jennifer is a 29-year-old administrative assistan.docx
Case Study # 2 –Danny’s Unhappy DutyEmployee ProfilesCaro.docx
Case Study – Multicultural ParadeRead the Case below, and answe.docx
Case Study   THE INVISIBLE SPONSOR1BackgroundSome execut.docx
CASE STUDY Experiential training encourages changes in work beha.docx
Case Study Hereditary AngioedemaAll responses must be in your .docx
case studieson Gentrification and Displacement in the Sa.docx
Case Studt on KFC Introduction1) Identify the type of .docx
Case Study Crocs Revolutionizing an Industry’s Supply Chain .docx
Case Studies Student must complete 5 case studies as instructed.docx
Case Studies in Telehealth AdoptionThe mission of The Comm.docx

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
Lesson notes of climatology university.
PDF
Anesthesia in Laparoscopic Surgery in India
PPTX
Microbial diseases, their pathogenesis and prophylaxis
PPTX
1st Inaugural Professorial Lecture held on 19th February 2020 (Governance and...
PDF
Trump Administration's workforce development strategy
PDF
O5-L3 Freight Transport Ops (International) V1.pdf
PDF
O7-L3 Supply Chain Operations - ICLT Program
PDF
Complications of Minimal Access Surgery at WLH
PDF
Weekly quiz Compilation Jan -July 25.pdf
PPTX
Final Presentation General Medicine 03-08-2024.pptx
PDF
Abdominal Access Techniques with Prof. Dr. R K Mishra
PDF
Classroom Observation Tools for Teachers
PPTX
Cell Types and Its function , kingdom of life
PDF
Chinmaya Tiranga quiz Grand Finale.pdf
PDF
RTP_AR_KS1_Tutor's Guide_English [FOR REPRODUCTION].pdf
PDF
FourierSeries-QuestionsWithAnswers(Part-A).pdf
PPTX
Introduction-to-Literarature-and-Literary-Studies-week-Prelim-coverage.pptx
PDF
RMMM.pdf make it easy to upload and study
PDF
3rd Neelam Sanjeevareddy Memorial Lecture.pdf
PDF
Module 4: Burden of Disease Tutorial Slides S2 2025
Lesson notes of climatology university.
Anesthesia in Laparoscopic Surgery in India
Microbial diseases, their pathogenesis and prophylaxis
1st Inaugural Professorial Lecture held on 19th February 2020 (Governance and...
Trump Administration's workforce development strategy
O5-L3 Freight Transport Ops (International) V1.pdf
O7-L3 Supply Chain Operations - ICLT Program
Complications of Minimal Access Surgery at WLH
Weekly quiz Compilation Jan -July 25.pdf
Final Presentation General Medicine 03-08-2024.pptx
Abdominal Access Techniques with Prof. Dr. R K Mishra
Classroom Observation Tools for Teachers
Cell Types and Its function , kingdom of life
Chinmaya Tiranga quiz Grand Finale.pdf
RTP_AR_KS1_Tutor's Guide_English [FOR REPRODUCTION].pdf
FourierSeries-QuestionsWithAnswers(Part-A).pdf
Introduction-to-Literarature-and-Literary-Studies-week-Prelim-coverage.pptx
RMMM.pdf make it easy to upload and study
3rd Neelam Sanjeevareddy Memorial Lecture.pdf
Module 4: Burden of Disease Tutorial Slides S2 2025

Running head EXERCISE PROGRAMS TO PREVENT FALLS .docx

  • 1. Running head: EXERCISE PROGRAMS TO PREVENT FALLS 1 EXERCISE PROGRAMS TO PREVENT FALLS 5 Exercise Programs to Prevent Fall Related Injuries in Older Adults Student Student Gwynedd Mercy University Abstract The implementation of exercise programs was evaluated to
  • 2. identify best-practice in fall-related injury prevention. This paper incorporates information from four different studies to identify the evidence that suggests best-practice protocol. Evidence of these studies suggests that implementing exercise programs helps to prevent fall-related injuries in long-term care facilities for older adults. Incorporating exercise programs increases patient safety, prevents further injury, and promotes communication between patients and staff. By implementing these programs, patients’ overall health improves and they’re more satisfied by their ability to perform activities of daily living on a more independent level. Exercise Programs to Prevent Fall Related Injuries in Older Adults As individuals age through life, the risk for falls increase immensely. This is due to the lack of strength as well as a lack of balance in the human body. It is important for nurses to take l precautions to help stop patient falls because in many instances, falls are preventable (Ambutas, Lamb, & Quigley, 2017). Fall prevention includes important interventions that stop subsequent injuries from happening to patients. Everyday, nurses take precautions to prevent falls but additional actions
  • 3. could be taken in order to make these interventions more effective. Every patient is at risk of falling, especially older adults because they lose muscle mass and balance as they age (Taylor, Lillis, & Lynn, 2015, p. 142). After performing fall- risk assessments on each patient, nurses implement suggested best practice protocols for low-risk, moderate-risk, and high- risk patients. Best practice includes educating patients and families on fall risk, using bed or chair alarms, lowering the beds, encouraging regular toileting and other precautions (Taylor, et al., p. 145). Exercise programs act as another important measure that nurses could implement, in order to help patients improve their balance, strength and mobility while performing activities of daily living, and reduce risk for falls (Ambutas, Lamb & Quigley). The following clinical question will be used to identify best practice related to exercise programs in order to prevent falls in older adults: P: Older adults living in long-term care facilities I: Exercise programs C: (none) O: Prevent fall-related injuries T: (None) In long-term care facilities for older adults, how do exercise programs help prevent fall-related injuries? Review of Literature Dal Bello-Haas, Thorpe, Lix, Scudds, and Hadjistavropoulos (2012) completed a quantitative research study that focused on the implementation of a walking program in long-term care facilities, in order to prevent falls. Risk for falling increases with advancing age. The research question that these authors asked was a to assess the effectiveness of an individualized, progressive, walking program compared to usual care in individuals residing in long-term care facilities. The study participants were over the age of 60, resided in a long-term care facility, and participated in several different walking programs. The results of this study suggested increased activity and
  • 4. participation in exercise contribute to prevention of falls in the long-term. The researchers stated nurses and health care providers working in long-term care environments should implement exercise programs for residents to prevent falls. Kato, Izumi, Hiramatsu, and Shogenji (2006) also investigated the use of exercise to prevent falls in the older adult population, who are at increased risk for falls. The participants in this quantitative study completed stretching, muscle strengthening, and toe exercises three times per week. Results of this study showed older adults who participated in the exercise program experienced less falls. The researchers suggested exercise programs were effective in reducing falls in residents of long- term care facilities and should be considered for use with this patient population. In addition to focusing on strength and balance, a quantitative study by Gschwind, Kressig, Lacroix, Muehlbauer, Pfenninger, and Granacher (2013) also investigated the effects of exercise on improvement of psychosocial well-being. Preventing falls in the older adult may require interventions to address more than one focus area. The researchers designed a rehabilitation program for older adults living at home in which patients worked to improve everyday balance, strength, and psychosocial well-being. The objective for this program is to prevent the risk of falls in the older adult population. Older adults in the study were taught balance and strength training exercises. Participants were contacted by phone to encourage use of the exercises. The results of this experiment showed improvement in strength, balance, and an increase in daily living activities. The researchers state that patient education is important for older adults living in community settings to incorporate exercise into daily activities. Sherrington, Tiedemann, Fairhall, Close, and Lord (2011) also investigated the use of exercise to prevent the risk of falls. In addition to focusing on older adults, the researchers included participants from other age groups in this quantitative study. Study participants completed balance exercises and participated
  • 5. in progressive walking activities. The results suggested exercise can help lower the risk of falls in the older adult. In addition, the researchers stated fall prevention exercise training should not be confined to just the aging adult, but also offered and implemented in the general population. In doing so, everyone can increase their balance ability, which ultimately decreases the risk of falls. The type of training should vary with each individual. If the patient is healthy, the balance exercise along with strength training and brisk walking is appropriate. On the other hand, if the patient is at high risk for falls, balance exercises should be the area of focus. Summary Results from the reviewed studies suggest that the implementation of exercise programs is effective in preventing fall-related injuries in older adults and can be effective for use in long-term care environments. Exercise allows for the strengthening of muscles in the lower extremities, which in turn helps to prevent loss of balance and mobility. Ultimately, falls are reduced when patients gain strength and ambulate regularly. According to these authors, patient safety is increased with the implementation of exercise programs that include walking, muscle strengthening and balance routines. The findings presented by these authors suggest that implementing exercise programs for older adults in long-term care facilities would be beneficial for safety and satisfaction of patients. Barriers and Suggested Strategies There are potential barriers to the implementation of the recommendations in the reviewed studies. Patients with decreased mobility or complete immobility would not be able to complete these exercise programs. It would also be difficult to implement the exercise protocol for patients with physical, cognitive, or psychosocial impairments. Nurses should consider variations in exercise regimens appropriatge for patients with decrased mobility or other impariments. Nurse could provide passive exercise activities for patients who are completely immobile.
  • 6. Implementation of the suggested interventions may be difficulty for patients experiencing pain. Adequate and appropriate use of pharmacological and nonpharmacological interventions for pain management should be implemented before use of the suggested exercise interventions. Nurses should assess patients’ pain and collaborate with other health care providers to provide pain relief. It could be very costly to implement the recommended exercise programs, as many of them would have to be individualized to the patient which would require trained personnel. This could be a potential barrier to implementation of the suggested strategies. Nurses may have to work with managers and administrators to find solutions for financial resources. Lastly, patient interest is a potential barrier to the recommendations because patients have to be willing to exercise. Nurses should involve patients in exercise decisions and provide patient education to support the patient’s treatment decisions. Nurses should also be flexible and creative in determining exercise regimens for patients, allowing the patient input into desired activities and activities based on patient interests. Conclusion Patient safety has always been a main concern in nursing practice but further precautions to fall-related injuries can be taken. Exercise is proven to have many positive outcomes on the mind and body. Therefore, incorporating exercise programs in long-term care facilities, nurses can increase patient safety measures and promote improved overall quality of life.
  • 7. References Ambutas, S., Lamb, K.V., & Quigley, P. (2017). Fall reduction and injury prevention toolkit: Implementation on two medical- surgical units. MEDSURG Nursing, 26(3), 175-179. Bello-Haas, V PM., Thorpe, L., Lix, L., Scudds, R., and Hadjistavropoulos, T. (2012). The effects of a long-term care walking program on balance, falls and well-being. BMC Geriatrics, 12(76), N.PAG. doi: 10.1186/1471-2318-12-76 Kato, M., Izumi, K., Hiramatsu, T., & Shogenji, M. (2006). Development of an exercise program for fall prevention for elderly persons in a long-term care facility. Japan Journal of Nursing Science, 3(2), 107–117. doi:10.1111/j.1742- 7924.2006.00057.x Gschwind, Y. J., Kressig, R. W., Lacroix, A., Muehlbauer, T., Pfenninger, B., & Granacher, U. (2013). A best practice fall prevention exercise program to improve balance, strength / power, and psychosocial health in older adults: Study protocol for a randomized controlled trial. BMC Geriatrics, 1 (105), N.PAG. doi: 10.1186/1471-2318-13- 105 Sherrington, C., Tiedemann, A., Fairhall, N., Close, J., & Lord, S. (2011), Exercise to prevent falls in older adults: An updated meta-analysis and best practice recommendations. New South Wales Public Health Bulletin, 22(3-4), N.PAG. doi: 10.1071/NB10056 Taylor, C., Lillis, C., & Lynn, P. (2015). Fundamentals of nursing: The art and science of nursing care. (8th ed.). Philadelphia: Wolters Kluwer
  • 8. Health/Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Frequent manual repositioning and incidence of pressure ulcers among bed-bound elderly hip fracture patients Shayna E. Rich, MA, PhD1; David Margolis, MD, PhD2; Michelle Shardell, PhD1; William G. Hawkes; PhD1; Ram R. Miller, MD1; Sania Amr, MD1; Mona Baumgarten, PhD1 1. Department of Epidemiology and Public Health, University of Maryland School of Medicine, Baltimore, Maryland, and 2. Departments of Epidemiology & Biostatistics, and Dermatology, University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania Reprint requests: Shayna Rich, MA, PhD, 121 South Fremont Avenue, Apartment 431; Baltimore, MD 21201. Tel: 11 443 604 6308; Fax: 11 410 706 4433; Email: [email protected] Manuscript received: March 3, 2010 Accepted in final form: September 28, 2010
  • 9. DOI:10.1111/j.1524-475X.2010.00644.x ABSTRACT Frequent manual repositioning is an established part of pressure ulcer prevention, but there is little evidence for its effectiveness. This study examined the association between repositioning and pressure ulcer incidence among bed- bound elderly hip fracture patients, using data from a 2004–2007 cohort study in nine Maryland and Pennsylvania hospitals. Eligible patients (n5269) were age�65 years, underwent hip fracture surgery, and were bed-bound at index study visits (during the first 5 days of hospitalization). Information about repositioning on the days of index vis- its was collected from patient charts; study nurses assessed presence of stage 21 pressure ulcers 2 days later. The association between frequent manual repositioning and pressure ulcer incidence was estimated, adjusting for pressure ulcer risk factors using generalized estimating equations and weighted estimating equations. Patients were frequently repositioned (at least every 2 hours) on only 53% (187/ 354) of index visit days. New pressure ulcers developed at 12% of visits following frequent repositioning vs. 10% following less frequent repositioning; the incidence rate of pressure ulcers per person-day did not differ between the two groups (inci- dence rate ratio 1.1, 95% confidence interval 0.5–2.4). No association was found be-
  • 10. tween frequent repositioning of bed-bound patients and lower pressure ulcer incidence, calling into question the allocation of resources for repositioning. Pressure ulcers are a common complication of immobility among the elderly, resulting in substantial pain and suffering 1 and excess hospital costs with charges for associated hospital stays averaging > US$15,000.2 As of October 2008, Med- icare no longer reimburses hospitals for treatment of hos- pital-acquired stage 3 or 4 pressure ulcers. 3 This decision was based on the designation of pressure ulcers as a ‘‘rea- sonably preventable condition,’’ i.e., it is assumed that pressure ulcers will generally not develop on patients re- ceiving care according to current evidence-based guide- lines. Unfortunately, although national and international clinical guidelines for pressure ulcer prevention recom- mend a wide range of measures, the evidence for the effec- tiveness of many of these measures is fairly weak. 4–6 To ensure that the measures recommended by clinical guide- lines lead to a reduction in pressure ulcers, it is critical to confirm both that these measures are effective and that they are widely implemented. One of the major methods for prevention of pressure
  • 11. ulcers is the frequent manual repositioning of patients with limited mobility. In particular, several clinical guidelines recommend that bed-bound patients be repositioned every 2 hours. 5,6 This recommendation is based primarily on expert opinion, with few epidemiological studies and in- conclusive evidence that repositioning at this frequency is effective in preventing the development of pressure ulcers. Despite the dearth of evidence, repositioning bed-bound patients every 2 hours has become firmly established as the standard of care. Confirming the effectiveness of frequent repositioning is an important goal, to ensure that the standard of care is appropriate and because the labor costs associated with this intervention are considerable. Indeed, repositioning and transferring patients take up the largest proportion of the time devoted to pressure ulcer prevention, 7 and in one study cost of repositioning accounted for 73% of the total cost for pressure ulcer prevention. 8 Several studies have also shown that manual repositioning increases health care workers’ risk for back pain and musculoskeletal inju- ries. 9,10
  • 12. Given the shortage of both skilled and unskilled nursing labor, the allocation of nursing time to patient re- positioning every 2 hours is only justified if this interven- tion is effective. Furthermore, it is unclear to what degree the recom- mendation for frequent manual repositioning is being im- plemented in US health care facilities. A study published in 2001 by the Health Care Financing Administration (now the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services) found that, in 1996, only 66% of bed- and chair-bound patients CI Confidence interval GEE Generalized estimating equations IRR Incidence rate ratio MMSE Mini-Mental State Examination OR Odds ratio PRSS Pressure-redistributing support surfaces Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound Healing Society10 Wound Repair and Regeneration mailto:[email protected] were repositioned every 2 hours. 11
  • 13. A study by Bates-Jen- sen et al. 12 in nursing homes in 2003 found that only 18 of 58 such patients were repositioned at least every 2 hours. No study since then has examined adherence to this rec- ommendation, although a few studies have examined the use of repositioning, but not its frequency, in preventing pressure ulcers. 13–15 There is some evidence that the ap- propriate frequency of repositioning should vary with the support surface in use, 16 and guidelines differ in whether patients using mattresses and overlays designed to redis- tribute pressure (i.e., pressure-redistributing support sur- faces, PRSS) can be repositioned less frequently than those using standard support surfaces. 5,6 Yet no studies have ex- amined if the frequency of repositioning for patients using PRSS differs from that for patients using standard support surfaces. Thus, it is of interest to examine the degree of adherence to frequent manual repositioning recommenda- tions in bed-bound patients, particularly when considering the type of support surface in use.
  • 14. Manual repositioning of bed-bound patients every 2 hours is an established part of the clinical guidelines for pressure ulcer prevention, but there is little evidence for its effectiveness and little is known about its implementation in the hospital setting. Thus, it is unclear what effect the recommendation for frequent manual repositioning has on clinical outcomes. In this study, we aimed to determine if manual repositioning every 2 hours is associated with a lower incidence of pressure ulcers among bed-bound elderly hip fracture patients and to examine the degree of adherence to recommendations for manual repositioning in these patients. MATERIALS AND METHODS Participants Data for this study were collected as part of a prospective cohort study of patients aged 65 years or older who un- derwent surgery for hip fracture (ICD-9 code 820) between 2004 and 2007 in any of nine hospitals that participate in the Baltimore Hip Studies network. The methods for the parent study have been described previously. 17 Data for the parent study were collected in the nine acute care hos- pitals and the 105 postacute facilities to which patients enrolled in this study were discharged; data for the current analysis were collected in the nine admission hospitals. All hospitals included in this analysis were voluntary non- profit acute care facilities, including four teaching hospi- tals. Seven of the study hospitals were in Maryland and two in Pennsylvania. The number of beds in each hospital ranged from 100 to 536 (median 253).
  • 15. The parent study was approved by the Institutional Review Boards of each of the participating hospitals and the University of Maryland Baltimore; the latter also ap- proved the current study. Permission to contact patients for screening and recruitment was obtained from attending physicians. If the patient had a Mini-Mental State Exam- ination (MMSE) 18 score of 20 or greater, the patient’s writ- ten consent was obtained; otherwise the patient’s verbal assent and a proxy’s written consent were obtained. Proxy consent was also obtained for patients who were uncon- scious or noncommunicative. A total of 1,167 patients were screened for eligibility, of whom 1,055 were eligible (90% of screened), and 658 patients enrolled (62% of eligible). Data about repositioning frequency were collected for the first 5 days of each patient’s initial hospitalization. Thus, patients who did not have any study visits during the first 5 days of hospitalization (n5103) were excluded from the current study. Because national clinical guidelines only recommend repositioning for bed-bound patients, patients were also excluded from the current study if they were not bed-bound according to the activity item of the Braden scale 19 during at least one study visit in the first 5 days of hospitalization (n5286), leaving a sample of 269 patients. Measures
  • 16. Repositioning Data about repositioning were collected from the nursing flowsheet by a specially trained chart abstractor or a reg- istered nurse experienced in medical record review. This information included the number of times that the patient was manually repositioned on each of the first 5 days of the patient’s initial hospital stay. If the nursing flowsheet indi- cated only the frequency of turning rather than the number of times the patient was turned (e.g., ‘‘q2h’’ to indicate turning every 2 hours), the corresponding number of turns was recorded in the daily total. Repositioning was classi- fied as frequent if there were 12 or more turns per hospital day, corresponding to an average frequency of every 2 hours, as recommended in several clinical guidelines for the prevention of pressure ulcers. 5,6 Pressure ulcer status Specially trained research nurses assessed pressure ulcer status at study visits that occurred at baseline (as soon as possible after hospital admission) and on alternating days for 21 days. The presence and stage of pressure ulcers were determined at each study visit by a whole-body skin exam- ination conducted according to standard wound assess- ment practice. 20 Standard definitions of pressure ulcer stages 21
  • 17. were used: stage 1 (alteration of intact skin with persistent redness), stage 2 (partial thickness dermal loss or serum-filled blister), and stages 3 and 4 (full-thickness tis- sue loss without/with exposed bone, tendon, or muscle). The study outcome was development of one or more new pressure ulcers stage 2 or higher at the visit following the day for which repositioning frequency was recorded. Re- sults were similar when the study outcome was restricted to stage 2 pressure ulcers. Because only 16 of the pressure ulcers observed in the study ever reached stages 3 or 4, it was not possible to perform an analysis restricting the study outcome to stage 3 and 4 pressure ulcers. Patients with pressure ulcers continued to be considered at risk for additional pressure ulcers. Results were virtually identical when patients with pressure ulcers present at hospital admission were excluded from the analysis. Covariates At each assessment, the research nurse recorded the patient’s Braden scale score, 19,22 based on observation Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound Healing Society 11 Frequent repositioning and pressure ulcer incidenceRich et al. and discussion with clinical staff. The Braden scale com- prises six items: mobility, activity, sensory perception, ex- posure to friction and shear forces, skin moisture, and nutritional status. The ‘‘friction and shear’’ item is rated
  • 18. on a three-point scale; each of the other five items is rated on a four-point scale. The values for each item are summed to provide a score ranging from six to 23, with lower scores indicating a higher risk for pressure ulcer development. A cut-off point of 16 is commonly used to indicate ‘‘at-risk’’ patients. 23 Acute mental status was also assessed at each visit by counting the number of orientations to person, place, and time. Incontinence status was based primarily on the research nurses’ observation of skin moisture and/or soil- ing with stool during the skin assessment and secondarily on the four-point incontinence item of the Norton scale of pressure ulcer risk. 24 Information about use of PRSS was recorded by the research nurses on a structured form at each study visit. PRSS were considered to be in use if any overlays were observed to be on the patient’s bed or if the mattress on the patient’s bed was made of any materials other than standard foam and spring. For pressure ulcer preventive devices other than PRSS, cushions were con- sidered in use if they were on the patient’s chair or wheel- chair, even if the patient was not seated at the time of the assessment, whereas heel protectors, elbow protectors, and positioning pillows/wedges were only recorded as being in use if they were observed to be on, or supporting, the patient at the time of assessment. Data about all other covariates were obtained by clini- cal observation at the baseline study visit, by patient or proxy interview, or by chart review. At the baseline visit,
  • 19. research nurses used the Subjective Global Assessment of Nutritional Status 25 to classify individuals as being at low, moderate, or high risk of nutrition-associated complica- tions. Arterial insufficiency, defined as absence of pedal pulses or ankle brachial index < 1, was also determined at the baseline visit. Weight and height were obtained from the medical chart or, when missing, from patient or proxy interview; this information was used to calculate the pa- tient’s body mass index (weight [kg]/height[m] 2 ). Standard definitions 26 were used to define weight status: under- weight (body mass index < 18.5), normal weight (body mass index518.5–24.9), and overweight/obese (body mass index�25.0). Severity of illness was measured on the Rand Sickness at Admission Scale (hip fracture version) 27 and comorbidity by the Charlson Comorbidity Index, 28 both of which use information from the medical chart. The number of days since hospital admission was determined according to the information in the medical chart.
  • 20. Analysis To describe the study population, the distributions of the patients’ characteristics noted at the baseline visit were compared for those repositioned frequently (at least every 2 hours) on the day of the baseline visit and those reposi- tioned less frequently. We used simple counts and propor- tions for categorical variables, and means with standard deviations for continuous variables. p-values were obtained by chi-square test for categorical variables or by two-sample t-test for continuous variables. Study visits at which patients in the study sample were bed-bound during the first 5 days of hospitalization (354 person-visits) were designated as index visits. Because some patients had multiple index visits, generalized esti- mating equations (GEE) analysis 29 with an exchangeable working correlation matrix was used to account for within-patient correlation. GEE models with a log link, Poisson working model, and offset of log number of days between visits (to account for differing amounts of patient follow-up) were fit to determine the association between repositioning frequency on the day of an index visit and incidence of pressure ulcers stage 2 or higher at the following visit. Estimates of incidence rate ratios (IRR) and 95% confidence intervals (CI) were reported, both unadjusted and adjusted for covariates. The number of days since hospital admission was included in the adjusted model as a continuous variable using a linear spline with a knot at hospital day 2, and some admission hospitals with few outcomes were combined in the
  • 21. adjusted model. To determine whether the association between repositioning frequency and pressure ulcer incidence was modified by pressure ulcer risk status, another adjusted model was fit with additional covariates for the patient’s Braden scale score (dichotomized at the sample’s median) at the index visit and a term for the interaction between Braden scale score and repositioning frequency. Because repositioning data and covariate data were missing for 10% (37/354) and 9% (33/354) of index visits, respectively, weighted estimating equations analysis 30 was used to account for possible selection bias due to missing data. To compute the weights for this analysis, the prob- ability of having observed (nonmissing) repositioning data was estimated using a GEE model with a logit link, bino- mial working model, and predictor variables (admission hospital, severity of illness, use of pressure ulcer preventive devices other than PRSS, pressure ulcer incidence before or at the index visit, linear spline of days since hospital admission, and completeness of other covariate data). The probability of having complete covariate data was esti- mated in a similar way with admission hospital as the predictor variable. Weights were then estimated as the product of the inverse probability of having complete cov- ariate data and the inverse probability of having observed repositioning data. GEE models were fit with a binomial distribution and identity link to determine estimates and 95% CI for the proportion of index visit days on which patients were fre- quently repositioned, for the whole study sample, for sub-
  • 22. groups of patients using each type of support surface, and for subgroups of patients in each admission hospital. GEE models with a logit link and binomial working model were fit to determine whether PRSS use on a given day was associated with frequent repositioning on the same day. Estimates of prevalence odds ratios (OR) and 95% CI are reported, both unadjusted and adjusted for covariates. To avoid overfitting, age, sex, acute mental status, comorbid- ity, arterial insufficiency, use of preventive devices other than PRSS, and presence of a pressure ulcer at the index visit were eliminated from the model, after it was deter- mined that these variables did not change the estimate of the coefficient of interest by > 10%. Because the use of frequent repositioning and PRSS were expected to vary Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound Healing Society12 Frequent repositioning and pressure ulcer incidence Rich et al. based on hospital policy and resources, it was expected that there may be important clustering effects by admis- sion hospital. To examine these effects, additional models were fit that adjusted for admission hospital using indica- tor variables. All analyses were performed using SAS 9.1 (SAS Institute Inc., Cary, NC). RESULTS Study sample Patients’ baseline characteristics, by repositioning frequency on the day of the baseline visit, are shown in Table 1.
  • 23. Table 1. Baseline characteristics of study participants, by repositioning frequency on day of baseline visit Characteristics Patients repositioned at least every 2 hours (N5139) Patients repositioned less frequently than every 2 hours (N5130)n All patients (N5269) w p-value z n (%) Age �85 years 68 (48.9) 71 (54.6) 139 (51.7) 0.35 Male sex 36 (25.9) 32 (24.6) 68 (25.3) 0.81 White race 137 (98.6) 128 (98.5) 265 (98.5) 0.95 Community resident before admission 83 (59.7) 86 (66.2) 169 (62.8) 0.27
  • 24. Medicaid payor 12 (8.6) 6 (4.6) 18 (6.7) 0.19 Trochanteric fracture 53 (38.1) 57 (43.9) 110 (40.9) 0.34 Partial or total arthroplasty 58 (41.7) 56 (43.1) 114 (42.4) 0.82 Albumin < 3.0 g/dL 48 (34.5) 45 (34.6) 93 (34.6) 0.99 Not fully oriented to person, place, and time 61 (45.9) 46 (36.2) 107 (41.2) 0.11 High risk of nutrition-related complications 22 (16.3) 11 (8.5) 33 (12.5) 0.06 Incontinence 0.97 None 95 (68.8) 91 (70.0) 186 (69.4) Urinary only 28 (20.3) 26 (20.0) 54 (20.2) Fecal with or without urinary 15 (10.9) 13 (10.0) 28 (10.5) Arterial insufficiency 56 (40.3) 62 (47.7) 118 (43.9) 0.22 Braden scale score �16 129 (94.9) 119 (93.7) 248 (94.3) 0.69 Pressure ulcers present at baseline visit
  • 25. 25 (20.2) 9 (7.8) 34 (14.2) 0.006 Mean (standard deviation) Mean age (years) 83.9 (6.4) 84.0 (6.5) 84.0 (6.5) 0.90 Mean Rand Sickness at Admission score 13.6 (7.5) 12.9 (6.3) 13.3 (6.9) 0.40 Mean Charlson Comorbidity Index 1.5 (1.5) 1.5 (1.5) 1.5 (1.5) 0.67 Mean MMSE score 15.8 (11.1) 17.5 (10.8) 16.6 (11.0) 0.21 Mean BMI (weight [kg]/height [m] 2 ) 23.4 (5.3) 24.2 (4.7) 23.8 (5.0) 0.24 Mean Braden scale score 13.8 (1.7) 14.2 (1.6) 14.0 (1.7) 0.07 Mean length of hospital stay (days) 6.0 (2.7) 5.7 (3.1) 5.9 (2.9) 0.35
  • 26. Mean interval between admission and baseline visit (days) 1.8 (1.1) 1.6 (1.1) 1.7 (1.1) 0.15 nIncludes patients with missing repositioning data and two study participants who did not have a baseline visit in the first 5 days of hospitalization at which the patient was bed-bound. w Because of missing data, N for individual items ranges from 240 to 269. z p-value determined by two-sample t-test for continuous variables or chi-square for categorical variables. MMSE, Mini-Mental State Examination. BMI, body mass index. Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound Healing Society 13 Frequent repositioning and pressure ulcer incidenceRich et al. Patients repositioned frequently (at least 12 times/day or every 2 hours on average) were more likely than those repo- sitioned less frequently to have a pressure ulcer at the base- line visit (p50.006). Those repositioned frequently were also more likely to have a high risk of nutrition-related compli- cations (p50.06) and to have a lower mean Braden scale score (p50.07) than patients repositioned less frequently. Effect of frequent repositioning on incidence of
  • 27. pressure ulcers Patients in the study sample had an incident pressure ulcer stage 2 or higher at 11% (38/354) of visits following an index visit; the proportion was 12% (22/187) for visits following days on which patients were frequently reposi- tioned and 10% (16/167) following days on which patients were repositioned less frequently (Table 2). The rate of incident pressure ulcers stage 2 or higher at the visit following an index visit per person-day of follow-up was similar whether or not the patient was repositioned frequently on the day of the index visit (unadjusted IRR 1.22, 95% CI 0.65–2.30; covariate-adjusted IRR 1.12, 95% CI 0.52–2.42). The effect of frequent repositioning on pressure ulcer incidence varied somewhat (p for the interaction50.07 in adjusted model) according to whether or not the patient was at high risk of pressure ulcers, as indicated by a Braden scale score less than the study sample median value of 14. Among the higher risk patients, the incidence rate of pressure ulcers per person-day of follow-up was lower for those frequently repositioned on the day of the index visit compared with those repositioned less frequently (adjusted IRR 0.39, 95% CI 0.08–1.84), whereas in lower risk patients, the incidence rate of pressure ulcers for those repositioned frequently was higher than for those repositioned less frequently (adjusted IRR 2.19, 95% CI 0.73–6.60). Relationship between use of PRSS and frequent repositioning Patients were repositioned frequently on 53% of the days on which an index visit occurred (95% CI 47–58%); the proportion was 54% (78/145) among patients using PRSS and 52% (106/204) among patients using standard mat-
  • 28. tresses. The proportion of days with frequent repositioning according to type of support surface ranged from 42 to 66% (Figure 1). The use of frequent repositioning also differed substantially by admission hospital; the hospital- specific proportion of days on which frequent repositioning was in use ranged from 23 to 77%. Examining the role of admission hospital in detail, we found that hospitals with more PRSS use tended to have less use of frequent reposi- tioning and vice versa, indicating that admission hospital was a negative confounder of the association between PRSS use and frequent repositioning. Thus, although there was no association between using PRSS and frequent repositioning in models not accounting for admission hos- pital (unadjusted OR 1.14, 95% CI 0.74–1.75; covariate- adjusted OR 1.06, 95% CI 0.67–1.70), the odds of frequent repositioning in patients using PRSS were more than twice as high as the odds in patients using standard mattresses in models accounting for admission hospital (hospital- adjusted OR 2.08, 95% CI 1.10–3.92; fully adjusted OR 2.28, 95% CI 1.15–4.54). DISCUSSION In this study of bed-bound elderly hip fracture patients, we did not find that repositioning patients at least every 2 hours is associated with a decreased incidence of pressure ulcers, suggesting that manual repositioning at this fre- quency may not effectively prevent pressure ulcers. Previ- ous studies of frequent repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention have yielded inconsistent results. Although a Table 2. Unadjusted and adjusted incidence rate ratios for developing a pressure ulcer stage 2 or higher at the following visit, by frequency of repositioning on the day of an index visit
  • 29. Repositioning frequency Number of visits % who developed �1 IPU at following visit Unadjusted IRR (95% CI) Fully adjustedn IRR (95% CI) Among all patients Less than every 2 hours 167 10 Reference — At least every 2 hours 187 12 1.22 (0.65, 2.30) 1.12 (0.52, 2.42) Among patients at higher risk of pressure ulcers (Braden scale score <14) Less than every 2 hours 60 13 Reference — At least every 2 hours 80 6 0.51 (0.20, 1.26) 0.39 (0.08, 1.84) Among patients at lower risk of pressure ulcers (Braden scale score �14) Less than every 2 hours 107 7 Reference — At least every 2 hours 107 16 2.11 (0.92, 4.87) 2.19 (0.73, 6.60) All models account for within-patient correlation by generalized estimating equations using an exchangeable structure for the work-
  • 30. ing correlation matrix. nAccounts for missing repositioning and missing covariate data using weighted estimating equations, and adjusts for age, sex, acute mental status, risk of nutrition-related complications, weight status, incontinence status, arterial insufficiency, severity of illness, comorbidity, use of pressure-redistributing support surfaces, use of any other pressure ulcer preventive device, admission hospital, prior pressure ulcer of any stage, and number of days since hospital admission. IPU, incident pressure ulcer stage 2 or higher; IRR, incidence rate ratio; CI, confidence interval. Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound Healing Society14 Frequent repositioning and pressure ulcer incidence Rich et al. randomized trial 16 found a lower incidence of pressure ulcers for patients repositioned every 2 hours than for those repositioned every 3 hours among patients using a standard mattress, the same group 31
  • 31. found no significant difference in pressure ulcer incidence when they compared groups under two repositioning-interval regimens (2 hours in a lateral position and 4 hours in a supine position vs. 4 hours in each position). Observational studies in humans have only shown that the duration of pressure likely to result in pressure ulcers falls within a range of 1–6 hours. 32,33 Finally, studies in humans using surrogate endpoints (skin temperature and redness, and contact pressure) and animal studies and in vitro tissue studies suggest that even a 2-hour interval of repositioning might be insufficient to prevent tissue damage. 34–36 Thus, the evidence for an optimal repositioning interval is inconclu- sive, with biological plausibility for an interval < 2 hours but little difference in clinical outcomes between this inter- val and longer intervals. Taken together, the published literature and the present study findings suggest that the clinical recommendations for manual repositioning with a specified interval are not well-founded. Recent guidelines have recognized the limitations of the evidence for manual repositioning, and these guidelines have recommended that frequency of manual reposition- ing should be tailored to each patient based on character- istics such as mobility and general medical condition. 37
  • 32. Given the substantial costs and burden of repositioning every 2 hours, it is important to target this intervention to patients who are most likely to benefit. In this study, there was some suggestion that the effect of repositioning was modified by the patient’s pressure ulcer risk status. Among patients at high risk of pressure ulcers (as indicated by low Braden scale scores), those repositioned at least every 2 hours had a lower rate of incident pressure ulcers than those repositioned less frequently; among patients at low risk of pressure ulcers, those repositioned at least every 2 hours had a higher rate of incident pressure ulcers than those repositioned less frequently, although neither differ- ence was statistically significant. If confirmed in future studies, these findings suggest that, even among bed- bound patients, repositioning may only be effective as a prevention measure for those at particularly high risk of pressure ulcers, and patients at high risk according to Braden scale score may be a population of particular in- terest. Additional studies should examine if frequent repo- sitioning is only effective in this patient population. We found limited adherence to the recommendation for frequent manual repositioning despite the fact that the study population, bed-bound elderly hip fracture patients, is recognized as being at high risk of pressure ulcers. 7,38 It is reassuring that patients who were repositioned fre- quently were more likely than those who were repositioned less frequently to have a lower Braden scale score. Overall, though, patients were repositioned at least every 2 hours on only 53% of days. This finding is consistent with several
  • 33. previous studies showing a low prevalence of reposition- ing, although the prevalence may vary substantially by hospital unit. 11,13 In one study, staff members did not reposition patients as regularly as prescribed despite knowledge that repositioning should be done, 39 and sev- eral studies have found that the main reasons cited for not regularly repositioning patients include lack of time and lack of staff, rather than a lack of knowledge of turning protocols. 40 Thus, despite indications that repositioning is widely accepted as standard care for pressure ulcer prevention, repositioning does not appear to be fully implemented. The prevalence of frequent repositioning was higher among patients using PRSS when compared with patients on standard support surfaces, allaying concerns that use of a PRSS reduces frequent repositioning. These results sug- gest that providers are using these preventive measures together for high-risk patients, as is appropriate under 43% 53%
  • 35. (n=18) Other PRSS (n=23) Type of Support Surface P ro p o rt io n o f d a y s ( % ) 45% 64% 22%
  • 36. 77% 29% 62% 22% 79% 59% 52% 35% 75% Figure 1. Proportion of days (and 95% confidence intervals) on which patients were repositioned at least every 2 hours (�12 times/ day), by type of support surface. Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound Healing Society 15 Frequent repositioning and pressure ulcer incidenceRich et al. current guidelines, rather than using PRSS alone. The presence of a PRSS may also be a cue to remind providers to frequently reposition patients. However, we found sub- stantial variation in the prevalence of frequent reposition- ing and PRSS use by hospital, indicating that differences in resource availability or facility policies, such as the pres-
  • 37. ence of quality improvement initiatives, may play major roles in the implementation of pressure ulcer prevention guidelines. An important limitation of this study is its observational design; randomized studies are required to provide strong evidence regarding the effectiveness of this intervention. However, given that repositioning every 2 hours is the cur- rent standard of care, it would be difficult and possibly unethical to perform experimental studies where patients are randomized to less frequent intervals of repositioning. To strengthen the inferences drawn from this study, we adjusted for many known confounders of the association of interest, but bias due to unmeasured confounders can- not be excluded. Also, there may be errors in the informa- tion about frequency of repositioning obtained from medical records. This limitation is particularly salient as the prior study by Bates-Jensen et al. 12 found a wide dis- crepancy between actual repositioning practices and med- ical record documentation, with documentation rates much higher than repositioning rates measured by thigh monitors. As such errors are probably equally likely among patients who do and do not develop pressure ulcers, the errors tend to bias results toward the null. An- other limitation of this study was the relatively small sam- ple size which limited the power to test the associations of interest. Finally, our study population was limited to hip fracture patients age 65 years or older, and results may not be generalizable to other patients at risk for pressure ulcers. However, because hip fracture patients are fre- quently bed-bound for long periods of time in the periop- erative period, pressure ulcers are a common complication
  • 38. of immobility among these patients. 17 Thus, elderly hip fracture patients represent an excellent population in which to examine repositioning as an intervention to pre- vent pressure ulcers, and there is no known reason that the effect of frequent repositioning in this population would differ from that in other populations at risk for pressure ulcers. The high incidence of pressure ulcers seen in this study may be due to the choice of elderly hip fracture patients (a particularly high-risk group) as the study sam- ple, but it may also be linked to infrequent repositioning practices in study facilities. Unfortunately, data were not available to examine facility polices, practices, or resources related to repositioning; the contribution of these factors to pressure ulcer incidence may be an important future area of study. Pressure ulcers have been recognized as an important indicator of quality of care, particularly since the identifi- cation of stage 3 or 4 pressure ulcers as one of the hospital- acquired conditions for which the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services will not provide reimbursement. Clinical practice guidelines for pressure ulcer prevention recommend the use of frequent manual repositioning in bed-bound patients, but this study found that the imple- mentation of this intervention was suboptimal. The imple- mentation also varied substantially by hospital, indicating that factors other than patient need influence the choice of pressure ulcer prevention methods and that the quality of care for pressure ulcer prevention may differ by facility. However, the results of this study and others indicate that we do not yet have evidence for the efficacy of frequent re-
  • 39. positioning for pressure ulcer prevention. Additional study is needed to determine if there is a standard interval at which manual repositioning is effective at preventing pressure ulcers, or if manual repositioning is only effective in a subpopulation of bed-bound patients. In the absence of this information, it is unclear if the variations in care demonstrated in this study translate into a difference in patient outcomes, or if decreasing the frequency of reposi- tioning might reduce the cost and burden of this interven- tion without increasing the incidence of pressure ulcers. The current findings call into question the efficacy of turn- ing as a pressure ulcer prevention strategy, but it is pre- mature to suggest that frequent manual repositioning is unnecessary. Repositioning may be more important for patients at higher risk (i.e., lower scores) by the Braden scale, but further research is required. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Supported by grants from the National Institute on Aging (T32 AG000262 and F30 AG034008); National Institute of Arthritis and Musculoskeletal and Skin Diseases (R01 AR47711); University of Maryland General Clinical Re- search Center Grant, General Clinical Research Centers Program, National Center for Research Resources (M01 RR16500); National Institute on Aging Claude D. Pepper Older Americans Independence Center (P30 AG028747); and National Institute of Child Health and Human Devel- opment (K12 HD043489). Preliminary results from this study were presented as a poster at the 2009 Annual Scientific Meeting of the Amer- ican Geriatrics Society, Chicago, IL, April 30, 2009, and at the 61st Annual Meeting of the Gerontological Society of America, National Harbor, MD, November 19, 2008. Fi- nal results from this study were presented at the 137th An-
  • 40. nual Meeting of the American Public Health Association, Philadelphia, PA, November 10, 2009. Data from this study have been the subject of other analyses, the results of which have been previously pub- lished. The publications are as follows: (a) Baumgarten, M., Margolis, D.J., Orwig, D.L., Shardell, M.D., Hawkes, W.G., Langenberg, P., Palmer, M.H., Jones, P.S., McAr- dle, P.F., Sterling, R., Kinosian, B.P., Rich, S.E., Sowin- ski, J., and Magaziner, J. 2009. ‘‘Pressure Ulcers in Elderly Patients with Hip Fracture Across the Continuum of Care.’’ Journal of the American Geriatrics Society. 57(5): 863–70. (b) Baumgarten, M., Margolis, D., Orwig, D., Hawkes, W., Rich, S., Langenberg, P., Shardell, M., Palmer, M.H., McArdle, P., Sterling, R., Jones, P.S., and Magaziner, J. 2010. ‘‘Use of Pressure-Redistributing Sup- port Surfaces Among Elderly Hip Fracture Patients Across the Continuum of Care: Adherence to Pressure Ul- cer Prevention Guidelines.’’ Gerontologist. 50:253–62. Nei- ther of these previously published articles have examined the hypotheses that are addressed in this article. The authors have no potential conflicts of interest. Dr. Rich had full access of the data in the study and takes Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound Healing Society16 Frequent repositioning and pressure ulcer incidence Rich et al. responsibility for the integrity of the data and the accuracy of the data analysis. Author contributions: Study concept and design: Rich,
  • 41. Margolis, Amr, Miller, Baumgarten. Data acquisition: Rich, Shardell, Hawkes, Margolis, Baumgarten. Data management and analysis: Rich, Shardell, Hawkes. Data interpretation and preparation of manuscript: Rich, Shardell, Hawkes, Margolis, Amr, Miller, Baumgarten. REFERENCES 1. Langemo DK, Melland H, Hanson D, Olson B, Hunter S. The lived experience of having a pressure ulcer: a qualitative analysis. Adv Skin Wound Care 2000; 13: 225–35. 2. Russo CA, Elixhauser A. Hospitalizations related to pressure sores. Statistical Brief #3. Rockville, MD: Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality, April 2006. 3. Rosenthal MB. Nonpayment for performance? Medicare’s new reimbursement rule. N Engl J Med 2007; 357: 1573–5. 4. Benbow M. Guidelines for the prevention and treatment of pressure ulcers. Nurs Stand 2006; 20: 42–4. 5. Registered Nurses Association of Ontario (RNAO). Risk assessment & prevention of pressure ulcers. Toronto, ON: RNAO, 2005. 6. Wound, Ostomy, and Continence Nurses Society (WOCN). Guideline for prevention and management of pressure ulcers. Report No. 2. Glenview, IL: WOCN, 2003. 7. Stotts NA, Deosaransingh K, Roll FJ, Newman J. Underuti- lization of pressure ulcer risk assessment in hip fracture patients. Adv Wound Care 1998; 11: 32–8. 8. Xakellis GC, Frantz RA. The cost-effectiveness of interven- tions for preventing pressure ulcers. J Am Board Fam Pract
  • 42. 1996; 9: 79–85. 9. Fragala G, Fragala M, Pontani-Bailey L. Proper positioning of clients: a risk for caregivers. AAOHN J 2005; 53: 438–42. 10. Pompeii LA, Lipscomb HJ, Schoenfisch AL, Dement JM. Musculoskeletal injuries resulting from patient handling tasks among hospital workers. Am J Ind Med 2009; 52: 571–8. 11. Lyder CH, Preston J, Grady JN, Scinto J, Allman R, Berg- strom N, Rodeheaver G. Quality of care for hospitalized Medicare patients at risk for pressure ulcers. Arch Intern Med 2001; 161: 1549–54. 12. Bates-Jensen BM, Cadogan M, Jorge J, Schnelle JF. Standardized quality-assessment system to evaluate pressure ulcer care in the nursing home. J Am Geriatr Soc 2003; 51: 1194–202. 13. Gunningberg L. Are patients with or at risk of pressure ulcers allocated appropriate prevention measures? Int J Nurs Pract 2005; 11: 58–67. 14. Pieper B, Sugrue M, Weiland M, Sprague K, Heimann C. Presence of pressure ulcer prevention methods used among patients considered at risk versus those considered not at risk. J Wound Ostomy Continence Nurs 1997; 24: 191–9. 15. Richardson GM, Gardner S, Frantz RA. Nursing assess- ment: impact on type and cost of interventions to prevent pressure ulcers. J Wound Ostomy Continence Nurs 1998; 25: 273–80. 16. Defloor T, De Bacquer D, Grypdonck MH. The effect of
  • 43. various combinations of turning and pressure reducing devices on the incidence of pressure ulcers. Int J Nurs Stud 2005; 42: 37–46. 17. Baumgarten M, Margolis DJ, Orwig DL, Shardell MD, Hawkes WG, Langenberg P, Palmer MH, Jones PS, McAr- dle PF, Sterling R, Kinosian BP, Rich SE, Sowinski J, Mag- aziner J. Pressure ulcers in elderly patients with hip fracture across the continuum of care. J Am Geriatr Soc 2009; 57: 863–70. 18. Folstein MF, Folstein SE, McHugh PR. ‘‘Mini-mental state’’: a practical method for grading the cognitive state of patients for the clinician. J Psychiatr Res 1975; 12: 189–98. 19. Braden BJ, Maklebust J. Preventing pressure ulcers with the Braden scale: an update on this easy-to-use tool that assesses a patient’s risk. Am J Nurs 2005; 105: 70–2. 20. Bergstrom N, Allman RM, Alvarez O, Bennett M, Carlson C, Frantz R, Garber SL. Treatment of pressure ulcers. AH- CPR Publication No. 95-0652. Rockville, MD: U.S. Depart- ment of Health and Human Services, 1994. 21. Cuddigan J, Ayello EA, Sussman C, editors. Pressure ulcers in America: prevalence, incidence, and implications for the fu- ture. Reston, VA: NPUAP, 2001. 22. Bergstrom N, Braden B, Kemp M, Champagne M, Ruby E. Predicting pressure ulcer risk: a multisite study of the predic- tive validity of the Braden scale. Nurs Res 1998; 47: 261–9. 23. Anthony D, Parboteeah S, Saleh M, Papanikolaou P. Nor- ton, Waterlow and Braden scores: a review of the literature and a comparison between the scores and clinical judgement. J Clin Nurs 2008; 17: 646–53.
  • 44. 24. Norton D, McLaren R, Exton-Smith AN. An investigation of geriatric nursing problems in hospital. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone, 1975. 25. Detsky AS, McLaughlin JR, Baker JP, Johnston N, Whit- taker S, Mendelson RA, Jeejeebhoy KN. What is subjective global assessment of nutritional status? J Parenter Enteral Nutr 1987; 11: 8–13. 26. Pi-Sunyer FX, Becker DM, Bouchard C, Carleton RA, Col- ditz GA, Dietz WH, Foreyt JP, Garrison RJ, Grundy SM, Hansen BC, Higgins M, Hill JO, Howard BV, Klesges RC, Kuczmarski RJ, Kumanyika S, Legako RD, Prewitt TE, Rocchini AP, Smith PL, Snetselaar LG, Sowers JR, Wein- traub M, Williamson DF, Wilson GT. Clinical guidelines on the identification, evaluation and treatment of overweight and obesity in adults: the evidence report. Bethesda, MD: National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute, 1998. 27. Keeler EB, Kahn KL, Draper D, Sherwood MJ, Rubenstein LV, Reinisch EJ, Kosecoff J, Brook RH. Changes in sickness at admission following the introduction of the prospective payment system. JAMA 1990; 264: 1962–8. 28. Charlson M, Szatrowski TP, Peterson J, Gold J. Validation of a combined comorbidity index. J Clin Epidemiol 1994; 47: 1245–51. 29. Zeger SL, Liang KY. Longitudinal data analysis for discrete and continuous outcomes. Biometrics 1986; 42: 121–30. 30. Robins JM, Rotnitzky A, Zhao LP. Estimation of regression coefficients when some regressors are not always observed. J Am Stat Assoc. 1994; 89: 846–66. Available at http:// www.jstor.org.proxy-hs.researchport.umd.edu/stable/
  • 45. 2290910. 31. Vanderwee K, Grypdonck MH, De Bacquer D, Defloor T. Effectiveness of turning with unequal time intervals on the incidence of pressure ulcer lesions. J Adv Nurs 2007; 57: 59–68. 32. Aronovitch SA. Intraoperatively acquired pressure ulcers: are there common risk factors? Ostomy Wound Manage 2007; 53: 57–69. Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound Healing Society 17 Frequent repositioning and pressure ulcer incidenceRich et al. http://www.jstor.org.proxy- hs.researchport.umd.edu/stable/2290910 http://www.jstor.org.proxy- hs.researchport.umd.edu/stable/2290910 http://www.jstor.org.proxy- hs.researchport.umd.edu/stable/2290910 33. Hoshowsky VM, Schramm CA. Intraoperative pressure sore prevention: an analysis of bedding materials. Res Nurs Health 1994; 17: 333–9. 34. Breuls RG, Bouten CV, Oomens CW, Bader DL, Baaijens FP. Compression induced cell damage in engineered muscle tissue: an in vitro model to study pressure ulcer aetiology. Ann Biomed Eng 2003; 31: 1357–64. 35. Knox DM, Anderson TM, Anderson PS. Effects of different turn intervals on skin of healthy older adults. Adv Wound Care 1994; 7: 48–52, 54–6.
  • 46. 36. Stekelenburg A, Oomens CW, Strijkers GJ, Nicolay K, Bader DL. Compression-induced deep tissue injury exam- ined with magnetic resonance imaging and histology. J Appl Physiol 2006; 100: 1946–54. 37. Dealey C. A joint collaboration: international pressure ulcer guidelines. J Wound Care 2009; 18: 368–72. 38. Jensen TT, Juncker Y. Pressure sores common after hip operations. Acta Orthop Scand 1987; 58: 209–11. 39. Helme TA. Position changes for residents in long-term care. Adv Wound Care 1994; 7: 57–8, 60–1. 40. Hawkins S, Stone K, Plummer L. An holistic approach to turning patients. Nurs Stand 1999; 14: 51–6. Wound Rep Reg (2011) 19 10–18 c� 2010 by the Wound Healing Society18 Frequent repositioning and pressure ulcer incidence Rich et al. Copyright of Wound Repair & Regeneration is the property of Wiley-Blackwell and its content may not be copied or emailed to multiple sites or posted to a listserv without the copyright holder's express written permission. However, users may print, download, or email articles for individual use.
  • 47. 203 JRRDJRRD Volume 48, Number 3, 2011Pages 203–214 Journal of Rehabilitation Research & Development Assessing evidence supporting redistribution of pressure for pressure ulcer prevention: A review Stephen Sprigle, PhD, PT;* Sharon Sonenblum, PhD Rehabilitation Engineering and Applied Research Lab, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, GA Abstract—The formation and underlying causes of p ressure ulcers (PUs) are qu ite complex, with multiple influencing fac- tors. However, by definition pressure ulcers cannot form with- out loading, or pressure, on tissue. Clinical interventions typically target the magnitude and/or duration of loading. Pres- sure magnitude is managed by the selection of support surfaces and postural supports as well as body posture on supporting surfaces. Duration is addressed via turning and weight shifting frequency as well as with th e use of dynamic s urfaces that actively redistribute pressure on the body surfaces. This article shows that preventative interventions must be targeted to both magnitude and duration and addresses the rationale behind sev- eral common clinical interventions—some with more scientific evidence than others. Key words: body posture, clinical interventions, postural sup- ports, pressure magnitude, pressure ulcers, prevention inter- ventions, support surface, tissue loading, turning frequency, weight shifting frequency, wheelchair. INTRODUCTION
  • 48. The formation a nd underlying c auses of pressure ulcers (PUs) are quite complex, with multiple influencing factors. However, by definition PUs cannot form without forces, or press ure, on tissue. Because tissue loading is the defining characteristic of PU formation, i t naturally garners significant attention in research in PU prevention strategies. Research has clearly demonstrated that the damaging effects of pressure are related to both its magnitude and duration. Simply stated, tissues can withstand higher loads for shorter periods of time. Kosiak first demon - strated this characteristic 50 years ago by applying vary- ing loads to the trochanters and ischial tuberosities of dogs for varying periods of time [1]. High loads for short durations and low loads for long durations induced ulcers, with the time-at-pre ssure curve following an inverse parabola. Reswick and Rogers tried to extend this animal research into clinica lly relevant i nformation, and using combinations of interviews and interface pressure measurements (IPMs), de termined a pressure-time rela - tionship that was similar to that of Kosiak [2]. Using the premise that both the ma gnitude and dura- tion of loading are important, we c an diagram a simple model of PU development (Figure 1) that illustrates the reasoning behind certain clin ical interventions. Pressure magnitude is managed by the selection of support sur- faces and postural supports as well as body posture upon supporting surfaces. Duration is a ddressed via turning and weight shifting frequency as well as with the use of dynamic surfaces that a ctively redistribute pressure on the body surfaces.
  • 49. Abbreviations: IPM = interface pressure measurement, Mobil- ity RERC = Rehabili tation Engineering Research Center on Wheeled Mobility, PU = pressure ulcer, SCI = spinal cord injury. *Address all correspondence to Stephen Sprigle, PhD, PT; Georgia Tech–Applied Physiology, 490 Tenth St NW, Atlanta, GA 30032-0156; 404-385-4302; fax: 404-894-9320. Email: [email protected] DOI:10.1682/JRRD.2010.05.0102 mailto:[email protected] 204 JRRD, Volume 48, Number 3, 2011 This article reviews the evidence supporting clinical interventions that address the magnitude of pressure and the duration of that pressure. Within this article, “support surfaces” will refer to devices designed for horizont al (mattresses, overlays) and s eated (wheelchair cushions) postures. The ter m “pressure” will refer to the force or load exerted over an area of the body or on a lo calized area of the body surface. LOADING A fairly extensive amount of re search has applied loads to tissues and monitored physiological outcomes. For obvious re asons, research with animal models uses controlled loading to create PUs or tissue necrosis, whereas human studies are limited to indirect measures, such as the effect of loading on blood flow.
  • 50. Tissue Response to Loading in Animal Models As mentioned previously, Kosiak u ndertook seminal research by applying load s to the trochan ters and isch ial tuberosities of dogs [1]. Load s ranged from 100 to 500 mmHg, and durations ranged from 1 to 1 2 hours. Kosiak monitored animals for 14 days postischemia to determine the occurrence of PUs. Dinsdale applied pres- sures between 45 and 1,500 mmHg for 3 hours to swine with and without paraplegia [3]. Normal pressure was com- bined with friction in half the specimens. The results indi- cated that no necrosis occurred with normal pressures below 150 mmHg, but in combination with friction, tissue changes could be seen after loading with 45 mmHg. Daniel et al. also studied swine with and without paraplegia [4]. Using an indenter to apply load at the greater troch anter, they found that application of 200 mmHg for 15 hours did not induce a PU. Ulcers were obtained by applyin g 500 mmHg for 4 hours and 800 mmHg for 8 hours. Linder-Ganz and Gefen exposed rat hind limbs to pressure magnitudes of 86, 262, and 525 mmHg for 2, 4, and 6 hours, respectively [5]. They used finite ele ment modeling to calculate internal stresses and concluded that tissue damage occurred with 13 kPa o f internal stress applied for 6 hours and 40 kPa of interna l stress applied for 2 ho urs. Both conditions represent an approximate stress application rate of 80 kPa/h. While this is not a comprehensive list of animal PU etiology research, collectiv ely the studies illustrat e results obtained by applying different loads over different durations (Table). The use of different sizes and shapes of indenters, dif ferent loading parameters , and different animal models explains why a range of mag nitudes and
  • 51. durations are linked to PU development. Despite these differences, the evidence suggests that both magnitude and duration of loa ds must be considered in PU preven - tion and validates the simple intervention model in Figure 1. Blood Flow Response to Loading in Humans While research has clearly shown a rela tionship between pressure magnitude and duration and tissue damage, these studies have not de fined a critical ma gni- tude above whic h ischemia occurs. Many studies have used controlled experimental approaches for determining the pressure at whic h blood flow to tissue cea ses with significantly varying results. Lassen and Holste in found that the pressure required for vascular occlusion approxi- mated diastolic pressures when the measured skin approached heart level [6]. Holloway et al. loaded the forearm and found that blood flow decreased as external pressure approached mean arterial pressure and that occlusion was reached at ~120 mmHg [7]. Ek et al. found “weak positive correlations” between blood flow during Figure 1. Rationale for redistribution of pressure. 205 SPRIGLE and SONENBLUM. Redistributing pressure to prevent pressure ulcers loading at the heel and systolic blood pressure [8]. Load- ing at the sac rum did not resu lt in the same relationship with blood pressure. Sangeorzan et al. de termined that
  • 52. 71 mmHg was need ed to occl ude flow over the tibialis anterior (a “soft” site) but only 42 mmHg occluded flow over the tibia (a “hard” site ) [9]. Bennett et al. measured occlusion pressure at the thenar eminences of nondis - abled subjects and found that 100 to 120 mmHg was nec- essary to occlude v essels in “low shear” conditions and 60 to 80 mmHg was needed in the pre sence of “high shear” conditions [10]. Bar re viewed the literature and concluded that a critical pressure is necessary to occlude blood flow and that while this threshold is related to ves- sel pressure, it appears to vary widely [11]. The animal and human studies contribute important information to the field of PU research by identifying tis- sue’s response to external loads. However, the results are very hard to apply clinically. Controlled loading at specific anatomical sites simply doe s not generalize to the person lying in bed or sitting in a wheelchair. For exa mple, the magnitudes and durations of loading used to induce dam - age in animals greatly exceed those deemed a cceptable in clinical environments. This apparent discrepancy does not invalidate either the research or the clinical interpretation of the findings. Rather, these animal tests inform us about the mechanism of injury and the complex relationships between the variables involved when supporting the human body in sitting or lying positions. To date, research has not identified a specific thresh- old at which loads can be d eemed harmful across people or sites on the body. Tissue’s tolerance to load varies according to the condition of the tissue and its location, age, hydration, and metabolism. All the factors common to PU risk assessment tools tend to influence how the tis- sue distributes the loading and its ability to wi thstand load.
  • 53. INTERVENTIONS Support Surfaces Support surfaces attempt to redistribute forces away from bony prominences, thereby reducing the magnitude of loading at these at-risk sites. In general, creating suc - cessful support surfaces is challenging because of the dif- ferences in ind ividual risk factors, as well as the complicated nature by which force is distributed through- out tissue. For example, when a person sits on a cushion, normal loading works in combination with shear and fric- tional forces to induce complex tissue distortion. Conse- quently, myriad support surface designs ex ist that have benefit for some p eople, but for the most part, no single surface is optimal for all persons. Two very general cate - gories of support surfaces can be defined: reactive sur- faces that respond to the load placed upon them and active surfaces that dynamically a lter the body–support-surface interface. Although active surfaces serve as a duration intervention, their primary role as a supp ort surface (thus affecting magnitude of loading) makes it natural to present them together with reactive support surfaces. Table. Examples of animal pressure ulcer models highlighting different loading parameters. Author Animal Model Loading Conditions Outcome ischial tuberosity 100–500 mmHg over 1–12 h Proposed inverse magnitude- duration
  • 54. relationship. Dinsdale [2] Swine with and w spinal injury 45– and without friction Loading at 45 mmHg in the presence of friction-induced damage. spinal injury 200 mmHg for 15 h, 500 mmHg for 4 h, 800 mmHg for 8 h No damage at 200 mmHg for 15 h, but damage under other conditions. Linder-Ganz & Gefen [4] Rat hind limbs 86, 262, and 525 mmHg for 2, 4, and 6 h, respectively Tissue damage occurred with loading rate of 80 kPa/h. 1. Kosiak M. Etiology and pathology of ischemic ulcers. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 1959;40(2):62–69. [PMID: 13618101] 2. Dinsdale SM. Decubitus ulcers in swine: Light and electron microscopy study of pathogenesis. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 1973;54(2):51–56. [PMID: 4692634] 3. Daniel RK, Wheatley D, Priest D. Pressure sores and paraplegia: An experimental model. Ann Plast Surg. 1985;15(1):41–
  • 55. DOI:10.1097/00000637-198507000-00005 4. Linder-Ganz E, Gefen A. Mechanical compression-induced pressure sores in rat hindlimb: Muscle stiffness, histology, and computational models. J Appl Phys- iol. 2004;96(6):2034– DOI:10.1152/japplphysiol.00888.2003 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/13618101 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/4595834 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/4083714 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/4083714 http://dx.doi.org/10.1097/00000637-198507000-00005 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/14766784 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/14766784 http://dx.doi.org/10.1152/japplphysiol.00888.2003 206 JRRD, Volume 48, Number 3, 2011 Judging the effectiveness of support surfaces is done with both direct and indirect methods. Indirect methods use physiological means such as blood flow , tissue oxy- genation, and interface pressure to judge performance. Direct methods follow a group of patients over time to determine PU occurrence. Direct methods are more valu- able but are harder to adminis ter and are limited in the number of interventions that can be inve stigated (i.e., types of surfaces). In their systematic review focused on randomiz ed controlled trials with PU development as an outcome, Cullum et al. used the term “constant low-pressure sup- port surfaces” to describe the myriad foam, air , water,
  • 56. and elastomeric mattresses, overlays, and cushions [12]. Their review of the literature concluded that these sur- faces outperform standard hospital mattresses in prevent- ing PU formation. Comparisons between dif ferent constant low-pressure surfaces did not result in definitive outcomes. In othe r words, differences across the more common reactive surfaces have not been demonstrated in terms of PU outcomes. Studies on wheelchair cushions are not as common as those on mattresses, but informative evidence is still available. Indirect measures, specifically interface pres- sures, comprise the bulk of studies on cushions [13–16]. Researchers have shown tha t high s eated interface pres- sures were associated with PU occurrence [17–19]. Therefore, despite the limita tions in IPM as a less accu- rate representation of localized loading [5,20–22], it can be useful in selecting cushions. Because active surfaces vary loading of pa rticular regions of the body, they intend to alter both the magni- tude and duration of loading. Active surfa ces are avail- able for both mattresses and wheelchair cushions, with mattresses being use d and studie d more freque ntly. In part, this is the result of a funding decision in the United States by the Ce nters for Me dicare and Medic aid Ser- vices to not pay for powered wheelchair cushions for PU prevention. Evidence on commercially available a ctive cushions is limited to seco ndary outcomes [16,23]. Because the secondary measurements vary throughout the cycle of ac tive cushions, the results of such studies are hard to apply clinically. Studies of active mattresses and overlays a re more common than those of cushions and have used both direct and indirect outcomes. Two recent systematic reviews do
  • 57. a very thorough job of covering the literature on alternat- ing pressure mattresses so the details will not be repeated here [12,24]. Cullum et al. focused exclusively on direct outcomes (PU development), while Vanderwee et al. extended their review to include studies with indirect out- come measurements and a lternative study designs. But both groups reached the same conclusions: alternating pressure air mattres ses are better than standard hospital mattresses but their bene fit over constant low -pressure mattresses is unclear. Furthermore, differences across types of alternating pressure air mattresses were not dem- onstrated. Active surfaces also provide inc reased poten- tial for mechanical problems and user error compared with some alternatives. One major limitation of most of the reviewed studies, as pointed out by Cullum et al., was that turning schedules were not controlled. Therefore, it is possible that nurses made a point to turn patients on the standard mattresses more frequently than those on the active surfaces because of a perceived need for increased intervention. If true, than comparable outcomes could come with the benefit of re duced clinical intervention time for the active surfa ce, but research to evaluate this possibility is needed. Interventions for Reducing Duration of Loading The body’s motor and sensory systems are responsi- ble for ensuring that we move periodically to change our posture. This may be in the form of discomfort eliciting movement or subconscious postural shifts or fidgeting. Many studies over the years have monitored movements in chairs a s metrics of co mfort and function [25–28], thereby establishing a base of knowledge about sitting as a dynamic activity. Many people at risk of dev eloping PUs are either unable to effectively reposition themselves
  • 58. or are not provided with the sensory feedback that elicits movements. Therefore, that loss of mobility and sensa- tion are identified as risk fa ctors within every PU risk assessment scale is not surprising. We use this information to tar get movement as a means of redistributing pressure and altering the duration of loading on tissues. Cli nically, this includes turning schedules for patients who are in bed and weight shifting strategies for those who are seated. Turning Frequency In a st udy on PU prev ention interventions, Richard - son et al. found that manual repositioning was the most commonly used intervention and that it was also the most expensive [29]. The idea of necessary repositioning has appeared throughout literature and textbooks since the 207 SPRIGLE and SONENBLUM. Redistributing pressure to prevent pressure ulcers 1800s [30]. Evidence that some repositioning is neces- sary can be found across decades of literature. In the United S tates, common practice requires that at-risk patients be repositioned at least every 2 hours if consistent with overall patient goals [31]. Despite efforts by a number of researchers to identify the origins of this practice, or at the very least identify evidence supporting the 2-hour turning practice, no strong scientific support exists [30,32–33]. In fact, earlier texts often included
  • 59. suggestions that the turning schedule depend on the mag- nitude of loading and condition of the patient. Therefore, the s tandard practice of using the sa me turning schedules independent of support surface is not reflective of earlier work. Re cent evidence demonstrates the need to account for the support surface in determining the optimal turning schedule. Defloor et a l. showed that 2- and 3-hour turning schedules resulted in the develop- ment of PUs in 14 to 24 percent of patients lying on standard mattresses. A 6-hour turning sc hedule for patients lying on a viscoelastic mattress resulted in simi - lar outcomes, but a 4-hour turning schedule for patie nts lying on a visc oelastic mattress signific antly reduced stage II PUs . Other research suggests that turning ma y need to occur more frequently than every 2 hours and that sufficient pressure reduction surfaces are needed in addi - tion to turning [32,34–36]. Recently, Vanderwee et al., using a pressu re-reducing mattress, found no difference between repositioning patient s every 4 hours and alter - nating between 2 hours in late ral and 4 h ours in supine [36]. In both interventions, more than 16 percent of parti- cipants developed a PU. Additionally, two studies of sec- ondary outcomes demonstrated that redness and ox ygen reduction while lying in bed occurred in less than 2 hours [37]. Furthermore, in studies on turning, patients who are able will change posture between scheduled reposition- ings. As a result, these subjects are exposed to more posi- tion changes than offered by the intervention, which may mask a need for more frequent repositioning in those unable to reposition themselves [36]. The necessary repo- sitioning frequency may be so high that implementation is impractical for immobile patients [32]. Positioning Devices and Posture The entire premise behind turning is obviously to
  • 60. reduce the amount of time di fferent body surfaces are exposed to loading. Operati onally, many facilities sequence between supine and two side-lying postures. The loading at specific body surfaces is highly dependent on the resulting postures an d any positioning devices used. For example, side lyin g may expose a malleolus to damaging loading but proper positioning of the lower limbs and judicious use of positioning devices can effec- tively reduce loa ds from this bony prominence ( Figure 2(a)). Adopting a supine posture with the head of the bed elevated alters loading on the buttocks, which is why it is a controversial posture. Elevating only the head of the bed increases both the normal and frictional forces on the sacrum [38–39]. Mechanics suggests that as the head ele- vates, more of the upper-body weight will be transmitted through the buttocks to the supporting surface. In addi- tion, the tendency to slide is increased as the trunk sup - port is inclined. The complication is that it is a functional posture, adopted so people can converse with others , read, and eat, to name a fe w activities. Some of the fric - tional forces can be counteracted by raising the foot of Figure 2. (a) Use of positioning devices to redistribute pressure and (b) raising foot of bed counteracts sliding tendency. 208 JRRD, Volume 48, Number 3, 2011 the bed, but this will not reduce the normal forces on the
  • 61. buttocks [38] (Figure 2(b)). The seated posture also affects how loads are re distrib- uted. Sitting on a sling seat with a pelvic obliquity induces asymmetric loading on the isch ial tuberosities, not to men- tion contributing to postural instability (Figure 3(a)). A slouched, kyphotic posture is typ ified by p osterior pelvic tilt, a posture that loads the sacrum and coccyx while seated (Figure 3(b)) [40–41]. In summary, body posture and positioning have a direct relationship to loads on specific body sites, which is why posture must be co nsidered when devising PU prevention strategies. Weight Shifting Wheelchair users are often at high risk of developing sitting-acquired PUs. Persons with absent or diminished sensation and/or mobility are always at high risk of PUs [42–43]. A variety of maneuvers to shift body weight off the buttocks are taught to wheelchair users at risk of PUs. They can push down on the seat or armrests to lift the buttocks off the cushion s urface (Figure 4(a)), lean for - ward to rest t heir trunk upon the lower limbs (Figure 4(b)), or lean to one side and then lean to the opposite side (Figure 4(c)). Persons who use power wheelchairs and cannot independently perform these maneuvers are sometimes prescribed variable position wheelchairs that incorporate powered tilt and/or recline to redistribute weight off the buttock area (Figure 5). Most guidelines that suggest weight shift or pressure relief frequency have been developed for p ersons with spinal cord injury (SCI) because of the effect of SCI on sensation and mobility. For the SCI po pulation, recom-
  • 62. mendations for weight shift frequency have typically ranged from 15 to 30 seconds every 15 to 30 minutes to 60 seconds every hour [44–47]. Based on the wide range of these guidelines, one can infer that they were based on a combination of clinical experience, clinical insight, and research findings. In addition to weight shift frequency, one must also consider the duration for which a weight shift is held . In other words, not only do wheelchair users have to perform weight shifts regularly, they must attend to the duration of these maneuvers. The ability to sustain a weight shift is dependent on myriad factors, including functional ability, strength, flexibility, and postural control [46]. A 2003 study measured tissue perfusion to investigate the length of time required for tissue to rep erfuse in an SCI cohort ( n = 46) [48]. The mean duration of weight shift required to return transcutaneous partial pressure of oxygen to unloaded lev- els following upright sitting was 1 minu te 51 seconds (range = 42– 210 seconds). This fin ding suggests that the Figure 3. (a) Pelvic obliquity from sitting on sling seat and (b) posterior pelvic tilt loads sacrum and coccyx. 209 SPRIGLE and SONENBLUM. Redistributing pressure to prevent pressure ulcers duration of weight shifts currently recommended (i.e., 15– 30 seconds) is inadequ ate. Further, this suggests that th e
  • 63. common practice of sitting push-ups is not sustainable for many to achieve reperfusio n. Consequently, the authors supported the use o f alternate, sustainab le methods of weight shift, namely fo rward lean, lateral lean, and rear - ward tilt. Partial weight shifts may also allow for better sus- tainability by persons with SCI. Figure 4. (a) Push-up weight shift, (b) forward-lean weight shift, and (c) side- lean weight shift. Figure 5. (a) Manual Tilt-in-Space wheelchair and (b) Power T ilt-in- Space wheelchair. Images used with permission. ©Invacare Corporation. 210 JRRD, Volume 48, Number 3, 2011 Three recent studies inve stigating PU prevalence in an SCI cohort considered weight shift behavior as a potential risk factor [49–51]. None of the st udies found weight shift behavior or frequency of weight shifts to be associated with PU occ urrence. However, each of the studies used self-report to measure weight shift practices. Further objective analyses ar e needed to determine the role of weight shifts in PU prevention. CONCLUSIONS The review of res earch corroborated the clinical
  • 64. interventions commonly used for load redistribution but also identified areas of uncertainty. As with all means of prevention, some interventions are better supported than others and some interventions have a legacy quality to them and little el se. Nonetheless, several clinically ori- ented suggestions can be made. Support Surface Assessment Selections of mattre sses, overlays, and cushions should be based upon as sessment. Research is cle ar that individual factors can contribute to PU susceptibility, and all the PU risk assessment scales are based upon indi - vidualized evaluation. Research has also shown that indi- vidualized evaluation improves the selection of mattress [52] and wheelchair cus hions [53]. Long-standing evi- dence supports the use of seating clinics to select and pre- scribe wheelchair cushions [54]. One of the benefits of this type of individuali zed evaluation is its educational aspect in informing patients and clients about skin health and proper equipment use. Interface Pressure Interface pressure can be used to identify a reas of unacceptably high pressures and to ensure a s ite is a de- quately off-loaded during posture changes or a weight shift. We advocate for use of pressure mapping to rule out products rather than as a sole means to presc ribe a par- ticular product [21]. For exa mple, if the interface pres- sure under the ischial tuberosity is deemed too high for a particular person by a clinician, then the clinician should deem that p roduct unacceptable. That said, one cannot infer that published IPM va lues will generalize to other clients or patients. Another useful role for IPM is as sess- ing how posture or position changes influence loading on
  • 65. tissue. Repositioning in bed or while seated is necessary to unweight different parts of the body. IPM can offer visual feedback to clinicians, patients, and clients as they sequence through different postures. Weight Shift and Turning Frequency Periodic repositioning is an important preventative measure. Patients and clients who can independently redistribute pressure should be educated to do so and taught strategies to ensure compliance. Persons who can- not reposition must rely on others to set and follow a rou- tine. Evidence on how often a weight shi ft should be performed and evidence behind turning schedules is lim- ited. The odds are that repositioning frequency is not the same for all people and surfaces. This can be inferred by the wealth of evidence in dicating the individualized nature of PU ris k and supports the approach that reposi- tioning frequency should reflect the person, his or her equipment, and the environment of use. • Standard hospital beds are poor support surfaces. Ample evidence has show n that standard ma ttresses are inadequate to prevent PU s. Even relati vely “low tech” mattresses and overlays offer better prevention [12]. • Increasing activity has many health benefits, includ- ing tissue health. In a study of more than 600 persons with SCI with and without a history of recurrent PUs, Krause and Broderick identif ied behaviors that were shown to be protective [50]. These behaviors included a healthy lifestyle, fitness, and exercise. Putting peo- ple into equipment and postures that permit functional activity addresses the key PU risk fac tor of immobil-
  • 66. ity. We should promote reaching, leaning, and moving as a means of promoting functional independence and maintaining skin integrity. • The European and U.S. National Pressure Ulcer Advi- sory panels have recently released their joi nt Interna- tional Pressure Ulcer Guidelines for Prevention and Treatment. The document addresses both PU preven- tion and PU trea tment by assessing many clinical interventions. • When reviewing conflicting literature, pay close atten- tion to external validity. Literature regarding pressure redistribution and support surfaces is o ften equivocal and may be contradictory. This can oc cur because of differences in methods, measurements, and subjects. When reviewing literature, pay attention to how the studies reflect your clinical situation. P erhaps some studies better reflect your patient mix or techniques. 211 SPRIGLE and SONENBLUM. Redistributing pressure to prevent pressure ulcers ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Study concept and design: S. Sprigle, S. Sonenblum. Analysis and interpretation of data: S. Sprigle, S. Sonenblum. Drafting of manuscript: S. Sprigle, S. Sonenblum. Critical revision of manuscript for important intellectual S. Sprigle, S. Sonenblum.
  • 67. Administrative, technical, or materia S. Sonenblum. Financial Disclosures: The authors have declared that no competing interests exist. Funding/Support: This material was based on work supported by the Rehabilitation Engineering Research Center on Wheeled Mobility (Mobility RERC) and the Georgia Institute of Technology. The Mobil- ity RERC is funded by the National Institute on Disability and Reha- bilitation Research of the U.S. Department of Education (grant H133E080003). Additional Contributions: We thank Dr. Kath Bogie for her guid- ance in outlining the manuscript and offering important feedback. Disclaimer: The opinions contained in this article are those of the authors and do not necessarily reflect those of the U.S. Department of Education or the Georgia Institute of Technology. REFERENCES 1. Kosiak M. Etiology and pathology of ischemic ulcers. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 1959;40(2):62–69. [PMID: 13618101] 2. Reswick JB, Rogers JE. Experience at Rancho Los Amigos Hospital with devices and techniques to prevent pressure sores. In: Kenedi RM, Cowden JM, Scales JT, editors. Bed- sore biomechanics. Baltimore (MD): University Park Press; 1976. p. 301–10.
  • 68. 3. Dinsdale SM. Decubitus ulcers in swine: Light and elec- tron microscopy study of pathogenesis. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 1973;54(2):51–56. [PMID: 4692634] 4. Daniel RK, Wheatley D, Priest D. Pressure sores and para- plegia: An experimental model. Ann Plast Surg. 1985;15(1): 41– DOI:10.1097/00000637-198507000-00005 5. Linder-Ganz E, Gefen A. Mechanical compression-induced pressure sores in rat hindlimb: Muscle stif fness, histology, and computational models. J Appl Physiol. 2004;96(6): 2034– DOI:10.1152/japplphysiol.00888.2003 6. Lassen NA, Holstein P. Use of radioisotopes in assessment of distal blood flow and d istal blood pressure in arterial insufficiency. Surg Clin North Am. 1974;54(1):39– [PMID: 4814522] 7. Holloway GA, Daly CH, Kennedy D, Chimoskey J. Effects of external pressure loadi ng on human skin blood flow measured by 133Xe clearance. J Appl Physiol. 1976;40(4): 597–600. [PMID: 931880] 8. Ek AC, Gustavsson G, Lewis DH. Skin blood flow in rela- tion to external pressure an d temperature in the supine position on a standard hospital mattress. Scand J Rehabil Med. 1987;19(3):121–26. [PMID: 3441774] 9. Sangeorzan BJ, Harrington RM, Wyss CR, Czerniecki JM, Matsen FA 3rd. Circulatory and mech anical response of skin to loading. J Orthop Res. 1989;7(3):425– DOI:10.1002/jor.1100070315
  • 69. 10. Bennett L, Kavner D, Lee BK, Trainor FA. Shear vs pres- sure as causative factors in skin blood flow occlusion. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 1979;60(7):309–14. [PMID: 454129] 11. Bar CA. The resp onse of tissues to applied pressure [dis- sertation]. [Cardiff (UK)]: University of Wales College of Medicine; 1988. 12. Cullum N, McIn nes E, Bell-Syer SE, Legood R. Support surfaces for pressure ulcer prevention. C ochrane Database Syst Rev. 2004;(3):CD001735. [PMID: 15266452] 13. Bar CA. Ev aluation of cushions using dynamic pressure measurement. Prosthet Orthot Int. 1991;15(3):232– [PMID: 1780227] 14. Ferguson-Pell MW, Wilkie IC, Reswick JB, Barbenel JC. Pressure sore prevention for the wheelchair-bound spinal injury patient. Paraplegia. 1980;18(1):42– [PMID: 7375126] 15. Garber SL, Krouskop TA. Body build and its relationship to pressure distribution in the seated wheelchair patient. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 1982;63(1):17–20. [PMID: 7055413] 16. Swain ID, Peters E. T he effects of posture, body mass index and wheelchair adjustment on interface pressure. Sal- isbury (England): Medical Devices Agency; 1997. 17. Brienza DM, Karg PE, Geyer MJ, Kelsey S, Trefler E. The relationship between pressure ulcer incidence and buttock- seat cushion interface pressure in at-risk elderly wheelchair users. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 2001;82(4):529– DOI:10.1053/apmr.2001.21854
  • 70. 18. Drummond D, Breed AL, Narechania R. Relationship of spine deformity and pelvic obliquity on sitting pressure dis- tributions and decubitus ulceration. J Pediatr Orthop. 1985; 5(4):396–402. [PMID: 3894415] 19. Conine TA, Hershler C, Daechsel D, Peel C, Pearson A. Pressure ulcer prophylaxis in elderly patients using poly- urethane foam or Jay wh eelchair cushions. Int J Reh abil Res. 1994;17(2):123– DOI:10.1097/00004356-199406000-00003 20. Oomens CW, Loerakker S, Bader DL. The importance of internal strain as opposed to interface pressure in the p re- vention of pressure related deep tissue injury. J Tissue Via- bility. 2010;19(2):35– DOI:10.1016/j.jtv.2009.11.002 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/13618101 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/4695834 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/4083714 http://dx.doi.org/10.1097/00000637-198507000-00005 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/14766784 http://dx.doi.org/10.1152/japplphysiol.00888.2003 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/4814522 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/931880 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/3441774 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/2703934 http://dx.doi.org/10.1002/jor.1100070315 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/454129 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/15266452 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/1780227 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/7375126 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/7055413 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/11295017 http://dx.doi.org/10.1053/apmr.2001.21854 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/3894415
  • 71. http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/7960335 http://dx.doi.org/10.1097/00004356-199406000-00003 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/20005716 http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.jtv.2009.11.002 212 JRRD, Volume 48, Number 3, 2011 21. Pipkin L, Sprigl e S. Effect of model design, cushion con- struction, and interface pressure mats on interface pressure and immersion. J Rehabil Res Dev. 2008;45(6):875– DOI:10.1682/JRRD.2007.06.0089 22. Reenalda J, Jannink M, Nederhand M, IJzerman M. Clini- cal use of interface pressure to predict pressure ulcer devel- opment: A systematic review. Assist Technol. 2009;21(2): 76– DOI:10.1080/10400430903050437 23. Stockton L, Rit halia S. Is dynamic seating a modality worth considering in the prevent ion of pressure ulcers? J Tissue Viability. 2008;17(1):15– DOI:10.1016/j.jtv.2007.09.011 24. Vanderwee K, Grypdonck M, Defloor T. Alternating pres- sure air mattresses as prevention for pressure ulcers: A lit- erature review. Int J Nurs Stud. 2008;45(5):784– DOI:10.1016/j.ijnurstu.2007.07.003 25. De Looze MP, Kuijt-Evers LF, Van Dieën J. Sitting comfort and discomfort and t he relationships with objective meas- ures. Ergonomics. 2003;46(10):985–
  • 72. DOI:10.1080/0014013031000121977 26. Fenety PA, Putnam C, Walker JM. In-chair movement: Valid- ity, reliability and implications for measuring sitting discom- fort. Appl Ergon. 2000;31(4):383– DOI:10.1016/S0003-6870(00)00003-X 27. Grandjean E. Sitting pos ture of car drivers from the point of view of er gonomics. In: Ob orne DJ, Levis JA, ed itors. Human factors in transport research. New York (NY): Aca- demic Press; 1980. p. 240–48. 28. Reenalda J, Van Geffen P, Nederhand M, Jannink M, IJzer- man M, Rietman H. An alysis of healthy sitting behavior: Interface pressure distribution and subcutaneous tiss ue oxygenation. J Rehabil Res Dev. 2009;46(5):577– DOI:10.1682/JRRD.2008.12.0164 29. Richardson GM, Gardner S, Frant z RA. Nursing assess- ment: Impact on type and cost of interventions to prevent pressure ulcers. J W ound Ostomy Continence Nurs. 1998;25(6):273– DOI:10.1016/S1071-5754(98)90024-9 30. Hagisawa S, Ferguson-Pell M. Evidence supporting the use of two-hourly turning for pressure ulcer prevention. J Tis- sue Viability. 2008;17(3):76– DOI:10.1016/j.jtv.2007.10.001 31. Pressure ulcers in adults: Prediction and prevention. Wash- ington (DC): Agency for Health Care Policy and Research; 1992. 32. Clark M. Repositioning to prevent pressure sores—What is
  • 73. the evidence? Nurs Stand. 1998;13(3):58–60. [PMID: 9847811] 33. Krapfl LA, Gray M. Does regular repositioning prevent pressure ulcers? J Wound Ostomy Continence Nurs. 2008; 35(6):571–77. [PMID: 19018196] 34. Defloor T, De Bacquer D, Grypdonck MH. The ef fect of various combinations of t urning and pressure reducing devices on the incidence of pressure ulcers. Int J Nurs Stud. 2005;42(1):37– DOI:10.1016/j.ijnurstu.2004.05.013 35. Gefen A. How much time do es it take to get a pressure ulcer? Integrated evidence from human, a nimal, and in vitro studies. Ostomy Wound Manage. 2008;54(10):26– [PMID: 18927481] 36. Vanderwee K, Grypdonck MH, De Bacquer D, Defloor T. Effectiveness of turning with unequal time intervals on the incidence of pressure ulcer lesions. J Ad v Nurs. 2007; 57(1):59– DOI:10.1111/j.1365-2648.2006.04060.x 37. Knox DM, Anderson TM, Anderson PS. Effects of differ- ent turn in tervals on skin of healthy older adults. Adv Wound Care. 1994;7(1):48–52. [PMID: 8149048] 38. Harada C, Shigematsu T, Hagisawa S. The effect of 10- degree leg elevation and 30-degree head elevation on body displace- ment and sacral interface pressures over a 2-hour period. J Wound Ostomy Continence Nurs. 2002;29(3):143– DOI:10.1067/mjw.2002.123645
  • 74. 39. Peterson M, Schwab W, McCutcheon K, Van Oostrom JH, Gravenstein N, Caruso L. Effects of elevating the head of bed on inte rface pressure in volunteers. Crit Care Med. 2008;36(11):3038– DOI:10.1097/CCM.0b013e31818b8dbd 40. Hobson DA, Tooms RE. Seated lumbar/pelvic alignment. A comparison between spinal cord-injured and noninjured groups. Spine. 1992;17(3):293–98. [PMID: 156616 DOI:10.1097/00007632-199203000-00009 41. Sprigle S, S chuch JZ. Using seat contour measurements during seating evaluations of in dividuals with SCI. Assist Technol. 1993;5(1):24– DOI:10.1080/10400435.1993.10132204 42. Bergstrom N, Braden B, Boynton P, Bruch S. Using a research-based assessment scale in clinical practice. Nurs Clin North Am. 1995;30(3):539–51. [PMID: 7567578] 43. Salzberg CA, Byrne DW , Cayten CG, Van Niewerburgh P, Murphy JG, Viehbeck M. A new pressure ulcer risk assess- ment scale for in dividuals with spinal cord injury. Am J Phys Med Rehabil. 1996;75(2):96– DOI:10.1097/00002060-199603000-00004 44. Regan M, Teasell RW, Keast D, Mortenson WB, Aubut J. Pressure ulcers following spinal cord in jury. In: Eng JJ, Teasell RW, Miller WC, W olfe DL, T ownson AF, Aubut JA, Abramson C, Hsieh JT, Connolly S, edit ors. Spinal http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/19009473 http://dx.doi.org/10.1682/JRRD.2007.06.0089 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/19715252 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/19715252 http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/10400430903050437
  • 75. http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/18293767 http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.jtv.2007.09.011 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/17919638 http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.ijnurstu.2007.07.003 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/12850935 http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/0014013031000121977 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/10975665 http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S0003-6870%2800%2900003-X http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/19882492 http://dx.doi.org/10.1682/JRRD.2008.12.0164 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/9919142 http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S1071-5754%2898%2990024-9 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/18722313 http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.jtv.2007.10.001 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/9847811 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/19018196 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/15582638 http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.ijnurstu.2004.05.013 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/18927481 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/17184374 http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2648.2006.04060.x http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/8149048 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/12011906 http://dx.doi.org/10.1067/mjw.2002.123645 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/18824905 http://dx.doi.org/10.1097/CCM.0b013e31818b8dbd http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/1566167 http://dx.doi.org/10.1097/00007632-199203000-00009 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/10148621 http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/10400435.1993.10132204 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/7567578 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/8630201 http://dx.doi.org/10.1097/00002060-199603000-00004 213
  • 76. SPRIGLE and SONENBLUM. Redistributing pressure to prevent pressure ulcers cord injury rehabilitation evidence. Vancouver (Canada): SCIRE; 2006. 45. Alverzo JP, Rosenberg JH, Sorensen CA, DeLeon SS. Nurs- ing care and education for patients with spinal cord injury. In: Sisto SA, D ruin E, Sl iwinski MM, editors. Spinal cord injuries: Management and rehabilitation. St. Louis (MO): Mosby; 2009. DOI:10.1016/B978-032300699-6.10003-6 46. Sliwinski MM, Druin E. Intervention principles and position change. In: Sisto SA, Druin E, Sliwinski MM, editors. Spinal cord injuries: Management and rehabilitation. St. Louis (MO): Mosby; 2009. DOI:10.1016/B978-032300699-6.10007-3 47. Nawoczenski DA. Pressure sores: Prevention and manage- ment. In: Buchanan LE, Nawo czenski DA, edito rs. Spinal cord injury: Concepts and management approaches. Balti- more (MD): Williams & Wilkins; 1987. 48. Coggrave MJ, Rose LS. A s pecialist seating asses sment clinic: Changing pressure relief practice. Spinal Cord. 2003;41(12):692– DOI:10.1038/sj.sc.3101527 49. Raghavan P, Raza WA, Ahmed YS, Chambe rlain MA. Prevalence of pressure sores in a community sample of spi- nal injury patients. Clin Rehabil. 2003;17(8):879– DOI:10.1191/0269215503cr692oa 50. Krause JS, Broderick L. Patterns of recu rrent pressure ulcers after s pinal cord injury: Identification of risk and
  • 77. protective factors 5 or more years after onset. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 2004;85(8):1257– DOI:10.1016/j.apmr.2003.08.108 51. Garber SL, Rintala DH, Ha rt KA, Fuhrer MJ. Pressure ulcer risk in spinal cord injury: Predictors of ulcer status over 3 years. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 2000;81(4):465– DOI:10.1053/mr.2000.3889 52. Russell T, Bsn AL, Lohman JA. A medical center’s experi- ence with managing specialty bed usage. J Wound Ostomy Continence Nurs. 2001;28(6):274– DOI:10.1067/mjw.2001.119011 53. Garber SL, Dyerly LR. Wheelchair cushions for persons with spinal cord injury: An update. Am J Occup Ther. 1991;45(6):550–54. [PMID: 2063944] 54. Krouskop TA, Noble PC, Garber SL, Spencer W A. The effectiveness of preventive management in reducing the occurrence of pressu re sores. J Rehabil Res Dev . 1983; 20(1):74–83. [PMID: 6887068] Submitted for publication May 26, 2010. Accepted in revised form August 16, 2010. This article and any supplementary material should be Sprigle S, Sonenblum S. As sessing evidence supporting redistribution of pressure for pressure ulcer prevention: A review. J Rehabil Res Dev. 2011;48(3):203– DOI:10.1682/JRRD.2010.05.0102 http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/B978-032300699-6.10003-6 http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/B978-032300699-6.10007-3
  • 78. http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/14639449 http://dx.doi.org/10.1038/sj.sc.3101527 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/14682560 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/14682560 http://dx.doi.org/10.1191/0269215503cr692oa http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/15295750 http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.apmr.2003.08.108 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/10768537 http://dx.doi.org/10.1053/mr.2000.3889 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/11707759 http://dx.doi.org/10.1067/mjw.2001.119011 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/2063944 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/6887068 Copyright of Journal of Rehabilitation Research & Development is the property of VA Prosthetics Research & Development Center and its content may not be copied or emailed to multiple sites or posted to a listserv without the copyright holder's express written permission. However, users may print, download, or email articles for individual use. This content is in the Public Domain. 477 JRRDJRRD Volume 50, Number 4, 2013Pages 477–488
  • 79. Patient repositioning and pressure ulcer risk—Monitoring interface pressures of at-risk patients Matthew J. Peterson, PhD;1* Nikolaus Gravenstein, MD;2 Wilhelm K. Schwab, PhD;2 Johannes H. van Oostrom, PhD;1 Lawrence J. Caruso, MD2 1J. Crayton Pruitt Family Department of Biomedical Engineering, University of Florida College of Engineering, Gainesville, FL; 2Department of Anesthesiology, University of Florida College of Medicine, Gainesville, FL Abstract—Repositioning patients regularly to prevent pres- sure ulcers and reduce interface pressures is the standard of care, yet prior work has found that standard repositioning does not relieve all areas of at-risk tissue in nondisabled subjects. To determine whether this holds true for high-risk patients, we assessed the effectiveness of routine repositioning in relieving at-risk tissue of the perisacral area using interface pressure mapping. Bedridden patients at risk for pressure ulcer forma- tion (n = 23, Braden score <18) had their perisacral skin-bed interface pressures recorded every 30 s while they received routine repositioning care for 4–6 h. All participants had spe- cific skin areas (206 +/– 182 cm2) that exceeded elevated pres- sure thresholds for >95% of the observation period. Thirteen participants were observed in three distinct positions (supine, turned left, turned right), and all had specific skin areas (166 +/– 184 cm2) that exceeded pressure thresholds for >95% of the observation period. At-risk patients have skin areas that are likely always at risk throughout their hospital stay despite repositioning. Healthcare providers are unaware of the actual tissue-relieving effectiveness (or lack thereof) of their reposi- tioning interventions, which may partially explain why pressure ulcer mitigation strategies are not always successful. Relieving
  • 80. at-risk tissue is a necessary part of pressure ulcer prevention, but the repositioning practice itself needs improvement. Key words: decubitus ulcer, interface pressure, patient reposi- tioning, pressure, pressure sore, pressure ulcer, pressure ulcer risk, prevention, standard of care, triple-jeopardy area. INTRODUCTION Pressure ulcers are a high-risk, high-volume, and high-cost problem for hospitalized and bedridden patients. Overall pressure ulcer prevalence rates have been reported at 12.3 percent across all facilities, with prevalence being highest in long-term acute care facili- ties (22%), and facility-acquired prevalence being high- est in adult intensive care units (8.8%–10.3%) [1]. Preventing pressure ulcers and reducing their incidence is an ongoing challenge because they are associated with increased cost, length of stay, morbidity, and mortality. Managing one full-thickness ulcer can cost up to $70,000 [2], and over $17 billion is spent on pressure ulcer treat- ments annually in the United States [3]. Note: The authors would like to dedicate this article to the memory of their colleague Dr. Schwab. Abbreviations: BMI = body mass index, HOB = head of bed, NPUAP = National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel, q2h = every 2 h, SLR = supine-left-right. *Address all correspondence to Matthew J. Peterson, PhD; James A. Haley Department of Veterans Affairs Medical Center (151R), HSR&D/RR&D Center of Excellence, 8900 Grand Oak Circle, Tampa, FL 33637; 813-558-3979; fax: 813-558-3990. Email: [email protected] http://dx.doi.org/10.1682/JRRD.2012.03.0040
  • 81. mailto:[email protected] 478 JRRD, Volume 50, Number 4, 2013 A pressure ulcer, as defined by the National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel (NPUAP), is a “localized injury to the skin and/or underlying tissue usually over a bony promi- nence, as a result of pressure, or pressure in combination with shear and/or friction” [4]. It is widely accepted that this mechanical loading is the main cause of pressure ulcer formation; however, the pathophysiological responses to this loading are less agreed upon [5]. Theo- ries include localized ischemia [6], reperfusion injury [7], impaired interstitial fluid flow [8], and sustained cell deformation [9]. Tissue-loading models have been devel- oped to study pressure ulcer formation, and results have shown that acute stresses and strains in the deep tissue (fat, muscle), which is more susceptible to damage than the skin, present themselves before they are apparent in the superficial tissue [5,10–11]. However, tissue pres- sures greater than capillary pressure can be endured for some time before ischemia results [12]. Pressure ulcers result when increased pressure on the skin and subcutaneous tissues exceeds the local capillary pressure, which compromises blood flow and results in ischemia and decreased oxygen delivery [13]. Healthy capillary pressures typically range from 10 to 30 mm Hg [14]; however, capillary pressures may be lower for indi- viduals in poor health [15–16]. Studies on blood flow in response to loading vary in the amount of pressure required to stop or reduce blood flow and oxygen deliv- ery as well as by anatomical location or tissue type [17–
  • 82. 21]. Therefore, no widely accepted value exists that will ultimately lead to pressure ulceration [5,22]. When pres- sures exceed capillary pressure, tissue hypoperfusion, accumulation of metabolites, and impairment of tissue reperfusion may occur, all of which can damage the tis- sue [23–25]. It is well established in animal and human studies that not only is the magnitude of pressure a factor for tissue damage but the duration is important as well— the greater the pressure, the less time it takes until dam- age occurs [6,22,26–29]. Over time, prolonged high pres- sure applied to a tissue area will inevitably cause damage. Interface pressure is the perpendicular force per unit area between the support surface and the body. Interface pres- sures are greatest around the sacrum, coccyx, and ischial tuberosities, so it is not surprising that the majority of pressure ulcers develop near these locations [30–31]. How- ever, note that tissue interface pressures do not directly measure internal tissue and capillary pressures [22]. The Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services recently designated pressure ulcers as a quality measure, and consequently, they will not reimburse additional patient expenses resulting from a reasonably preventable condition that occurs while providing care [32–33]. Thus, pressure ulcers have become a liability for hospitals, long-term care facilities, and other healthcare providers [34–35]. However, disagreement persists about the pre- sumed inherent preventability of all pressure ulcers [36– 37]. To address this issue, the NPUAP hosted a multidis- ciplinary consensus conference in 2010 and redefined what is generally considered avoidable and unavoidable. The group unanimously agreed that most, but not all, pressure ulcers are avoidable [37]. Consensus was reached that “unavoidable pressure ulcers may develop in patients who are hemodynamically unstable, terminally
  • 83. ill, have certain medical devices in place, and are nonad- herent with artificial nutrition or repositioning” [37]. PATIENT REPOSITIONING Repositioning patients regularly—every 2 h (q2h)— to prevent sustained high pressures on any particular tis- sue area is the standard of care [2,16,37–40]. However, several recent studies in which repositioning was used as the primary intervention strategy failed to reduce the incidence of pressure ulcer formation [39–41]. Addition- ally, the NPUAP conference could not reach a consensus that q2h repositioning should be the standard of care. However, they did agree that q2h repositioning should be the “guideline for care” when clinically appropriate [37]. It was also unanimously agreed that pressure-redistributing surfaces cannot replace patient repositioning care [37]. Our prior work found that standard, lateral turning by experienced nurses does not reliably relieve all areas of high skin-bed interface pressures in the perisacral region of nondisabled adult subjects [42], i.e., the collective tis- sue area around the sacrum, coccyx, and ischial tuberosi- ties. Even though subjects are repositioned and the perisacral area is no longer touching the mattress, this perisacral skin area remains exposed to significant levels of interface pressure between the pillow or wedge that is supporting the laterally turned position. Furthermore, specific skin areas remain at risk even after being placed in all three positions: supine, turned left, and turned right. These specific skin regions are termed “triple-jeopardy areas” because the same tissue remains at risk while in any of the three different positions [42]. This may help explain why pressure ulcers still develop despite implementation of
  • 84. 479 PETERSON et al. Patient repositioning and pressure ulcer risk standard preventive measures, including scheduled patient repositioning. To determine whether this is the case for at-risk patients, this study examined the effect of routine repositioning over an extended time period on the interface pressures of the perisacral skin area of bedrid- den patients at risk for pressure ulcer formation using interface pressure mapping. METHODS Study Design We performed a descriptive, observational study, col- lecting data at a tertiary care, university-affiliated hospi- tal with 170 intensive and intermediate care beds from 2007 to 2009. Subjects were invited to enroll in the study during regular care by their physician. We hypothesized that bedridden patients undergoing q2h repositioning would demonstrate a triple-jeopardy area (i.e., triple- jeopardy area is not zero). To achieve a power of 80 per- cent, a one-tailed test with an effect size of 0.8, and an error probability of 5 percent required a minimum sample size of 12. The effect size, though seemingly large, is conservative based on results from our previous study with nondisabled subjects [42] and, since a negative area does not exist, a one-tailed test is appropriate. We enrolled participants in the study until we monitored at least 12 in all three distinct positions: supine, turned left, and turned right. To compute the power, we used G*Power 3.0 (Institut für Experimentelle Psychologie, Heinrich Heine Universität Düsseldorf; Düsseldorf, Germany).
  • 85. Subjects We enrolled 23 participants in the study from a con- venience sampling of intensive care (n = 20) and interme- diate care (n = 3) unit patients. We obtained written informed consent from the patient or his or her proxy. The patient inclusion criteria were bedridden, residing in intensive care or intermediate care unit, at risk for pres- sure ulcer formation determined by a Braden score of - ing as part of routine care. Not all patients were intubated or sedated, but none was able to reposition themselves in bed. Table 1 shows the demographics of the study cohort (sex, age, height, weight, and body mass index [BMI]) and Braden scores (on date of data collection). The subgroup of patients that we observed in all three posi- tions will be referred to as the supine-left-right (SLR) group (n = 13). Instrumentation We obtained interface pressure measurements using a pressure mapping system (XSENSOR Technology Cor- poration; Calgary, Canada). The pressure sensor is a flexi- ble, thin pad with 48 × 48 half-inch sensors forming a 24 × 24 in.2 array. The 2,304 independent sensors use proprie- tary capacitive technology to discretely measure the pres- sures applied to the sensor array. The interface box relays individual pressure information from each sensor to a computer for real-time visualization and recording. We calibrated the sensor array according to the manufac- turer’s recommendations to measure pressures from 10 to 200 mm Hg, with a reported accuracy of ±10 percent, placing the sensor array between two air bladders held
  • 86. together in a metal frame and inflated to specific pres- sures. During calibration, sensor readings were all within ±10 percent of the measured value across the calibrated range. We used the same calibration file for all subjects. Before use in the clinical environment, we wrapped the sensor array in very thin (0.0254 mm) plastic sheeting to protect it from contamination and placed it beneath the patient’s underpads (thin, towel-like incontinence pads). We disinfected the sensor array after each use. We used a modern hospital bed with low air-loss technology for all measurements (Total Care or Total Care SpO2RT, Hill- Rom; Batesville, Indiana). The bed’s built-in ball-bearing indicator located in the side rail of the bed indicated the head of bed (HOB) elevation. Protocol We placed the sensor array beneath the patient, span- ning from the lower back to mid-thigh to ensure data col- lection of the perisacral area. Placing the sensor array required the nurses to roll the patient to one side and then the other so that the array could be positioned, without wrinkles, beneath the patient. We recorded interface pressure measurements every 30 s as the patient lay in bed and received routine care, which included lateral turning by his or her nurse. The lateral turning methods included the use of pillows and/or wedges placed behind the back and thighs. The reposi- tioning technique was not prescribed by the study, and the nursing technique was unconstrained so that the results would reflect current clinical practice. Any pil- lows or wedges that were used to maintain a laterally
  • 87. Patient Sex Age (yr) Height (m) Weight (kg) BMI Braden Score SLR Group 1 M 65 1.78 111 35.0 13 — 2 F 73 1.65 75 27.5 — — 3 M 69 1.83 80 23.9 16 — 5 M 70 1.78 86 27.3 15 — 8 F 53 1.68 70 24.9 12 — 9 M 58 1.73 120 40.1 15 — 10 M 71 1.80 65 20.1 16 — 14 M 76 1.75 79 25.7 11 — 15 F 74 1.60 71 27.7 15 — 16 F 67 1.40 55 28.2 12 — Total 14 M, 9 F 63.3 ± 12.7 1.70 ± 0.11 85.9 ± 21.9 29.3 ± 5.6 13.3 ± 2.8 — SLR Group 8 M, 5 F 60.1 ± 15.2 1.71 ± 0.09 89.6 ± 23.2 30.3 ± 480 JRRD, Volume 50, Number 4, 2013
  • 88. turned position were placed beneath the sensor array to allow continuous measurement of interface pressures between the patient and the supporting device. The sensor array was inspected after each turn to confirm that the patient’s perisacral area was recorded. If the sensor array got bunched up or if the patient’s perisacral area moved off the array, adjustments were made only when the patient was already in the process of being repositioned to avoid interfering with patient care. We monitored patients for 4 to 6 h. We chose this time frame to allow for observation of the three distinct positions (supine, turned left, and turned right) during the q2h repositioning protocol. The same investigator (M.P.) recorded the general positioning of the patient (direction of turn and HOB elevation) for all of the data collection periods for all patients. We obtained demographic infor- mation from the patients’ charts. Data Variables Definitions of four data variables of interest and how we calculated them include— • At-risk areas (centimeters squared) for pressure ulcer formation are the skin areas exposed to various inter- face pressure thresholds (32 mm Hg—a historical and contested value [5,16,20,22]—used for statistical analyses, 40 mm Hg, and 50 mm Hg). We calculated at-risk areas for every position experienced by each patient, as well as for how long these particular skin Table 1. Patient demographics and Braden score data. These data represent mean ± standard deviation for demographic and
  • 89. Braden score data for study cohort and for supine-left-right (SLR) group. female, M = male. 481 PETERSON et al. Patient repositioning and pressure ulcer risk areas were at risk. At-risk areas could be located over any load-bearing tissue, such as the greater trochanter while laterally turned. • Always-at-risk areas (centimeters squared) are the skin areas at risk for >95 percent of the total observa- tion period, regardless of the number of positions experienced. We used >95 percent of the patient’s monitoring time rather than 100 percent to provide a more realistic representation of what the patients actu- ally experienced. For example, if a patient momen- tarily rolled to one side and then back during a recording, the pressure profile could indicate that spe- cific tissue areas were relieved, though just briefly. • Triple-jeopardy areas (centimeters squared) refer to the same always-at-risk areas of skin that coincide in all three positions. This term only applies to the patients observed in all three distinct positions and to areas in the perisacral region. • Peak pressure over time (millimeters of mercury) was calculated by averaging the peak interface pressure measurement of each pressure profile obtained over
  • 90. the duration of each position (supine, turned left, or turned right). This value demonstrates the constancy of the maximal pressures experienced, rather than just a one-time value experienced for 30 s of a 2 h time period. Data Analysis We used MATLAB (MathWorks; Natick, Massachu- setts) and Excel (Microsoft; Redmond, Washington) to image, align, analyze, compile, plot, and compare the interface pressure data. Each pressure profile provided the interface pressure (millimeters of mercury) at each of the 2,304 discrete sensors. We determined peak interface pressures and confined them to the tissues surrounding the perisacral area, buttocks, and greater trochanters. We also calculated the skin areas that were subjected to various pressure thresholds over time. In addition to the 32 mm Hg threshold, we also analyzed the data using more strin- gent at-risk area interface pressure thresholds of 40 and 50 mm Hg, an increase of 25 and 56 percent, respectively. We used the pressure profiles of the various positions obtained for each patient to determine how repositioning affected the patients’ interface pressures. We anatomi- cally aligned the pressure profile images by maximizing normalized two-dimensional cross-correlation, as con- ducted in previous work [42], and then adjusted them fur- ther, if necessary, by visual inspection to ensure that skin areas from one position were compared with the same skin areas of another position. We used a one-sample Wilcoxon signed rank test to test the hypothesis that the triple-jeopardy area was not zero. Wilcoxon rank sum and signed rank tests were used, as appropriate, to com- pare interface pressures, at-risk areas, and triple-jeopardy
  • 91. areas between positions. We also compared these at-risk patients with the nondisabled subject findings from Peterson et al. [42] using similar statistical techniques; we considered p < 0.05 significant. RESULTS Pressure Profiles and Patient Positioning We recorded a total of 15,784 pressure profiles from more than 131 h of patient monitoring; each patient was monitored an average of 5.7 ± 1.0 h. We could not ana- lyze some of the pressure profiles (<8%) because data were recorded during patient repositioning or because the perisacral area had moved off the sensor array. After removing these profiles, we analyzed 14,527 pressure profiles from 121 h of monitoring. The SLR group con- sisted of 8,028 profiles from 66.9 h of monitoring time. Table 2 shows the specific positions observed for each patient. We recorded the HOB elevations for each of the positions periodically throughout the study. For the supine position, the average HOB elevation was 30° –65°); for the turned-left position, the average –40°); and for the turned-right position, the average HOB elevation was –45°). Interface Pressures and At-Risk Areas The peak interface pressures, peak pressures over time, and at-risk areas did not differ significantly by posi- tion (Table 3). However, on an individual basis, the peak interface pressures and specific areas of at-risk skin were susceptible to significant changes upon patient reposi- tioning. For example, the peak interface pressures for one
  • 92. patient upon being turned to the left from a supine posi- tion increased nearly threefold due to shifting of the patient’s body weight directly over the greater trochanter (Figure 1). Always-at-Risk and Triple-Jeopardy Areas All 23 patients demonstrated always-at-risk areas, with a mean always-at-risk area of 206 ± 182 cm2 (Table 2). Patient Positions No. of Positions Always-at-Risk Area (cm2) Triple-Jeopardy Area (cm2) 1 R, L, R, L 4 297 — 2 R, L 2 5 — 3 S, L 2 469 — 4 S, L, R, L 4 8 8 5 S, L, S 3 73 — 6 S, R, S, L 4 108 108 7 S, L, R 3 119 119 8 S, L 2 169 — 9 S 1 261 — 10 R 1 247 — 11 S, R, L, R 4 110 110 12 R, S, L 3 456 456 13 S, R, L 3 613 613 14 S, Sit, S, R 4 516 — 15 S, L 2 427 — 16 R, L, R, L 4 105 — 17 S, L, S, R 4 76 76 18 R, S, L 3 15 15 19 R, L, R, S 4 195 195
  • 93. 20 S, L, R 3 248 248 21 S, R, L 3 2 2 22 S, L, R 3 15 15 23 S, L, R 3 194 194 Mean ± SD — 3.00 ± 0.95 206 ± 182 166 ± 184 482 JRRD, Volume 50, Number 4, 2013 Accordingly, all 13 patients in the SLR group demon- strated triple-jeopardy areas as well and had a mean tri- ple-jeopardy area of 166 ± 184 cm2 (Table 2). These unambiguous results support our hypothesis that bedrid- den, at-risk patients do demonstrate a triple-jeopardy area (SLR group, p < 0.001) or always-at-risk area (all patients, p < 0.001). To view the areas of skin that were always-at-risk and for how long, we compiled the at-risk areas from every pressure profile from each patient’s entire monitoring period. Figure 2 illustrates the typical interface pressure profiles for the three different positions and how the at-risk skin areas were affected over time. We also analyzed the data with more stringent inter- face pressure thresholds. At 40 mm Hg, 18 of 23 patients (9 of 13 in SLR group) had always-at-risk areas, and at 50 mm Hg, 10 of 23 patients (3 of 13 in SLR group) still had always-at-risk areas. Since the at-risk patients dif- fered in age, Braden score, and body type, we also ana- lyzed the data to see whether any of these factors affected the results. However, no trend emerged upon analyzing always-at-risk or triple-jeopardy areas with respect to age, height, weight, BMI, or Braden score. DISCUSSION
  • 94. Regular q2h repositioning of patients is the standard of care that is routinely implemented to reduce the risk of pressure ulcer formation. Our results clearly demonstrate that bedridden, at-risk patients have substantial areas of Table 2. At-risk patient positions observed and corresponding always-at- risk and/or triple-jeopardy areas. Note: In “Sit” position, head of bed was 65°. L = left, R = right, S = supine, SD = standard deviation. Peak Interface Pressures (mm Hg) PositionSupine Left Right At-Risk Patients with HOB Elevation Peak Pressures*† 122.5 ± 45.1 134.2 ± 43.7 119.8 ± 33.8 Peak Pressures Over Time* 99.1 ± 34.3 99.5 ± 30.0 88.9 ± 17.1 Nondisabled Subjects — 69.2 ± 12.8 64.8 ± 9.1 Left Side 68.6 ± 19.5 — — Right Side 65.8 ± 11.7 — — — 84.5 ± 17.5 80.4 ± 11.4 At-Risk Areas (cm2) PositionSupine Left Right At-Risk Patients with HOB Elevation‡ 716 ± 290 742 ± 304 744 ± 287
  • 95. Nondisabled Subjects — 468 ± 151 434 ± 147 Left Side 470 ± 170 — — Right Side 480 ± 170 — — — 569 ± 192 558 ± 159 Triple-Jeopardy and Always-at-Risk Areas (cm2) Triple-Jeopardy Area Always-at-Risk Area At-Risk Patients 166 ± 184 206 ± 182§ Nondisabled Subjects 60 ± 54 — 483 PETERSON et al. Patient repositioning and pressure ulcer risk skin that do not get relieved and remain at risk despite repositioning by experienced nurses. This observation was not isolated to only a few patients—all 23 patients monitored in this study demonstrated always-at-risk areas. We monitored patients for approximately 6 h con- secutively, and they had specific skin areas that remained at risk during the entire observation period. Based on these results, we can reasonably assume that these skin areas are at risk for the majority of time a patient is bed- ridden. These results mirror those of the nondisabled sub- ject study that first described the triple-jeopardy area phenomenon [42] and confirm that at-risk patients also have substantial always-at-risk skin areas despite routine
  • 96. repositioning. Since there is no widely accepted value for an inter- face pressure threshold for tissue risk or damage, we also used more stringent interface pressure thresholds. Upon evaluation with greater interface pressure thresholds, the results revealed that always-at-risk areas and triple-jeopardy areas still continued to exist in a significant subset of at- risk patients, which suggests that the current standard of care is not sufficient. However, of the patients that dem- onstrated an always-at-risk area, the fraction of those patients that were from the SLR group decreased as the interface pressure thresholds increased. Furthermore, the mean always-at-risk area was less for the SLR group (tri- ple-jeopardy area) than for the overall study population as a whole. These results provide objective support that routine patient repositioning, when done properly, reduces always-at-risk areas, which should, in turn, reduce pressure ulcer risk. Accordingly, future studies are needed to assess whether patients with always-at-risk Table 3. Comparison of interface pressure (mm Hg), at-risk areas (cm2), triple-jeopardy areas (cm2), and always at-risk areas (cm2) between patients at risk for pressure ulcer formation and nondisabled subjects. Data were taken on same brand of modern hospital bed. Nondisabled subject data from Peterson et al. [42]. *At-risk patient values were significantly larger than nondisabled subjects for corresponding supine and laterally turned positions (p < 0.001). †At-risk patient values were significantly larger than
  • 97. nondisabled subjects for corresponding turned with HOB elevation positions (p < 0.001). ‡At-risk patient values were significantly larger than nondisabled subjects for corresponding supine and laterally turned positions (p < 0.003). §At-risk patient values were significantly larger than nondisabled subjects (p < 0.006). HOB = head of bed. 484 JRRD, Volume 50, Number 4, 2013 areas are more likely to develop (1) pressure ulcers, (2) more severe pressure ulcers, and/or (3) pressure ulcers at these specific Figure 1. Interface pressure changes by position. Peak interface pressures over time are displayed for two different patients. Peak pressures were located around perisacral area and greater trochanters. Repositioning at times resulted in large sustained changes in peak pressures (bottom graph) but not always (top graph). (a) Peak interface pressures for patient 6 initially in supine posi- tion, turned right at minute 7, supine at minute 210, and turned left at minute 325. (b) Peak interface pressure for patient 18 initially turned right, supine at minute 147, and turned left at minute 268. tissue locations. Despite the standard of care (q2h), repositioning
  • 98. intervals varied between patients (Table 2, “Positions”) and none was effective in relieving all at-risk tissue areas. For example, two patients were not repositioned during the entire monitoring period. It was not clear why the repositioning procedures were different, but we believe our observations mirror typical interoperator reposition- ing technique differences. All the same, it may not matter exactly how repositioning is accomplished, but rather that the at-risk tissue gets relieved regularly from pres- sure. To put our observations in perspective, the average always-at-risk area was over 200 cm2; therefore, an area one-third the size of an 8.5 × 11 in. sheet of paper is not getting relieved and remains at risk for pressure ulcer for- mation. Hence, future research is needed to establish how pressure mapping, implemented as a patient monitoring device or as a means to educate caregivers to improve their repositioning techniques, can further reduce or elim- inate high skin-bed interface pressures, at-risk areas, and always-at-risk areas (including triple-jeopardy areas) in at-risk patients to reduce pressure ulcer risk. We are not aware of any prior work examining the interface pressures of a cohort of patients during an inter- val of care that covers the spectrum of positions experi- enced by patients who typically have the highest prevalence of pressure ulcer formation. Comparing the at-risk patients of this study with nondisabled subjects [42] (for values and statistical significance, see Table 3), we found the peak interface pressures were 49 to 59 per- cent and 85 to 94 percent higher for the at-risk patients than for nondisabled subjects, with and without HOB ele- vation, respectively. The peak pressures over time of at- risk patients were 11 to 18 percent and 37 to 51 percent greater than the peak pressures of nondisabled subjects,
  • 99. with and without HOB elevation, respectively. The at-risk areas were 30 to 33 percent and 52 to 71 percent larger for the at-risk patients than nondisabled subjects in the supine and laterally turned positions, with and without HOB elevation, respectively. The triple-jeopardy and always-at-risk areas were also considerably larger for the at-risk patients than for nondisabled subjects, 277 and 343 percent, respectively. Perhaps due to pain, frailty, medical condition, or the reservation of nurses to not dis- turb the patient too much, bedridden at-risk patients experience higher interface pressures and larger at-risk and always-at-risk areas (including triple-jeopardy areas) than nondisabled subjects. These results that demonstrate at-risk patients have higher interface pressures than non- disabled subjects are consistent with data reported by Berjian et al. [43]. Our study had a few limitations. First, tissue interface pressures do not directly measure internal tissue and cap- illary pressures. We are not implying that an at-risk area 485 PETERSON et al. Patient repositioning and pressure ulcer risk is ischemic, but we feel these areas are at-risk due to ele- vated interface pressures. Moreover, interface pressure mapping is currently the best noninvasive method to measure pressures applied to the skin. The use of peak interface pressures has been reported to be unreliable for test-retest scenarios [44], but this did not affect our always-at-risk and triple-jeopardy results. Second, patient shifting and/or raising the HOB could result in a patient moving off the sensor array, generating unusable
  • 100. pressure profiles Figure 2. Interface pressure profiles by position and triple-jeopardy areas. (a) Typical perisacral interface pressure profiles from one intensive care unit patient; color bar is in millimeters of mercury with color denoting at-risk areas. (b) Total amount of triple-jeopardy (always-at- risk) area. (c) Schematic of patient lying in bed on pressure sensor. Pressure profiles should be viewed as if you are facing patient. (d) Amounts of time specific areas of skin were at risk across all positions experienced by patient. Color bar indicates time (in hours) that specific skin areas were at risk. Areas at risk for maximal amount of time (dark red) were always at risk and never relieved. (<8% of total data collected). However, active movements (absent shear) are likely beneficial because they redistribute the patient’s weight similar to nondisabled people, for example, when shifting weight while sitting in a chair. Third, we anatomically aligned patient interface pressure profiles when necessary to ascertain that specific areas of skin were correctly tracked over time. We needed alignment for half of the patients we observed. This adjustment, or any patient movement, could have led to minor errors in tracking specific skin areas, but we found no significant difference in triple-jeopardy or always-at-risk areas between patients who had their pressure profiles aligned compared with those who did not. Last, we placed the sensor array beneath the patient’s underpads to protect it from the patient and additional contaminants and so that it would not be used
  • 101. in place of the underpads to help lift and reposition the 486 JRRD, Volume 50, Number 4, 2013 patient. The underpads may aid in slight pressure relief, thus resulting in lower measured pressures. CONCLUSIONS Bedridden patients at risk for pressure ulcer forma- tion exhibit high skin-bed interface pressures and specific skin areas that are likely always at risk (i.e., triple-jeopardy and always-at-risk areas) for the vast majority of the time patients are in bed despite routine repositioning care. Healthcare providers are unaware of the actual tissue- relieving effectiveness (or lack thereof) of their reposi- tioning interventions, which may partially explain why pressure ulcer mitigation strategies are not always suc- cessful. Relieving at-risk tissue is a necessary part of pressure ulcer prevention, but the repositioning practice itself needs improvement. Further research is needed to determine how pressure mapping can be used to develop better patient repositioning techniques and improve at- risk tissue pressure relief to help prevent pressure ulcer formation. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Author Contributions: Study concept and design: M. J. Peterson, N. Graven W. K. Schwab, J. H. van Oostrom, L. J. Caruso. Data collection: M. J. Peterson, W. K. Schwab, L. J. Caruso.
  • 102. Data analysis: M. J. Peterson. Data interpretation: M. J. Peterson, N. Gravenstein, W. K. J. H. van Oostrom, L. J. Caruso. Drafting of manuscript: M. J. Peterson. Critical revision of manuscript for important intellectual M. J. Peterson, N. Gravenstein, W. K. Schwab, J. H. van L. J. Caruso. Financial Disclosures: The authors have declared that no competing interests exist. Funding/Support: This material was based on work supported by the Department of Anesthesiology, University of Florida College of Engineering, University of Florida College of Engineering; Shands Hospital, University of Florida College of Medicine; and Health Development Center of Excellence, James A. Haley Department of Veterans Affairs Medical Center. Additional Contributions: This work was presented in part at the 2010 National Patient Safety Foundation Patient Safety Congress, Orlando, Florida (May 17–19, 2010), and the NPUAP Biennial Con- ference, Las Vegas, Nevada (February 25–26, 2011). Dr. Peterson is now with the Health Services Research & Development/Rehabilita-
  • 103. tion Research & Development Center of Excellence, James A. Haley Department of Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Tampa, Florida. Institutional Review: This study received institutional review board approval and all patients or their proxies provided informed consent. Participant Follow-up: The authors have no plans to inform the par- ticipants of the publication of this study. Disclaimer: The contents of this manuscript are those of the authors alone and do not represent the views of the Department of Veterans Affairs, the University of Florida, or the U.S. Government. REFERENCES 1. VanGilder C, Amlung S, Harrison P, Meyer S. Results of the 2008–2009 International Pressure Ulcer Prevalence Survey and a 3-year, acute care, unit-specific analysis. Ostomy Wound Manage. 2009;55(11):39– [PMID:19934462] 2. Reddy M, Gill SS, Rochon PA. Preventing pressure ulcers: a systematic review. JAMA. 2006;296(8):974– http://dx.doi.org/10.1001/jama.296.8.974 3. Akins JS, Karg PE, Brienza DM. Interface shear and pres- sure characteristics of wheelchair seat cushions. J Rehabil Res Dev. 2011;48(3):225– http://dx.doi.org/10.1682/JRRD.2009.09.0145 4. National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel. Pressure ulcer
  • 104. cate- gory/staging illustrations [Internet]. Washington (DC): http://www.npuap.org/pr2.htm 5. Bouten CV, Oomens CW, Baaijens FP, Bader DL. The eti- ology of pressure ulcers: skin deep or muscle bound? Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 2003;84(4):616– http://dx.doi.org/10.1053/apmr.2003.50038 6. Kosiak M. Etiology of decubitus ulcers. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 1961;42:19–29. [PMID:13753341] 7. Herrman EC, Knapp CF, Donofrio JC, Salcido R. Skin per- fusion responses to surface pressure-induced ischemia: implication for the developing pressure ulcer. J Rehabil Res Dev. 1999;36(2):109–20. [PMID:10661527] 8. Reddy NP, Cochran GV. Interstitial fluid flow as a factor in decubitus ulcer formation. J Biomech. 1981;14(12):879– http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/0021-9290(81)90015-4 9. Bouten CV, Bosboom EM, Oomens CW. The aetiology of pressure sores: A tissue and cell mechanics approach. In: van der Woude LH, Hopman MT, van Kemenade CH, edi- tors. Biomedical aspects of manual wheelchair propulsion: The state of the art II. Washington (DC): IOS Press; 1999. p. 52–62. 10. Berlowitz DR, Brienza DM. Are all pressure ulcers the result of deep tissue injury? A review of the literature. http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=19934462&dopt=Abstract http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
  • 105. b=PubMed&list_uids=16926357&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1001/jama.296.8.974 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=21480097&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1682/JRRD.2009.09.0145 http://www.npuap.org/pr2.htm http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=12690603&dopt=Abstract http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=12690603&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1053/apmr.2003.50038 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=13753341&dopt=Abstract http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=10661527&dopt=Abstract http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=7328094&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/0021-9290(81)90015-4 487 PETERSON et al. Patient repositioning and pressure ulcer risk Ostomy Wound Manage. 2007;53(10):34– [PMID:17978413] 11. Linder-Ganz E, Shabshin N, Itzchak Y, Gefen A. Assess- ment of mechanical conditions in sub-dermal tissues during sitting: a combined experimental-MRI and finite element approach. J Biomech. 2007;40(7):1443– http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.jbiomech.2006.06.020 12. Bader DL. The recovery characteristics of soft tissues fol- lowing repeated loading. J Rehabil Res Dev. 1990;27(2):
  • 106. 141– http://dx.doi.org/10.1682/JRRD.1990.04.0141 13. Colin D, Abraham P, Preault L, Bregeon C, Saumet JL. Comparison of 90 degrees and 30 degrees laterally inclined positions in the prevention of pressure ulcers using transcu- taneous oxygen and carbon dioxide pressures. Adv Wound Care. 1996;9(3):35–38. [PMID:8716272] 14. Guyton AC, Hall JE. Textbook of medical physiology. 10th ed. Philadelphia (PA): Saunders; 2000. p. 63–174. 15. Dealey C. Mattresses and beds. A guide to systems avail- able for relieving and reducing pressure. J Wound Care. 1995;4(9):409–12. [PMID:7584660] 16. Lyder CH. Pressure ulcer prevention and management. JAMA. 2003;289(2):223–26. [P http://dx.doi.org/10.1001/jama.289.2.223 17. Bennett L, Kavner D, Lee BK, Trainor FA. Shear vs pres- sure as causative factors in skin blood flow occlusion. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 1979;60(7):309–14. [PMID:454129] 18. Ek AC, Gustavsson G, Lewis DH. Skin blood flow in rela- tion to external pressure and temperature in the supine position on a standard hospital mattress. Scand J Rehabil Med. 1987;19(3):121–26. [PMID:3441774] 19. Holloway GA Jr, Daly CH, Kennedy D, Chimoskey JE. Effects of external pressure loading on human skin blood flow measured by 133Xe clearance. J Appl Physiol. 1976;40(4):597–600. [PMID:931880] 20. Landis E. Micro-injection studies of capillary blood pres- sure in human skin. Heart. 1930;15(15):209–28.
  • 107. 21. Sangeorzan BJ, Harrington RM, Wyss CR, Czerniecki JM, Matsen FA 3rd. Circulatory and mechanical response of skin to loading. J Orthop Res. 1989;7(3):425– http://dx.doi.org/10.1002/jor.1100070315 22. Swain I. The measurement of interface pressure. In: Bader DL, Bouten CV, Colin D, Oomens CW, editors. Pressure ulcer research: Current and future perspectives. New York (NY): Springer; 2005. p. 51–71. 23. Gebhardt KS. Research in biomedical engineering: an overview of recent literature. J Tissue Viability. 2005;15(1): 17–18. [PMID:15693584] 24. Reddy NP. Effects of mechanical stresses on lymph and interstitial fluid flows. In: Bader DL, editor. Pressure sores: Clinical practice and scientific approach. London (Eng- land): Macmillan; 1990. p. 203–20. 25. Rithalia SV, Gonsalkorale M. Assessment of alternating air mattresses using a time-based interface pressure threshold technique. J Rehabil Res Dev. 1998;35(2):225– [PMID:9651895] 26. Reswick JB, Rogers JE. Experience at Rancho Los Amigos Hospital with devices and techniques to prevent pressure sores. In: Kenedi RM, Cowden JM, Scales JT, editors. Bed- sore biomechanics: Proceedings of a seminar on tissue via- bility and clinical applications. Baltimore (MD): University Park Press; 1976. p. 301–10. 27. Stekelenburg A, Oomens C, Bader D. Compression- induced tissue damage: animal models. In: Bader DL,
  • 108. Bouten CV, Colin D, Oomens CW, editors. Pressure ulcer research: Current and future perspectives. New York (NY): Springer; 2005. p. 187–204. 28. Husain T. An experimental study of some pressure effects on tissues, with reference to the bed-sore problem. J Pathol Bacteriol. 1953;66(2):347– http://dx.doi.org/10.1002/path.1700660203 29. Goldstein B, Sanders J. Skin response to repetitive mechanical stress: a new experimental model in pig. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 1998;79(3):265– http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S0003-9993(98)90005-3 30. Baumgarten M, Margolis DJ, Localio AR, Kagan SH, Lowe RA, Kinosian B, Holmes JH, Abbuhl SB, Kavesh W, Ruffin A. Pressure ulcers among elderly patients early in the hospital stay. J Gerontol A Biol Sci Med Sci. 2006; 61(7):749– http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/gerona/61.7.749 31. Dealey C. The size of the pressure-sore problem in a teach- ing hospital. J Adv Nurs. 1991;16(6):663– http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2648.1991.tb01724.x 32. Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services. Medicare program; changes to the hospital inpatient prospective pay- ment systems and fiscal year 2008 rates. Fed Regist. 2007;72(162):47129–48175. [PMID:17847578] 33. Milstein A. Ending extra payment for “never events”— stronger incentives for patients’ safety. N Engl J Med. 2009;360(23):2388–90. [PMI http://dx.doi.org/10.1056/NEJMp0809125
  • 109. 34. Clark M, Price PE. Is wound healing a true science or a clinical art? Lancet. 2004;364(9443):1388– http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(04)17240-1 35. Agostini JV, Baker DI, Bogardus ST Jr. Prevention of pres- sure ulcers in older patients. In: Making health care safer: A critical analysis of patient safety practices. Rockville (MD): Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services; 2001. p. 301–6. http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=17978413&dopt=Abstract http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=16920122&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.jbiomech.2006.06.020 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=2366198&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1682/JRRD.1990.04.0141 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=8716272&dopt=Abstract http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=7584660&dopt=Abstract http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=12517234&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1001/jama.289.2.223 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=454129&dopt=Abstract http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=3441774&dopt=Abstract http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=931880&dopt=Abstract http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=2703934&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1002/jor.1100070315 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
  • 110. b=PubMed&list_uids=15693584&dopt=Abstract http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=9651895&dopt=Abstract http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=13118439&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1002/path.1700660203 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=9523777&dopt=Abstract http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=9523777&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S0003-9993(98)90005-3 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=16870639&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/gerona/61.7.749 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=1869714&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2648.1991.tb01724.x http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/17847578 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=19494212&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1056/NEJMp0809125 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=15488204&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(04)17240-1 488 JRRD, Volume 50, Number 4, 2013 36. Wound, ostomy and continence nurses society position statement on avoidable versus unavoidable pressure ulcers. J Wound Ostomy Continence Nurs. 2009;36(4):378– http://dx.doi.org/10.1097/WON.0b013e3181a9e9c8
  • 111. 37. Black JM, Edsberg LE, Baharestani MM, Langemo D, Goldberg M, McNichol L, Cuddigan J; National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel. Pressure ulcers: avoidable or unavoidable? Results of the National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel Consensus Conference. Ostomy Wound Manage. 2011;57(2):24–37. [PMID:21350270] 38. Bergstrom N. Patients at risk for pressure ulcers and evi- dence-based care for pressure ulcer prevention. In: Bader DL, Bouten CV, Colin D, Oomens CW, editors. Pressure ulcer research: Current and future perspectives. New York (NY): Springer; 2005. p. 35–50. 39. Defloor T, De Bacquer D, Grypdonck MH. The effect of various combinations of turning and pressure reducing devices on the incidence of pressure ulcers. Int J Nurs Stud. 2005;42(1):37– http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.ijnurstu.2004.05.013 40. Vanderwee K, Grypdonck MH, De Bacquer D, Defloor T. Effectiveness of turning with unequal time intervals on the incidence of pressure ulcer lesions. J Adv Nurs. 2007; 57(1):59– http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2648.2006.04060.x 41. Hobbs BK. Reducing the incidence of pressure ulcers: implementation of a turn-team nursing program. J Gerontol Nurs. 2004;30(11):46–51. [PMID:15575191] 42. Peterson MJ, Schwab W, van Oostrom JH, Gravenstein N, Caruso LJ. Effects of turning on skin-bed interface pres- sures in healthy adults. J Adv Nurs. 2010;66(7):1556– http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2648.2010.05292.x
  • 112. 43. Berjian RA, Douglass HO Jr, Holyoke ED, Goodwin PM, Priore RL. Skin pressure measurements on various mattress surfaces in cancer patients. Am J Phys Med. 1983;62(5): 217–26. [PMID:6624882] 44. Sprigle S, Dunlop W, Press L. Reliability of bench tests of interface pressure. Assist Technol. 2003;15(1):49– http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/10400435.2003.10131889 Submitted for publication March 5, 2012. Accepted in revised form September 10, 2012. This article and any supplementary material should be Peterson MJ, Gravenstein N, Schwab WK, van Oostrom JH, Caruso LJ. Patient repositioning and pressure ulcer risk—Monitoring interface pressures of at-risk patients. J Rehabil Res Dev. 2013;50(4):477– http://dx.doi.org/10.1682/JRRD.2012.03.0040 ResearcherID/ORCID: Johannes H. van Oostrom, PhD: B-1407-2008 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=19421074&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1097/WON.0b013e3181a9e9c8 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=21350270&dopt=Abstract http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=15582638&dopt=Abstract] http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.ijnurstu.2004.05.013 http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=17184374&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2648.2006.04060.x http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d
  • 113. b=PubMed&list_uids=15575191&dopt=Abstract http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=20497272&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-2648.2010.05292.x http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=6624882&dopt=Abstract http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?cmd=Retrieve&d b=PubMed&list_uids=14760981&dopt=Abstract http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/10400435.2003.10131889 This content is in the Public Domain. This content is in the Public Domain. CochraneDatabaseof SystematicReviews Repositioningforpressureulcerpreventioninadults(Review) Gillespie BM, ChaboyerWP, McInnes E, Kent B, Whitty JA, Thalib L Gillespie BM, Chaboyer WP, McInnes E, Kent B, Whitty JA, Thalib L. Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults. CochraneDatabaseof SystematicReviews 2014, Issue4. Art. No.: CD009958. DOI: 10.1002/14651858.CD009958.pub2.
  • 114. www.cochranelibrary.com Repositioning forpressure ulcerprevention inadults(Review) Copyright © 2014The CochraneCollaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons,Ltd. http://www.cochranelibrary.com T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S 1HEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1ABSTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2PLAIN LANGUAGE SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4OBJECTIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Figure 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Figure 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
  • 115. Figure 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 18DISCUSSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19AUTHORS’ CONCLUSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23CHARACTERISTICS OF STUDIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33DATA AND ANALYSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analysis 1.1. Comparison 1 2h versus 3h repositioning on standard hospital mattresses, Outcome 1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Analysis 1.2. Comparison 1 2h versus 3h repositioning on standard hospital mattresses, Outcome 2 Pressure ulcer risk (category 2 to 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Analysis 2.1. Comparison 2 4h versus 6h repositioning on viscoelastic foam mattresses, Outcome 1 Pressure ulcer risk
  • 116. (category 1 to 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Analysis 2.2. Comparison 2 4h versus 6h repositioning on viscoelastic foam mattresses, Outcome 2 Pressure ulcer risk (category 2 to 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Analysis 3.1. Comparison 3 30o tilt 3-hourly overnight versus 90o tilt overnight, Outcome 1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 36APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41WHAT’S NEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42CONTRIBUTIONS OF AUTHORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42DECLARATIONS OF INTEREST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42SOURCES OF SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43DIFFERENCES BETWEEN PROTOCOL AND REVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43INDEX TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iRepositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review)
  • 117. Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. [Intervention Review] Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults Brigid M Gillespie1, Wendy P Chaboyer1 , Elizabeth McInnes2 , Bridie Kent3, Jennifer A Whitty4, Lukman Thalib5 1NHMRC Centre of Research Excellence in Nursing, Centre for Health Practice Innovation, Menzies Health Institute Queensland, Griffith University, Brisbane, Australia. 2Nursing Research Institute, St Vincent’s Health Australia (Sydney) and Australian Catholic University (ACU), School of Nursing, Midwifery and Paramedicine, Australian Catholic University, Darlinghurst, Australia. 3School of Nursing and Midwifery, Deakin Centre for Quality and Risk Management, Deakin University, Melbourne, Burwood, Australia. 4School of Pharmacy, The University of Queensland, Brisbane, Australia. 5Department of Community Medicine, Kuwait University, Safat, Kuwait Contact address: Wendy P Chaboyer, NHMRC Centre of Research Excellence in Nursing, Centre for Health Practice
  • 118. Innovation, Menzies Health Institute Queensland, Griffith University, Brisbane, Queensland, Australia. [email protected] Editorial group: Cochrane Wounds Group. Publication status and date: New, published in Issue 4, 2014. Review content assessed as up-to-date: 6 September 2013. Citation: Gillespie BM, Chaboyer WP, McInnes E, Kent B, Whitty JA, Thalib L. Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews 2014, Issue 4. Art. No.: CD009958. DOI: 10.1002/14651858.CD009958.pub2. Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. A B S T R A C T Background A pressure ulcer (PU), also referred to as a ’pressure injury’, ’pressure sore’, or ’bedsore’ is defined as an area of localised tissue damage that is caused by unrelieved pressure, friction or shearing forces on any part of the body. PUs commonly occur in patients who are elderly and less mobile, and carry significant human and economic impacts. Immobility and physical inactivity are considered to be
  • 119. major risk factors for PU development and the manual repositioning of patients in hospital or long-term care is a common pressure ulcer prevention strategy. Objectives The objectives of this review were to: 1) assess the effects of repositioning on the prevention of PUs in adults, regardless of risk or in-patient setting; 2) ascertain the most effective repositioning schedules for preventing PUs in adults; and 3) ascertain the incremental resource consequences and costs associated with implementing different repositioning regimens compared with alternate schedules or standard practice. Search methods We searched the following electronic databases to identify reports of the relevant randomised controlled trials: the Cochrane Wounds Group Specialised Register (searched 06 September 2013), the Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials (CENTRAL) (2013, Issue 8); Ovid MEDLINE (1948 to August, Week 4, 2013); Ovid EMBASE (1974 to 2013, Week 35); EBESCO CINAHL (1982 to 30 August 2013); and the reference sections of studies that were
  • 120. included in the review. Selection criteria Randomised controlled trials (RCTs), published or unpublished, that assessed the effects of any repositioning schedule or different patient positions and measured PU incidence in adults in any setting. 1Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. mailto:[email protected] Data collection and analysis Two review authors independently performed study selection, risk of bias assessment and data extraction. Main results We included three RCTs and one economic study representing a total of 502 randomised participants from acute and long-term care settings. Two trials compared the 30º and 90º tilt positions using similar repositioning frequencies (there was a small difference in frequency of overnight repositioning in the 90º tilt groups between the trials). The third RCT compared alternative
  • 121. repositioning frequencies. All three studies reported the proportion of patients developing PU of any grade, stage or category. None of the trials reported on pain, or quality of life, and only one reported on cost. All three trials were at high risk of bias. The two trials of 30º tilt vs. 90º were pooled using a random effects model (I² = 69%) (252 participants). The risk ratio for developing a PU in the 30º tilt and the standard 90º position was very imprecise (pooled RR 0.62, 95% CI 0.10 to 3.97, P=0.62, very low quality evidence). This comparison is underpowered and at risk of a Type 2 error (only 21 events). In the third study, a cluster randomised trial, participants were randomised between 2-hourly and 3-hourly repositioning on standard hospital mattresses and 4 hourly and 6 hourly repositioning on viscoelastic foam mattresses. This study was also underpowered and at high risk of bias. The risk ratio for pressure ulcers (any category) with 2-hourly repositioning compared with 3-hourly repositioning on a standard mattress was imprecise (RR 0.90, 95% CI 0.69 to 1.16, very low quality evidence). The risk ratio for pressure
  • 122. ulcers (any category) was compatible with a large reduction and no difference between 4-hourly repositioning and 6-hourly repositioning on viscoelastic foam (RR 0.73, 95% CI 0.53 to 1.02, very low quality evidence). A cost-effectiveness analysis based on data derived from one of the included parallel RCTs compared 3-hourly repositioning using the 30º tilt overnight with standard care consisting of 6-hourly repositioning using the 90º lateral rotation overnight. In this evaluation the only included cost was nursing time. The intervention was reported to be cost saving compared with standard care (nurse time cost per patient EURO206.6 vs EURO253.1, incremental difference EURO-46.5; 95%CI: EURO-1.25 to EURO-74.60). Authors’ conclusions Repositioning is an integral component of pressure ulcer prevention and treatment; it has a sound theoretical rationale, and is widely recommended and used in practice. The lack of robust evaluations of repositioning frequency and position for pressure ulcer prevention mean that great uncertainty remains but it does not mean these interventions are ineffective since all comparisons are grossly
  • 123. under- powered. Current evidence is small in volume and at risk of bias and there is currently no strong evidence of a reduction in pressure ulcers with the 30° tilt compared with the standard 90º position or good evidence of an effect of repositioning frequency. There is a clear need for high-quality, adequately-powered trials to assess the effects of position and optimal frequency of repositioning on pressure ulcer incidence. The limited data derived from one economic evaluation means it remains unclear whether repositioning every 3 hours using the 30º tilt is less costly in terms of nursing time and more effective than standard care involving repositioning every 6 hours using a 90º tilt. P L A I N L A N G U A G E S U M M A R Y Repositioning to prevent pressure ulcers Pressure ulcers, also called pressure injury, pressure sores, decubitus ulcers and bed sores are caused by pressure, rubbing or friction at the weight-bearing bony points of the body (such as hips, heels and elbows). A pressure ulcer is characterised by an area of localised
  • 124. injury to the skin or underlying tissue over a bony prominence that results from pressure or shearing, or a combination of both. Pressure ulcers most commonly occur in the elderly, or those who are immobile, either when in bed or sitting. Repositioning (i.e. turning) is one strategy used alongside other preventative strategies to relieve pressure, and so prevent development of pressure ulcers. Repositioning involves moving the person into a different position to remove or redistribute pressure from a particular part of the body. We identified three studies which recruited 502 people. Evidence to support the use of repositioning to prevent pressure ulcers is low in volume and quality and we still do not know if particular positions or frequencies of repositioning reduce pressure ulcer development. None of the trials reported on pain or quality of life. There is a need for further research to measure the effects of repositioning on pressure ulcer development and to find the best repositioning regimen in terms of frequency and position. It is important to emphasise that this 2Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
  • 125. lack of evidence showing that repositioning is effective or which repositioning regimen is the best does not mean that repositioning is ineffective. B A C K G R O U N D Description of the condition A pressure ulcer (PU) (also known as pressure sore, pressure in- jury, or bedsore) is “a localised injury to skin or underlying tissue usually over a bony prominence as a result of pressure or pressure in combination with shear” (European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2009; NPUAP 2009). PUs occur when the soft tissue is compressed between a bony prominence and an external surface for a prolonged period of time. PU classification systems provide an accurate and consistent means by which the severity and level of tissue injury of a PU can be described and documented (Australian Wound Management Association 2011).The words ’stage’ (European Pressure Ulcer
  • 126. Advisory Panel 2009), ’grade’, and ’category’ are used interchange- ably to describe the levels of soft-tissue injury. The original stag- ing system includes Stages 1 to 4. Stage 1 reflects persistent non-blanching erythema (redness) of the skin (Australian Wound Management Association 2011; European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2009). Stage 2 involves partial-thickness skin loss (epi- dermis and dermis). Stage 3 reflects full-thickness skin loss in- volving damage, or necrosis, of subcutaneous tissue, whereas in Stage 4 the damage extends to the underlying bone, tendon or joint capsule. However, more recently, two additional classifica- tions have been identified, namely: ’unclassified/unstageable’ and ’deep tissue injury’ (Australian Wound Management Association 2011; European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2009; National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2007). PUs are associated with pain,
  • 127. an increased risk of infection and sepsis, longer hospital stays, higher hospitalisation costs and mortality (Institute for Healthcare Improvement 2008; Thomas 1996). Despite a general consensus that PUs are preventable (Brandeis 2001), hospital-acquired PUs are among the top five adverse events reported. Estimates of PU incidence in hospitalised patients have ranged from less than 3% to over 30% (Nixon 2006;Queensland Health 2008 Mulligan 2011,Schuurman 2009). Costs of treating PUs vary globally, but represent a considerable financial burden on hospital budgets wherever they occur. Costs to the Australian healthcare system have been estimated at AUD 285 million per annum (Mulligan 2011). The total cost for treatment of PUs in the UK was GBP 1.4 billion to GBP 2.1 billion annually (4% of total National Health Service’s expenditure) (Bennett 2004), whilst the total cost in the US was estimated at USD 11 billion per year (Institute for Healthcare Improvement 2008). Much of
  • 128. this cost is allocated to nursing time (Bennett 2004). Immobility and physical inactivity are considered to be major risk factors for PU development in hospitalised patients (Allman 1995; Institute for Healthcare Improvement 2008; Lindgren 2004), however, the aged and individuals who have severely compromised states of health are particularly at risk (Institute for Healthcare Improvement 2008). For example, of the 3.55 million hospital admissions in Australia each year (excluding day cases), 50% of pa- tients will be at risk of PUs and 10% or more will develop an ulcer (Queensland Health 2009). Screening tools based on individuals’ levels of activity and mobility scores have been widely used for the assessment of PU risk (Braden 2005; Jalali 2005; Thompson 2005). Various interventions are in use and believed to reduce the incidence of PUs with varying levels of supporting evidence including different mattresses and overlays (Nixon 2006; Reddy
  • 129. 2006; Vanderwee 2005) and regular position changes (Buss 2002; Krapfl 2008; Reddy 2006). Description of the intervention Repositioning (i.e. turning people to change their body position to relieve or redistribute pressure) has long been a fundamental com- ponent of pressure ulcer prevention (PUP). Manual repositioning regimens are used in PU risk-prevention programs to re- distribute pressure between the body and the support surface (Manorama 2010).The 90o lateral position has been shown in laboratory stud- ies to decrease blood flow and transcutaneous oxygen tension close to anoxic levels (extremely low levels of oxygen) and to increase interface pressure. Conversely, this appears not to be the case when the patient is placed in a 30o lateral inclined tilt position. Repo-
  • 130. sitioning is regarded as also important for the prevention of other complications associated with prolonged immobility such as pneu- monia, joint contractures, and urinary tract infections. Best practice guidelines developed in Europe, USA and Aus- tralia advocate routine repositioning of people at risk of PUs. These guidelines commonly advocate two-hourly repositioning (Australian Wound Management Association 2011; Defloor 2000; European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 1998; Queensland Health 2009). These recommendations appear to be based on small stud- ies (not RCTs) conducted 20 or more years ago, that either com- pared different repositioning schedules or repositioning schedules 3Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. with no manual repositioning (spontaneous body movements)
  • 131. (Exton-Smith 1961; Norton 1962; Palmen 1987; Smith 1990). The usefulness of these studies for today’s decision making is fur- ther compromised since the standard of hospital mattresses has greatly improved since then. How the intervention might work Pressure, from lying or sitting on a particular part of the body results in oxygen deprivation to the particular area (Defloor 2000). Normally, this results in pain and discomfort, which stimulates the person to change position. However, if the person is unable to reposition themselves, or has impaired sensation and therefore does not experience the discomfort, assistance will be required. Repositioning reduces the duration of pressure experienced by the tissues and so decreases tissue hypoxia (Catania 2007) and consequently the theoretical risk of pressure ulceration (Braden 1987). Negative aspects of frequent repositioning
  • 132. Whilst frequent repositioning underpins current practice guide- lines, it may also be associated with negative consequences for pa- tients, nursing staff and health care (Australian Institute of Health and Welfare 2009; Bureau of Labor Statistics 2002; Carskadon 2005; Dawson 2007; Humphries 2008; Raymond 2004; Vieira 2009). Repositioning can lead to disruption of sleep, particularly sleep fragmentation (Humphries 2008). In acutely ill people, dis- ruption of sleep can lengthen recovery, suppress immune function and predispose people to infection (Carskadon 2005; Raymond 2004). A sleep cycle, which has light and deep stages of sleep, oc- curs about every 90 minutes. Consequently if repositioning is un- dertaken every two hours, it may result in fragmentation of sleep at a detrimental stage of the sleep cycle (Dawson 2007). Other negative effects of repositioning include possible increases
  • 133. in patients’ pain perception. Although regular movement is impor- tant, unnecessary repositioning may cause increased discomfort for people with wounds, stiff joints, bony pain or contractures. In addition to people experiencing the negative effects of reposi- tioning, nurses experience musculoskeletal disorders at a rate ex- ceeding that of workers in construction, mining, and manufactur- ing (Bureau of Labor Statistics 2002). These injuries are attributed partly to repeated manual patient-handling activities, often asso- ciated with repositioning patients and working in extremely awk- ward positions (Bureau of Labor Statistics 2002; Vieira 2009). Back pain and injury have a major impact on the efficiency of the nursing workforce (Trinkoff 2001). Registered nurses rank seventh across all occupations for back injuries involving days away from
  • 134. work in private industry (Bureau of Labor Statistics 2002). Back injuries and the resultant workers’ compensation claims for nurses are expensive (Dawson 2007). For example, injuries in the health- care sector cost Australia over AUD 4.3 billion in 2005 to 2006 (Australian Safety and Compensation Council 2009). Reducing the amount of manual handling undertaken by nurses when repo- sitioning patients could have major nursing and hospital benefits. Why it is important to do this review PUs may be painful, distressing and life-threatening (causing in- fection, sepsis and even death), yet many are preventable (Allman 1997; Schuurman 2009). Manual repositioning regimens are used in PU risk-prevention programs to alternate areas of pressure dis- tribution between the body and the support surface, including
  • 135. when sitting or lying in a chair (Manorama 2010). These strate- gies have major implications for repositioning hospitalised patients and warrant investigation. Whilst the potential negative aspects of repositioning have been described, the magnitude of any benefits are also uncertain, as is the optimum frequency of repositioning and the best position. It is noteworthy that, more recently, the National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2007 and the European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2009 Guidelines did not advocate 2-hourly repositioning as best practice due to a lack of empirical evidence. A rigorous systematic review is required to summarise current evidence for the effects of repositioning of adults, the optimal repositioning schedules, and to ensure that future trials are based on the best available evidence. O B J E C T I V E S The objectives of this review were to: 1. assess the effects of repositioning on the prevention of PUs
  • 136. in adults, regardless of risk or in-patient setting; 2. ascertain the most effective repositioning schedules for preventing PUs in adults; and 3. ascertain the incremental resource consequences and costs associated with implementing different repositioning regimens compared with alternate schedules or standard practice. M E T H O D S Criteria for considering studies for this review Types of studies Any RCT that used a method of random allocation of adult pa- tients (without an existing PU at baseline) between two or more 4Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. alternative repositioning interventions for PU prevention was el- igible. We also included cluster-RCTs, irrespective of the cluster group (i.e. patient, nurse, hospital). We excluded cross-over
  • 137. trials (even if randomised) and quasi-randomised studies, i.e. studies where treatment allocation was, for example, alternate or by date of birth. The review of health economic evidence included comparative full and partial economic evaluations conducted within the frame- work of eligible RCTs (i.e. cost-effectiveness analyses, cost- utility analyses, cost-benefit analyses and cost-analyses of a repositioning intervention and a relevant comparator), as well as RCTs report- ing more limited information, such as estimates of resource use or costs associated with repositioning and a comparator. The review considered only health economics studies conducted alongside ef- fectiveness studies included in the effectiveness component of the review.
  • 138. Types of participants Any adult, without an existing PU, admitted to any healthcare or long-term care setting. Types of interventions We anticipated that likely comparisons would include reposition- ing regimens compared with other standard practices or with al- ternative repositioning regimens. We included studies evaluating the following comparisons: 1. Comparisons between the frequencies of repositioning, for example 2-hourly turning, 3-hourly turning, 4-hourly turning etc. where the only systematic difference between groups was the frequency of repositioning. 2. Comparisons between different positions for repositioning, for example chair positioning, 30o recumbent tilt versus 90o lateral rotation, where the only systematic difference between groups was the positioning.
  • 139. 3. Comparisons of the repositioning regimen with standard practice (as defined by the author(s)). Types of outcome measures Primary outcomes The proportion of participants with a new PU of any stage, grade,or category using previously defined criteria (European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 1998; European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2009; National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2007), or however defined by the trial authors, anywhere on the body following recruitment into the study. We excluded trials where the unit of analysis was the PU and not the person or group. Secondary outcomes 1. Health-related quality of life (HRQoL) including utility scores (however reported by the author(s)). 2. Procedural pain (however reported by the author(s)). 3. Patient satisfaction (however reported by the author(s)). 4. Cost including: costs of PU prevention; costs of related health practitioner time or visits; costs avoided by PU
  • 140. prevention (e.g. treatment costs per patient per PU wound; costs to treat adverse events, infections or complications of PU; duration or costs of hospital stay for PU wound healing, adverse events and complications; indirect costs to society associated with PU such as lost productivity). 5. Incremental cost per event avoided, such as per additional PU prevented; incremental cost per life year gained; incremental cost per quality adjusted life year (QALY) gained, and cost- benefit ratio. Search methods for identification of studies Electronic searches We searched the following electronic databases to identify reports of relevant RCTs: 1. The Cochrane Wounds Group Specialised Register (searched 06 September 2013); 2. The Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials
  • 141. (CENTRAL) (2013, Issue 8); 3. Ovid MEDLINE (1948 to August, Week 4, 2013); 4. Ovid MEDLINE (In-Process & Other Non-Indexed Citations September 04, 2013); 5. Ovid EMBASE (1974 to 2013 Week 35); 6. EBSCO CINAHL (1982 to 30 August 2013). We searched the Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials (CENTRAL) using the following exploded MeSH headings and keywords: #1 MeSH descriptor Pressure Ulcer explode all trees #2 pressure NEXT (ulcer* or sore*):ti,ab,kw #3 decubitus NEXT (ulcer* or sore*):ti,ab,kw #4 (bed NEXT sore*) or bedsore*:ti,ab,kw #5 (#1 OR #2 OR #3 OR #4) #6 MeSH descriptor Posture explode all trees #7 (reposition* or re-position*):ti,ab,kw #8 position*:ti,ab,kw #9 (turn* NEAR/5 patient*):ti,ab,kw
  • 142. #10 (turn* NEAR/5 interval*):ti,ab,kw #11 (turn* NEAR/5 frequen*):ti,ab,kw #12 (body NEAR/5 postur*):ti,ab,kw #13 turning:ti,ab,kw #14 (pressure NEXT relie*):ti,ab,kw #15 (mobilis* or mobiliz*):ti,ab,kw 5Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. #16 (#6 OR #7 OR #8 OR #9 OR #10 OR #11 OR #12 OR #13 OR #14 OR #15) #17 (#5 AND #16). We adapted this strategy to search Ovid MEDLINE, Ovid EM- BASE and EBSCO CINAHL (See Appendix 1). We combined the Ovid MEDLINE search with the Cochrane Highly Sensi- tive Search Strategy for identifying randomised trials in MED- LINE: sensitivity- and precision-maximising version (2008 revi- sion) (Lefebvre 2011). We combined the EMBASE and
  • 143. CINAHL searches with the trial filters developed by the Scottish Intercolle- giate Guidelines Network (SIGN 2011). We conducted separate searches to identify economic studies in the following databases: 1. NHS Economic Evaluation Database (2013, Issue 8); 2. Ovid MEDLINE (In-Process & Other Non-Indexed Citations August, week 4, 2013); 3. Ovid EMBASE (1948 to 2013 week 35); 4. EBSCO CINAHL (1982 to 30 August 2013); 5. EURONHEED (http://infodoc.inserm.fr/euronheed/); 6. Health Economics Evaluations Database HEED (http:// onhttp://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/book/). We used the economics search strategy shown in Appendix 2 to search Ovid MEDLINE and adapt this strategy to search other databases. We also searched the following clinical trials registries for details
  • 144. of relevant protocols and contacted the relevant research teams in November 2012: 1. Clinical trials.gov; 2. International Clinical Trials Registry Platform search Portal; 3. Australian and New Zealand Clinical Trials Registry; 4. Current Controlled Trials. We did not restrict searches by language, study setting, date of publication or publication status. We made every effort to obtain translations of papers that were not published in English. Searching other resources We searched the reference lists of included studies and any sys- tematic reviews identified by the search process and contacted cor- responding authors of identified studies. Where appropriate, we contacted experts in the field (e.g. council members of the Euro- pean Wound Management Association, the National Pressure Ul- cer Advisory Panel, the World Union of Wound Healing
  • 145. Societies, and the Australian Wound Management Association) to ask for information about any unpublished studies. We included confer- ence proceedings or programme abstracts in our search. Where we were unable to obtain details of the full study, we contacted the author(s). Data collection and analysis Selection of studies Two review authors (BG, EM) independently assessed all titles and abstracts of studies retrieved from searching. Full reports of all potentially relevant trials were retrieved for further assessment of eligibility based on the inclusion criteria. Differences of opinion were resolved by consensus or referral to a third review author (WC). We recorded reasons for exclusion and were not blind study authorship. Data extraction and management
  • 146. For eligible studies, two review authors (BG, EM) independently extracted data using a pre-designed data collection tool while a third author (WC) adjudicated where there were differences of opinion. For studies where there was an economic component included, JW (Health Economist) and BG extracted the relevant data. We included studies published in duplicate, but extracted data to ensure that information was not missed and identified the primary reference for the purpose of this review. If data were missing from reports, we attempted to contact the trial authors to obtain the missing information. One review author (BG) entered the data into Review Manager 5 software (RevMan) and data were checked for accuracy by EM. Abstracted data included the follow- ing information. 1. Author, title, journal title, year of publication, country. 2. Healthcare setting.
  • 147. 3. Inclusion/exclusion criteria. 4. Sample size. 5. Patient characteristics by treatment group. 6. Methods (number eligible and randomised, adequacy of randomisation, allocation concealment, blinding, completeness of follow-up). 7. Treatment of missing values (e.g. use of intention-to-treat, per protocol or other imputation method). 8. Intervention details. 9. Types of outcome measures in relation to primary (percentage of new PU) and secondary outcomes. 10. Analysis; results and conclusions relevant to review. 11. Funding sources. For economic studies, we planned to extract additional data extract in relation to the following. 1. Estimates of specific items of resource use per person. 2. Estimates of unit costs (extracted separately to resource use). 3. Price year and currency.
  • 148. 4. Decision-making jurisdiction. 5. Analytic perspective. 6. A point estimate and a measure of uncertainty (e.g. standard error or confidence interval) for measures of incremental resource use, costs and cost-effectiveness, if reported. 7. Details of any sensitivity analyses undertaken, and any information regarding the impact of varying assumptions on the magnitude and direction of results. 6Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. http://infodoc.inserm.fr/euronheed/ http://infodoc.inserm.fr/euronheed/ http://infodoc.inserm.fr/euronheed/ http://infodoc.inserm.fr/euronheed/ http://onhttp:/onlinelibrary.wiley.com/book/ http://onhttp:/onlinelibrary.wiley.com/book/ http://onhttp:/onlinelibrary.wiley.com/book/ http://onhttp:/onlinelibrary.wiley.com/book/ http://onhttp:/onlinelibrary.wiley.com/book/ http://onhttp:/onlinelibrary.wiley.com/book/ Assessment of risk of bias in included studies
  • 149. Two review authors independently assessed the risk of bias of el- igible trials (BG, EM) using The Cochrane Collaboration tool for assessing risk of bias (Higgins 2011c).This tool addresses six specific domains; namely sequence generation, allocation conceal- ment, blinding, incomplete outcome data, selective outcome re- porting and other issues that may potentially bias the study (see Appendix 3 for details of the criteria on which the judgments were based). Items were rated as low risk of bias, high risk of bias or unclear (unknown) risk of bias. In assessing bias, the review au- thors were not blinded to the names of trial authors, institutions, or journals. In assessing the risk of bias, we distinguished between primary outcome (proportion of participants with a new PU), secondary subjective outcomes (HRQoL, procedural pain, patient satisfac- tion), and the objective economic outcome. As the primary out- come for this review, regardless of how it was measured, was
  • 150. sub- ject to potential observer bias, blinding of outcome assessment was particularly important. We planned to make separate judgements for secondary outcomes for the domain of incomplete outcome data. We classified trials as being at overall high risk of bias if they were rated as ’high’ for any one of three key domains (allocation concealment, blinding of outcome assessors and completeness of outcome data). Disagreements between review authors were resolved by consensus or referral to another review author (WC). Where there was a high risk of bias in any of the key domains, we endeavoured to contact the trial authors, and asked open-ended questions about the design and conduct of the study. We reported bias, and within economic evaluations, planned to use the Drummond checklist, as recommended by The Cochrane Collaboration (Shemilt 2011),
  • 151. to assess the methodological quality of full and partial economic evaluations. We presented an assessment of risk of bias using ’Risk of bias’ sum- mary figures, which detail all the judgments in a cross- tabulation of study by entry. This display of internal validity indicates the weight the reader may give the results of each study. We classified studies as being at high risk of bias overall if any one of the criteria was judged to be at high risk of bias. We recorded trials as being at unclear risk of bias if authors did not report validity criteria. Measures of treatment effect We have reported effect estimates for dichotomous outcomes (e.g. relative proportions of people developing PU during follow up) as risk ratios (RR) with 95% confidence intervals. RR is the pro- portion of participants developing PUs in the experimental
  • 152. group divided by proportion in the control group and indicates the like- lihood of PU development on the experimental regimen (turning frequency or position) compared with a standard treatment. We have used the RR rather than odds ratio (OR), since ORs may be misinterpreted as RR, and can give an inflated impression of the effect size when event rates are greater than 20% (Deeks 2002). We planned to use MD as a summary statistic in meta-analysis when outcome measurements in all studies were made on the same scale. Review of economic evaluations We planned to present a tabled analysis of economic data in accor- dance with current guidance on the use of economics methods in the preparation of Cochrane reviews (Shemilt 2011). We planned to classify economic evaluations according to the framework in Drummond 2005, and to assess the methodology using the check-
  • 153. list published by Drummond and colleagues. We planned to tabu- late the main characteristics and results of the identified economic evaluation studies, and to expand these with a narrative descrip- tion. For any included studies, given the likely lack of direct compa- rability in resource use and cost data between different health- care contexts and settings, we did not intend to pool economic outcomes. Rather, we planned to incorporate a discussion of key drivers and impact of assumptions on the available economic eval- uations, scenarios that are likely to lead to the most and least cost- effective use of repositioning for PUP, as well as guidance on future research that might be required to assess the economic value of repositioning as an intervention for PUP. Costs If we found any economic studies, all substantial costs that were
  • 154. observed to differ between people repositioned for PUP and peo- ple administered the comparator treatment were intended to be captured and reported as part of the review of economic evalua- tions. We planned to report resource utilisation and unit costs separately, along with the currency and price year in each original study. These costs would then be converted to 2012 values by employing a web- based conversion tool that applies implicit price deflators for gross domestic product (GDP) of that currency and then converted into the currency most frequently observed in the articles reviewed using Purchasing Power Parities (PPP) (Shemilt 2010). The main costs were likely to be those associated with the devel- opment of PUs, specialist and other practitioner costs as measured by time or number of visits, potential cost-savings from a change
  • 155. in the number of bed days in hospital, and costs stemming from differing rates of adverse events and complications (including pro- cedures initiated due to the failure of wounds to heal, such as am- putation). We planned to identify key cost drivers that would en- able users of the review to gain a clear understanding of the nature of resource use associated with repositioning for PUP. Health state utility weights 7Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. We planned to examine information on the change in HRQoL re- ported by included trials via utilities measured by a multi- attribute utility instrument (MAUI) or other approaches (such as the time trade-off, standard gamble). We planned to assess the utility data
  • 156. for comparability and representativeness considering issues such as the stages of PU, the patient populations, timing of the baseline point and follow-up collection, the MAUI used and the algorithm for scoring the MAUI. We planned to present a discussion of the potential impact on HRQoL attributable to the intervention as part of the review. Unit of analysis issues In all trials included in our review, we treated the person as the unit of analysis and we took into account the level at which ran- domisation occurred. For a parallel group design, we collected and analysed a single measurement for each outcome for each person. In these types of studies, it was possible that the unit of analysis was the PU rather than the individual person. We considered in- stances where there were multiple observations per person for the
  • 157. same outcome. Where this occurred we first used the PU that was the most advanced in relation to its staging. If this could not be determined, then we contacted the trial author(s). For cluster-randomised trials that had not taken clustering into account in the study analysis, we considered adjusted sample sizes using the methods described in Chapter 16 of the Cochrane Hand- book for Systematic Reviews of Interventions (Higgins 2011a). How- ever the best estimate of a relevant intraclass correlation coefficient (ICC) for estimating the design effect was so small (0.001) that we used the original reported study data without adjustment. This ICC (0.001) was estimated from a relevant cluster trial (Moore 2011) and identical to that estimated from a falls study (similar patient group, similar context of care) (Cumming 2008) so we felt justified in this approach. Dealing with missing data If some outcome data remained missing despite our attempts to
  • 158. obtain complete outcome data from authors, we planned to per- form an available-case analysis, based on the numbers of people for whom outcome data were known since this is a more con- servative approach in this context than using numbers originally randomised and assuming that losses to follow up did not incur pressure injury. We also planned to conduct best-case and worst- case analysis where we needed to test the robustness of findings to different assumptions about the outcomes of people who did not contribute endpoint data. If standard deviations (SD) were missing, we planned to impute them from other studies or, where possible, computed them from standard errors (SE) using the for- mula SD = SE x √ N, where these values were available (Higgins 2011a). Assessment of heterogeneity We considered clinical and statistical heterogeneity in relation
  • 159. to the primary outcomes, PU incidence, and secondary outcomes such as HRQoL patient satisfaction, and procedural pain. For cluster-trials, we assessed the outcome at the same level as the group allocation (Deeks 2011). We assessed clinical heterogeneity by examining the types of par- ticipants, and/or groups, interventions and their duration, and the outcomes of each study. If appropriate, we pooled data using meta- analysis (using RevMan 5). We did not plan to pool studies for economic outcomes as the variability in, and generalisability of, these outcomes were considered problematic. Statistical heterogeneity was assessed visually and by using the Chi 2 statistic with significance being set at P value less than 0.10. In addition we investigated the degree of heterogeneity by calculating the I2 statistic (Deeks 2002). The I2 test examines the percentage
  • 160. of total variation across studies due to heterogeneity rather than chance. Values over 50% indicate a substantial level of heterogene- ity. Where appropriate, in the absence of clinical heterogeneity and in the presence of statistical heterogeneity (I2 greater than 60%), we used a random effects model, Where studies were sufficiently similar to consider pooling, we planned to use a fixed effect model for low to moderate levels of heterogeneity (I2 values between 0% and under 60%). We did not plan to pool studies where hetero- geneity exceeded 75% (Higgins 2011b). Assessment of reporting biases We planned to assess potential publication bias using funnel plots and to assess funnel plot asymmetry visually (Sterne 2011). Subgroup analysis and investigation of heterogeneity We planned a subgroup analysis, if possible, to examine the effect
  • 161. of potentially influential factors on outcome, e.g. care setting and patient characteristics. Sensitivity analysis We planned to perform sensitivity analyses where necessary to test whether findings were robust to the method used to obtain them, and compared the results of two or more meta-analyses using different assumptions (Higgins 2011c). Presentation of results We planned to include the following primary and secondary out- comes (both desirable and undesirable) in the summary of find- ings tables: 1. development of a new PU; 2. HRQoL; 3. pain; 8Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
  • 162. 4. patient satisfaction; 5. costs; 6. incremental cost. R E S U L T S Description of studies See Characteristics of included studies; Characteristics of excluded studies; and, Characteristics of studies awaiting classification. With the exception of the TURN trial (Bergstrom), we are not aware of any relevant ongoing trials (ISRCTN register checked September, 2013). Results of the search Interventions search Electronic searches yielded 258 results of which we excluded 254 because they did not meet one or more of our inclusion criteria. We retrieved full text versions of the remaining four papers for inspection, and included three trials in the review (Defloor
  • 163. 2005; Moore 2011; Young 2004). See Figure 1 study flow diagram. All the included trials had been published in the last 10 years. One ongoing study was identified (Bergstrom) which will be considered for inclusion in the next update of this review. 9Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Figure 1. Study flow diagram for clinical studies 10Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Economic analysis search Electronic searches yielded 238 references, of which 237 were ex- cluded because they did not meet our inclusion criteria. One eco-
  • 164. nomic substudy by Moore 2013 was identified. See Figure 2 study flow diagram. 11Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Figure 2. Study flow diagram for economic studies 12Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Included studies Types of participants We did not adjust sample sizes for clustering in the two cluster RCTs (see above) (Defloor 2005; Moore 2011). A total of 1097 participants were enrolled in the three trials included in this re- view (Defloor 2005; Moore 2011; Young 2004). Total numbers
  • 165. randomised in the included studies were 838 (Defloor 2005), 213 (Moore 2011), and 46 (Young 2004). However, in Defloor 2005 only 262 participants were randomised to arms relevant to this re- view meaning a total of 521 randomised participants were poten- tially considered here. Ultimately 502 participants were included in the analyses reported here as 19 people were lost to follow up and we conducted a complete case analysis. Within these trials the majority of participants were residents of long-term care settings (Defloor 2005; Moore 2011), whilst one small study recruited 46 participants from a single acute care facility (Young 2004). Partic- ipants in all three trials were aged over 65 years and all trials were conducted in Europe (Belgium (Defloor 2005), Ireland (Moore 2011), and Wales (Young 2004)). Types of interventions
  • 166. In two of the three trials (Moore 2011; Young 2004), a 30º tilt position was compared with a standard 90º supine/lateral position. Participants in both the intervention and control groups were tilted left side, back, right side, and back. Essentially, the Moore 2011 and Young 2004 trials compared the same tilts (30º vs 90º) and the same repositioning frequency for the 30º tilt. However, there was a difference in the frequency of repositioning overnight for the 90º tilt groups. In the Moore 2011 trial, patients in the 90º tilt group were repositioned 6-hourly overnight compared with two to 3-hourly overnight in the Young 2004 trial. The third trial (Defloor 2005) evaluated different repositioning frequencies (2-, 3-, 4- and 6-hourly) using a semi-Fowler or lat- eral position, in combination with standard or viscoelastic mat- tresses. The participants receiving the 2 hourly and 3 hourly repo- sitioning all received the standard hospital mattress whilst those
  • 167. receiving the 4 and 6 hourly repositioning received viscoelastic foam mattresses. In this study there was also a large “standard care” arm comprising 576 people allocated care based on nurses’ clinical judgement (a range of support surfaces but no repositioning). We disregarded this treatment arm for the purposes of this review as it systematically differed from the other 4 arms in both the allocation of support surface and repositioning. In the other 4 groups, co- interventions such as the use of nutritional supplements, skin care and allocation of pressure relieving cushions during chair sitting were also used. Types of outcomes The primary outcome in each of the included trials was the propor- tion of participants developing a new PU (Defloor 2005; Moore 2011; Young 2004). Two trials reported the incidence of PU and
  • 168. included Stages 1 to 4 over a 28-day period (Defloor 2005; Moore 2011), while the third trial reported a much briefer follow-up pe- riod of 24 hours and reported only Stage 1 PU (i.e. non-blanch- able erythema) (Young 2004). Excluded studies One trial was excluded after the full text had been screened (Vanderwee 2007). In this trial, participants who had pre- existing Stage 1 non-blanchable erythema at baseline were included, and those who did not have non-blanchable erythema were excluded. We had pre-specified that only studies where patients had no ex- isting PU skin damage were eligible for inclusion. Risk of bias in included studies We present an assessment of the risk of bias using ’Risk of bias’ summary figures (Figure 3 and Figure 4), which detail all of the judgements in cross-tabulations of study by entry. All three trials
  • 169. were at unclear or at high risk of bias. 13Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Figure 3. Risk of bias summary: review authors’ judgements about each risk of bias item for each included study 14Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Figure 4. Risk of bias graph: review authors’ judgements about each risk of bias item presented as percentages across all included studies Allocation Random sequence generation All three trials described a process to generate the random allo- cation list (Defloor 2005; Moore 2011; Young 2004). Two tri-
  • 170. als used a computer-based random number generator (Defloor 2005; Moore 2011), while the Young 2004 trial used sequentially- numbered envelopes that contained a randomisation code. In the Defloor 2005 trial, randomisation also occurred over a second 4- week period. During this second period, each ward used a differ- ent prevention scheme than used in the first 4-week period. Allocation concealment Assessment of allocation concealment in the three included trials involved examination of whether trial authors described how the assignment sequence was protected before and until allocation. We could not adequately assess the extent of allocation concealment for the Defloor 2005 trial since the randomisation was influenced during the trial by resources and we therefore rated this “unclear”. In the Young 2004 trial, the allocation was concealed from the researcher and the nurses in a sealed and sequentially numbered
  • 171. envelope (low risk of bias). In the Moore 2011 study, allocation concealment was achieved using remote randomisation (also low risk of bias). Blinding Blinding of participants and personnel It is hard to envisage how blinding of participants and personnel to the frequency and nature of repositioning could be possible and therefore all three trials are likely to be at risk of performance bias. Two out of three trial reports did not state whether participants and nursing staff were blinded (Defloor 2005; Young 2004). The Moore 2011 trial was described as “open label”, usually meaning that the participants, care givers and researchers were aware of group allocation. The Defloor 2005 and Moore 2011 trials were classified as at high risk of performance bias while the Young 2004 trial was classified as unclear risk of bias.
  • 172. Blinding of outcome assessors There was considerable variability in assessment of all grades of PU among the three trials (Defloor 2005; Moore 2011; Young 2004). Such variability is problematic, as the use of a subjective primary outcome measure is open to ascertainment bias. Outcome measurement was not blinded in two trials (Defloor 2005; Moore 2011) and these were rated as high risk. In the Young 2004 trial, the outcome assessor was “unaware” of group allocation, as the positioning aids (pillows) were removed from under the patient prior to outcome measurement (low risk). Only 15Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Moore 2011 considered the reliability of outcome using several outcome assessors to minimise this form of bias. However, inter- rater reliability data were not presented.
  • 173. Incomplete outcome data Assessment of whether incomplete outcome data had been ade- quately addressed in each trial involved examining whether reasons for attrition or exclusion were reported, whether there was re- in- clusion of participants, and whether completeness of data for each main outcome was described. In two of the three trials (Defloor 2005; Young 2004), participants were excluded from the analysis in sufficient numbers to threaten bias. Defloor 2005 excluded 77 (9.2%) of 838 randomised participants from the analysis, and in the Young 2004 trial, seven (15.2%) of the 46 randomised partici- pants were excluded; two due to death (both in the control group) and five in the experimental group, who were unable to tolerate the intervention and for whom outcome data collection then ceased. For both the Young 2004 and Defloor 2005 trials, we conducted
  • 174. a complete case analysis (which makes no assumption about the outcomes for patients lost to follow up as this was felt more con- servative than analysing losses as if they had not sustained pressure injury). Attrition bias and lack of intention-to-treat analysis were contributing factors to incomplete outcome data. In Moore 2011, all randomised participants were included in the analysis. Selective reporting Each study reported all pre-specified outcomes - as defined in the papers - in the results. No published protocol was available for any of these trials. Other potential sources of bias We planned to assess potential publication bias using funnel plots and to assess funnel plot asymmetry visually, however, as only three studies were included in this review, this was not appropriate
  • 175. (Sterne 2011). Effects of interventions Comparison 1: frequencies of repositioning (one trial) One cluster randomised trial (Defloor 2005) was included in this comparison however we did not adjust the data for clustering as the ICC of 0.001 (from Moore 2011 and Cumming 2008) was so small as to make no difference. Primary outcomes The proportion of new pressure ulcers of any grade, stage or category In the Defloor 2005 trial, various repositioning regimens of dif- ferent frequencies (2-, 3-, 4- and 6-hourly), positions (i.e. semi- Fowlers and lateral), and support surfaces (i.e. viscoelastic and standard mattresses) were compared. For the purposes of this review we compared the outcomes for repositioning frequency where the support surface was the same for both groups i.e., 2-hourly vs. 3-hourly repositioning (all on the
  • 176. standard hospital mattress) and 4-hourly vs. 6-hourly reposition- ing (all on the viscoelastic foam mattress). On the standard hospi- tal mattress, 39/63 (62%) participants receiving 2 hourly reposi- tioning developed a pressure ulcer of any severity compared with 40/58 (69%) receiving 4-hourly repositioning (RR 0.90, 95% CI 0.69 to 1.16) (Analysis 1.1). For participants nursed on viscoelastic foam mattresses, 30/66 (46%) of participants receiving 4-hourly repositioning developed a pressure ulcer of any severity compared with 39/63 (62%) of those receiving 6-hourly repositioning (RR 0.73, 95% CI 0.53 to 1.02) (Analysis 2.1). The proportion of new pressure ulcers category 2 to 4 We also examined whether there was a treatment effect when only breaks in the skin (category 2 to 4 ulcers) were analysed however we did not pre-specify this analysis in our protocol and the results
  • 177. are merely exploratory. On the standard hospital mattress, 9/63 (14%) of participants re- ceiving 2 hourly repositioning developed an ulcer of Category 2 and above compared with 14/58 participants (24%) receiving 3- hourly repositioning (RR 0.59, 95% CI 0.28 to 1.26) (Analysis 1.2). On the viscoelastic foam mattress, 2/66 (3%) participants receiving 4-hourly repositioning developed an ulcer of Category 2 or above compared with 10/63 (16%) receiving 6-hourly repo- sitioning (RR 0.19, 95% CI 0.04 to 0.84) (Analysis 2.2). Comparison 2: different positions for repositioning Primary outcomes The proportion of new pressure ulcers of any grade, stage or category (two trials) Both trials reported this outcome (Moore 2011; Young 2004). Moore 2011 examined the use of 30° 3-hourly tilt (overnight) compared with repositioning 6-hourly 90° tilt (overnight) in a study involving 259 randomised (252 analysed) participants. The
  • 178. 16Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. incidence of pressure ulcers (Categories 1 and 2) was significantly lower in the 30° tilt group (RR 0.27, 95% CI 0.08, 0.91) compared with the 90° tilt group (Analysis 3.1). This study was at high risk of bias due to unblinded outcome assessment. In the small trial by Young 2004 (46 randomised, 39 analysed par- ticipants), the main outcome was Category/Stage 1 non-blanch- able erythema, and the follow-up period was 24 hours. A 3- hourly 30o tilt compared with a 3-hourly 90o lateral (overnight) and supine position (overnight) was used. There was no statistically significant difference in risk of pressure ulceration (RR 1.37, 95% CI 0.25 to 7.41) (Analysis 3.1) however this comparison is grossly
  • 179. underpowered with only 5 events.The trials of Moore 2011 and Young 2004 compared the same tilts (30º vs 90º) using simi- lar repositioning frequencies; 3-hourly for the 30º tilt; 6-hourly overnight for the 90º tilt in Moore 2011; and 2- to 3-hourly overnight in the Young 2004 trial therefore we pooled them us- ing a random effects model (moderate to high heterogeneity, I2 = 69%). Overall there was no difference in the risk of Category/ Stage 1 or 2 pressure injury (persistent erythema) between 30º and 90º tilts however this comparison is at risk of a Type II error due to the lack of statistical power (pooled RR 0.62, 95% CI 0.10 to 3.97) (Analysis 3.1). Secondary outcomes Health-related quality of life (HRQoL) No trial reported health-related quality of life (HRQoL). Procedural pain No trial reported procedural pain. Patient satisfaction
  • 180. No trial reported patient satisfaction. Cost One within-trial cost evaluation by Moore 2013 is included in this review. Moore 2013 performed a cost-effectiveness analysis based on data derived from their cluster randomised controlled trial (Moore 2011) comparing 3-hourly repositioning using the 30° tilt overnight (n=99, unadjusted for clustering) with standard care consisting of 6-hourly repositioning using the 90° lateral rota- tion overnight (n=114, unadjusted for clustering), in participants recruited from 12 long term aged-care facilities in Ireland. Moore 2013 compared the nursing time costs and incidence of PU development over the four week trial period. Nurse time was calculated from information recorded in the clinical study indicat- ing number of turns per patient, nurses per turn, and nurse time per turn. A unit cost of EURO23.94 per nurse hour was then ap- plied, based on the rate for a staff nurse scale point 8 in mid-
  • 181. 2009. Efficacy was measured as PU incidence (the primary outcome of the clinical trial), which would appear to be represented as the number of patients developing a new PU during the four week trial period. Moore 2013 also reported some data for the total cost of dressings for treating PUs that developed during the trial, but did not report a unit cost and did not include dressing costs in the incremental analysis. Incremental cost per event avoided The 30° 3-hourly tilt positioning intervention was reported to be cost saving in nurse time compared with standard care (mean nurse time cost per patient EURO206.6 vs EURO253.1, incremental difference EURO-46.5; 95%CI: EURO-1.25 to EURO-74.60) (Moore 2013). The intervention dominated the control in terms of cost-effectiveness, since the trial also found the intervention to be more effective than the control. The lower nurse time cost for
  • 182. the intervention group despite the greater turning frequency was due to the lower time and reduced number of nurses required for each turn. Given the intervention dominated the control, it was unnecessary for Moore 2013 to estimate an incremental cost-effectiveness ra- tio although they did. There is some inconsistency in the report- ing and interpretation of the incremental analysis made by Moore 2013, leading to a lack of clarity in the paper around the estimated cost-effectiveness. Moore 2013 suggest their efficacy outcome in the incremental analysis as both “patient free of PU” and “PU avoided”. The rationale for changing between outcome measures of “patient free of PU” and “PU avoided” is unclear. Neverthe- less, in this instance these outcome measures would appear to be equivalent since the number of patients developing an ulcer and the number of PUs developing during the trial was the same (n=
  • 183. 16) (Moore 2011). Moore 2013 reported the incremental cost per patient free of PU (-EURO73.40) and per pressure ulcer avoided (-EURO547.00). Although not explicitly stated, the estimated in- cremental cost effectiveness ratios appear to be intended to rep- resent an incremental cost per additional incremental outcome. However, these values are inconsistent with each other, given the incidence of PUs developing was the same in the trial (Moore 2011) regardless of whether defined as number of patients devel- oping PU or number of PUs developing during the trial. Further, neither of these values could be confirmed from the data provided in the main body of the Moore 2013 paper. The former value (- EURO73.40 per patient free of PU) appears to have been incor- rectly estimated from the data presented in the paper. The lat- ter value of -EURO547 per (additional) PU avoided is consistent with the efficacy data presented in the abstract, but the efficacy
  • 184. data presented in the abstract is inconsistent with efficacy data presented in the main body of the report, and does not precisely match the efficacy data provided in the original clinical trial report (Moore 2011). Despite this limitation in interpretation, the reported findings 17Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. suggest that for every 100 patients treated with the 3-hourly repositioning intervention rather than standard care, EURO4,650 would be saved in nurse time costs and an additional 8 patients would avoid a PU. Moore 2013 concluded that repositioning ev- ery 3 hours using the 30° tilt is less costly in terms of nursing time and more effective than standard care involving repositioning ev- ery 6 hours using 90° tilt.
  • 185. D I S C U S S I O N Summary of main results The proportion of new pressure ulcers of any grade, stage or category The main aim of this systematic review was to present and ap- praise all existing evidence regarding the relative effectiveness of repositioning on the prevention of PUs in adults. There is limited evidence, with only three small trials and data from a total of 502 participants contributing to this analysis. Moreover the three trials were at high risk of bias. The results of the review are that we have insufficient evidence to draw a reliable conclusion of whether more frequent repositioning (in this review we report 2-hourly vs. 3-hourly, and 4-hourly vs. 6- hourly) or different positions (the 30° tilt compared with the 90°
  • 186. lateral position) are more effective in reducing pressure damage. The lack of statistical power means we cannot say there is no bene- fit associated with more frequent repositioning since in each com- parison the proportion of people developing pressure ulcers was lower in the groups receiving more frequent changes of position but the differenced did not reach conventional levels of statistical significance and so may be chance rather than “real” differences. There was a statistically significant reduction in pressure ulcers of Category 2 and above with 4-hourly repositioning compared with 6-hourly (Defloor 2005) however we did not prespecify this outcome and this finding is exploratory. It is noteworthy that in Defloor 2005, 46% of participants receiv- ing 4-hourly repositioning and 62% of those receiving 6-hourly developed pressure damage, despite being nursed on viscoelastic
  • 187. foam mattresses. This suggests that although another Cochrane re- view (McInnes 2011) found that more advanced foam mattresses reduce pressure damage relative to the standard hospital mattress, high rates of pressure damage are still observed and careful moni- toring of skin condition is required. Repositioning regimens are widely used and recommended in best practice guidelines (European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 1998; Australian Wound Management Association 2011), however there is limited empirical evidence of their effect on the prevention of pressure ulcers. That said, the theoretical rationale for reposi- tioning (to reduce isolated tissue ischaemia by relieving pressure) makes physiological sense. However current evidence does not en- able conclusions to be drawn regarding the optimum position or frequency of re-positioning. The lack of experimental evidence
  • 188. for repositioning per se, or for specific positions and frequencies, should not be interpreted as evidence of ineffectiveness. Overall completeness and applicability of evidence There was limited evidence available to assess the benefits of dif- ferent regimens for the prevention of pressure ulcers. Overall the three studies in this review had sample sizes resulting in a lack of statistical power to detect a treatment effect if it exists. Small sam- ple sizes increase the risk of Type 2 errors and reduce the precision of the estimates. There was wide variation in sample sizes among the trials. Only one of the trials was conducted in an acute care setting and included only hospital patients over the age of 65 years (Young 2004). The primary study outcome reported in all three trials was the inci- dence of pressure ulcers. None of the included trials examined
  • 189. out- comes such as pain, quality of life or participant satisfaction. Only one trial author performed a parallel economic substudy (Moore 2013). The focus of the interventions of the three trials that met our in- clusion criteria varied, with two trials using tilts and three- hourly overnight repositioning (Moore 2011; Young 2004), while the third used various repositioning frequencies and positions in com- bination with different types of mattresses (Defloor 2005). An- other limitation was the inconsistency in follow-up periods, which ranged between 24 hours (Young 2004) to 28 days (Defloor 2005 and Moore 2011). All three trials were conducted in Europe which may limit the generalisability of the findings. Furthermore, tech- nological developments in mattress composition and materials, as
  • 190. well as bed design, has occurred since the two earliest studies were conducted, which also limits the external validity of these results, as it is likely that other support surfaces are now in use. Quality of the evidence The quality of the body of evidence has been appraised using the GRADE approach in relation to study limitations, inconsistency of results,indirectness, imprecision and risk of bias,as specified in the Handbook (Schünemann 2011) and a Summary of Findings Table will be included in the next update. There is very low quality of evidence from the three trials that assessed the use of different repositioning regimens. The evidence was downgraded because of the low number of participants with consequent imprecision together with high risk of bias. The primary outcome, pressure ulcer development, requires a subjective judgement of whether 18Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review)
  • 191. Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. tissue damage has occurred (at least for Grade 1 pressure ulcer) and only one study (Young 2004) used blinded outcome assessment. Potential biases in the review process We followed clearly defined, pre-specified procedures to prevent potential bias in the review process. A comprehensive and system- atic literature search was conducted, that was both transparent and reproducible. That notwithstanding, it is possible that we missed trials published in journals that were outside our search strategy. Whilst we had intended to conduct a sensitivity analysis to test the robustness of the results to different assumptions about the outcomes of people who were lost to follow up, we felt that this was not necessary due to the poor volume and quality of the evi-
  • 192. dence and our consequent inability to draw any conclusions (no sensitivity analysis would help in this regard). None of the review authors has any conflict of interest. Agreements and disagreements with other studies or reviews Our results are consistent with others’ assessment of the evidence for repositioning. The systematic review by Reddy 2006, was pub- lished before one of our included trials, Moore 2011, was under- taken. The results of the review by Reddy 2006 suggested that the evidence around repositioning remains somewhat inconclu- sive, and the methodology for PUP trials sub optimal. A U T H O R S ’ C O N C L U S I O N S Implications for practice There is currently insufficient evidence that the 30° tilt is more effective than the 90° tilt (two trials, only 21 events in total). Repositioning in some form is recommended in all clinical guide- lines though implementation is probably variable and highly de-
  • 193. pendent on the available resources (particularly staffing levels). It is noteworthy that more recent clinical guidelines no longer ad- vocate repositioning patients every two hours (European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2009; National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2007). It is surprising that, to date, there is little evidence available from RCTs that addresses the question of whether repositioning pa- tients does decrease the risk of acquiring pressure ulcers. The lack of evidence is a cause for concern considering that estimates of incidence of hospital-acquired pressure ulcers range from less than 3% to over 30% of patients (Mulligan 2011; Queensland Health 2008; Schuurman 2009; Nixon 2006). The aetiology of pressure ulcer development is linked to localised vascular obstruction that reduces capillary blood flow to the skin
  • 194. surface area (European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2009). Thus, there are reasonable grounds to expect that repositioning hospi- talised patients will minimise the risk of oxygen deprivation and nutrients that are required for tissue repair. However, the opti- mal frequency with which this should occur must consider the other negative effects of turning such as the potential for sleep disruption,heightened increases in patients’ pain perception and, for nurses, musculoskeletal injuries Implications for research There is an urgent need for appropriately-powered, high-quality, multicentre trials to evaluate the clinical and cost effectiveness of repositioning regimens on the prevention of pressure ulcers. The modest sample sizes in the trials reviewed is a major limitation. Thus in future trials, larger numbers of participants are needed, particularly if cluster trials are conducted. Two of the thee trials reviewed here were conducted in long-term care settings, therefore, there is a need to use acute care settings to address the rise in
  • 195. prevalence of hospital acquired pressure ulcers (Mulligan 2011). Consistency in the measures used to classify pressure ulcers of any severity is essential. Given the high costs associated with the prevention and treatment of pressure ulcers, priority should be given to robust RCTs with economic evaluations. Trialists should consider comparisons of: 1. the repositioning frequencies and optimal positioning; 2. the effects of repositioning in patients with limited mobility (e.g. paraplegia); 3. the economic costs (including incremental costs) of PUs; and, 4. the economic and social impacts of PUs on patients’ HRQoL using valid and reliable HRQoL measures. Good quality trials also need to address the methodological limi- tations identified in the trials of this review. Trialists must ensure
  • 196. transparency of research process and adhere to the CONSORT statement for reporting RCTs (The CONSORT Statement 2010). To minimise the sources of bias, trialists need to pay careful at- tention to elements of research design and execution with regard to allocation concealment, randomisation, blinding, and partici- pant attrition (Polit 2010). For instance, having an observer who is blinded to the outcome perform the outcome assessment. If cluster-RCTs are used, trialists need also to consider the potential for bias in terms of selection bias, baseline comparability, analysis, and loss of clusters (Higgins 2011a). A C K N O W L E D G E M E N T S 19Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. The authors would like to thank the following referees: Wounds Group Editors Nicky Cullum and Andrea Nelson; Trials
  • 197. Search Co-odinator Ruth Foxlee; Statistical Consultant Giovanni Casazza; and, Expert Referees Zena Moore and Carol Dealey.The authors also thank Ms Jodie Vickery from Griffith University for assistance with selection of the economic studies and Elizabeth Royle for copy editing. R E F E R E N C E S References to studies included in this review Defloor 2005 {published data only} Defloor T, De Bacquer D, Grypdonck MH. The effect of various combinations of turning and pressure reducing devices on the incidence of pressure ulcers. International Journal of Nursing Studies 2005;42(1):37–46. Moore 2011 {published data only (unpublished sought but not used)} Moore Z, Cowman S, Conroy RM. A randomised controlled clinical trial of repositioning, using the 30o tilt, for the prevention of pressure ulcers. Journal of Clinical
  • 198. Nursing 2011;20(17-18):2633–44. Young 2004 {published data only} Young T. The 30 degree tilt position vs the 90 degree lateral and supine positions in reducing the incidence of non- blanching erythema in a hospital inpatient population: a randomised controlled trial. Journal of Tissue Viability 2004;14(3):88, 90, 92-6. References to studies excluded from this review Vanderwee 2007 {published data only} Vanderwee K, Grypdonck MHF, De Bacquer D, Defloor T. Effectiveness of turning with unequal time intervals on the incidence of pressure ulcer lesions. Journal of Advanced Nursing 2007;57(1):59–68. References to ongoing studies Bergstrom {unpublished data only} TURN Study. Ongoing study Started in 2008 and completed in June 2011. Additional references
  • 199. Allman 1995 Allman RM, Goode PS, Patrick MM, Burst N, Bartolucci AA. Pressure ulcer risk factors among hospitalised patients with activity limitation. JAMA 1995;273:865–70. Allman 1997 Allman RM. Pressure ulcer prevalence, incidence, risk factors, and impact. Clinics in Geriatric Medicine 1997;13 (3):421–36. Australian Institute of Health and Welfare 2009 Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. Australian Hospital Statistics 2007-08. Health services series no. 33. Cat. No. HSE 71. Report. Canberra: Australian Governement, 2009. Australian Safety and Compensation Council 2009 Australian Safety and Compensation Council. The costs of work-related injury and illness for Australian employers, workers and the community. ASCC. Canberra, 2009. Australian Wound Management Association 2011
  • 200. Australian Wound Management Association. Pan Pacific clinical practice guideline for the prevention and management of pressure Injury. Clinical Guideline October 2011. Bennett 2004 Bennett G, Dealey C, Posnett J. The cost of pressure ulcers in the UK. Age and Ageing 2004;33(3):230–5. Braden 1987 Braden BJ, Bergstrom N. A conceptual scheme for the study of the aetiology of pressure sores. Rehabilitation Nursing 1987;12:8–16. Braden 2005 Braden BJ, Maklebust J. Preventing pressure ulcers with the Braden scale: an update on this easy-to-use tool that assess a patient’s risk. American Journal of Nursing 2005;105(5): 70–2. Brandeis 2001 Brandeis GH, Berlowitz DR, Katz P. Are pressure ulcers
  • 201. preventable? A survey of experts. Advances in Skin and Wound Care 2001;14(5):244–8. Bureau of Labor Statistics 2002 United States Department of Labor. Case and demographic characteristics for work-related injuries and illnesses involving days away from work. Resource table 10: detailed occupation by selected parts of body affected. Report. Canberra, 2002. Buss 2002 Buss I, Halfens R, Abu-Saad H. The most effective time interval for repositioning subjects at risk of pressure sore development. Rehabilitation Nursing 2002;27(2):59–66. Carskadon 2005 Carskadon MA, Dement WC. Normal human sleep: an overview. In: Kryger, MH, Roth T, Dement WC editor (s). Principles and Practice of Sleep Medicine. 4th Edition. Philadelphia: Elsevier Sanders, 2005. 20Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review)
  • 202. Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Catania 2007 Catania K, James P, Moran M. PUPPI: The Pressure Ulcer Prevention Protocol Interventions. American Journal of Nursing 2007;107(4):44–52. Cumming 2008 Cumming RG, Sherrington C, Lord SR, Simpson JM, Vogler C, Cameron ID, Naganathan V, Prevention of Older People’s Injury Falls Prevention in Hospitals Research Group. Cluster randomised trial of a targeted multifactorial intervention to prevent falls among older people in hospital.. BMJ 2008;336:758. Dawson 2007 Dawson A, McLennan S, Schiller S, Jull GA, Hodges PW, Stewart S. Interventions to prevent back pain and back injury in nurses: a systematic review. Occupational and
  • 203. Environmental Medicine 2007;64:642–50. Deeks 2002 Deeks J. Issues in the selection of a summary statistic for meta analysis of clinical trials with binary outcomes. Statistics in Medicine 2002;21(1):575–600. Deeks 2011 Deeks JJ, Higgins JPT, Altman DG, on behalf of the Cochrane Statistical Methods Group and the Cochrane Bias Methods Group (Editors). Chapter 9: Analysing data and undertaking meta-analyses. In Higgins JPT, Green S (editors). Cochrane Handbook for Systematic Reviews of Interventions Version 5.1.0 [updated March 2011]. The Cochrane Collaboration, 2011. Available from www.cochrane-handbook.org. Defloor 2000 Defloor T. The effect of position and mattress on interface pressure. Applied Nursing Research 2000;13:2–11. Drummond 2005
  • 204. Drummond MF, Sculpher MJ, Torrance GW, O’Brien BJ, Stoddart GL. Methods for the Economic Evaluation of Health Care Programs. 3rd Edition. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2005. European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 1998 European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel. Policy statement on the prevention of pressure ulcers. British Journal of Nursing 1998;7(7):888–90. European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2009 European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel and National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel. Treatment of pressure ulcers: quick reference guide. www.npuap.org 2009. Exton-Smith 1961 Exton-Smith AN, Sherwin RW. The prevention of pressure sores: significance of spontaneous bodily movements. Lancet 1961;2:1124–6. Higgins 2011a Higgins JPT, Deeks JJ, Altman DG (editors). Chapter
  • 205. 16: Special topics in statistics. In: Higgins JPT, Green S editor(s). Cochrane Handbook for Systematic Reviews of Interventions. Version 5.1.0. [updated March 2011]. The Cochrane Collaboration, 2011. Higgins 2011b Higgins JPT, Deeks JJ. Chapter 7: Selecting studies and collecting data. In Higgins JPT, Green S (editors). Cochrane Handbook for Systematic Reviews of Interventions Version 5.1.0 [updated March 2011]. The Cochrane Collaboration, 2011. Available from www.cochrane-handbook.org. Higgins 2011c Higgins JPT, Altman DG, on behalf of the Cochrane Statistical Methods Group and the Cochrane Bias Methods Group (editors). Chapter 8: Assessing risk of bias in included studies. In Higgins JPT, Green S (editors). Cochrane Handbook for Systematic Reviews of Interventions Version 5.1.0 [updated March 2011]. The Cochrane Collaboration, 2011.
  • 206. Humphries 2008 Humphries J. Sleep disruption in hospitalised adults. Medical-Surgical Nursing 2008;17(6):391–5. Institute for Healthcare Improvement 2008 Institute for Healthcare Improvement. Getting started kit: prevent pressure ulcers how-to guide 5 million lives campaign. Available at http://www.in.gov/isdh/files/ IHI˙PU˙Getting˙Started˙Supplement˙for˙Rural˙Hospitals.pdf 2008. Jalali 2005 Jalali R, Rezaie M. Predicting pressure ulcer risk: comparing the predictive validity of 4 scales. Advances in Skin and Wound Care 2005;18(2):92–7. Krapfl 2008 Krapfl LA, Gray M. Does regular repositioning prevent pressure ulcers?. Journal of Wound, Ostomy and Continence Nursing 2008;35(6):571–7. Lefebvre 2011
  • 207. Lefebvre C, Manheimer E, Glanville J. Chapter 6: Searching for studies. In: Higgins JPT, Green S (editors). Cochrane Handbook for Systematic Reviews of Interventions Version 5.1.0 [updated March 2011]. The Cochrane Collaboration, 2011. Available from www.cochrane-handbook.org. Lindgren 2004 Lindgren M, Unosson M, Fredrikson M, Ek AC. Immobility--a major risk factor for development of pressure ulcers among adult hospitalised patients: a prospective study. Scandinavian Journal of Caring Sciences 2004;18(1): 57–63. Manorama 2010 Manorama AA, Baek S, Vorro J, Sikorskii A, Bush TR. Blood perfusion and transcutaneous oxygen level characterizations in human skin with changes in normal and shear loads--implications for pressure ulcer formation. Clinical Biomechanics 2010;25(8):823–8. McInnes 2011
  • 208. McInnes E, Jammali-Blasi A, Bell-Syer S, Dumville J, Cullum N. Support surfaces for pressure ulcer prevention. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews 2011, Issue 4. [DOI: 10.1002/14651858.CD001735.pub4] 21Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Moore 2013 Moore Z, Cowman S, Posnett J. An economic analysis of repositioning for the prevention of pressure ulcers. Journal of Clinical Nursing 2013;22:2354-60. Mulligan 2011 Mulligan S, Prentice J, Scott L. WoundsWest Wound Prevalence Survey 2011 State-wide Overview Report. Ambulatory Care Services, Department of Health: Perth, Western Australia. 2011:1–41. National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2007
  • 209. NPUAP pressure ulcer staging and 2007 update. National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel 2007. Nixon 2006 Nixon J, Nelson EA, Cranny G, Iglesias CP, Hawkins K, Cullum NA, et al. Pressure relieving support surfaces: a randomised evaluation. Health Technology Assessment 2006; 10(22):1–180. Norton 1962 Norton D, McLaren R, Exton-Smith AN. An Investigation of Geriatirc Nursing Problems in Hospital. New York: Churchill Livingstone, 1962. NPUAP 2009 National Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel & European Pressure Ulcer Advisory Panel. Prevention and treatment of pressure ulcers: clinical practice guideline. NPUAP & EPUAP. Washington, 2009. Palmen 1987 Palmen NGM. Prevention of pressure sores in a general
  • 210. hospital: a study into the effect of a nursing intervention focusing on pressure sore prevention. Unpublished Masters Thesis, Maastricht University 1987. Polit 2010 Polit D, Gillespie B. Intention-to-treat in randomized controlled trials: recommendations for a total trial strategy. Research in Nursing & Health 2010;33:355–68. Queensland Health 2008 Queensland Health. Pressure ulcer prevalence audit, 2008. Queensland Health Patient Safety Centre 2008. Queensland Health 2009 Queensland Health. Pressure ulcer prevention and management resource guidelines. The State of Queensland. Queensland Health, Brisbane 2009. Raymond 2004 Raymond I, Ancoli-Israel S, Choiniere M. Sleep disturbances, pain and analgesia in adults hospitalised for burn injuries. Sleep Medicine 2004;5:551–9.
  • 211. Reddy 2006 Reddy M, Gill S, Rochon P. Preventing pressure ulcers: A systematic review. JAMA 2006;296(8):974–84. Schuurman 2009 Schuurman JP, Schoonhoven L, Defloor T, Van Engelshoven I, Van Ramshorst B, Buskens E. Economic evaluation of pressure ulcer care: a cost minimization analysis of preventative strategies. Nurse Economics 2009;27(6): 390–400. Schünemann 2011 Schünemann HJ, Oxman AD, Higgins JPT, Vist GE, Glasziou P, Guyatt GH. Chapter 11. Presenting results and ’Summary of findings’ tables. In Higgins JPT, Green S (editors). Cochrane Handbook for Systematic Reviews of Interventions Version 5.1.0 [updated March 2011]. The Cochrane Collaboration, 2011. Available from www.cochrane-handbook.org. Shemilt 2010
  • 212. Shemilt I, Thomas J, Morciano M. A web-based tool for adjusting costs to a specific target currency and price year. Evidence and Policy 2010;6:51–9. Shemilt 2011 Shemilt I, Mugford M, Byford S, Drummond M, Eisenstein E, Knapp M. Chapter 15: Incorporating economics evidence. In: Higgins JPT, Green S (editors). Cochrane Handbook for Systematic Reviews of Interventions Version 5.1.0 [updated March 2011]. The Cochrane Collaboration, 2011. Available from www.cochrane-handbook.org. SIGN 2011 Scottish Intercollegiate Guidelines Network. Search Filters. http://www.sign.ac.uk/methodology/filters.html 2011. Smith 1990 Smith AM, Malone JA. Preventing pressure ulcers in institutionalised elders: assessing the effects of small, unscheduled shifts in body position. Decubitus 1990;3(4): 20–4.
  • 213. Sterne 2011 Sterne JAC, Egger M, Moher D, on behalf of the Cochrane Bias Methods Group (editors). Chapter 10: Addressing reporting biases. In: Higgins JPT, Green S (editors). Cochrane Handbook for Systematic Reviews of Interventions Version 5.1.0 [updated March 2011]. The Cochrane Collaboration, 2011. Available from www.cochrane-handbook.org. The CONSORT Statement 2010 The CONSORT Group. The CONSORT Statement . http://www.consort-statement.org/consort-statement/ 2012. Thomas 1996 Thomas DR, Goode PS, Tarquine PH, Allman RM. Hospital-acquired pressure ulcers and risk of death. Journal of the American Geriatrics Society 1996;44:1435–40. Thompson 2005 Thompson D. An evaluation of the Waterlow pressure ulcer
  • 214. risk-assessment tool. British Journal of Nursing 1995;14(8): 455–9. Trinkoff 2001 Trinkoff A, Storr C, Lipscomb J. Physically demanding work and inadequate sleep, pain, medication use and absenteeism in registered nurses. Journal of Occupational and Environmental Medicine 2001;43(4):355–63. 22Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Vanderwee 2005 Vanderwee K, Grypdonck M, Defloor T. Effectiveness of an alternating pressure air mattress for the prevention of pressure ulcers. Age and Ageing 2005;34:261–7. Vieira 2009 Vieira E, Kumar S. Safety analysis of patient transfers and handling tasks. Quality and Safety in Health Care 2009;18:
  • 215. 380–4. ∗ Indicates the major publication for the study 23Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. C H A R A C T E R I S T I C S O F S T U D I E S Characteristics of included studies [ordered by study ID] Defloor 2005 Methods Study design: 5-armed cluster RCT with a 4-week (28- day) follow-up period (only 4 arms analysed in this review - see below) Quote: “Each ward applied the prevention scheme selected for a period of 4 weeks. The randomisation procedure was repeated for a second period of 4 weeks. During the second period each ward used a different prevention scheme than used in the first period” (pp 39) Ethics and informed consent: ethics approval and consent obtained.
  • 216. Sample size calculation: yes. ITT analysis: participants analysed in the groups to which they were assigned, but data were incomplete for 24 participants, and they were not included in the analysis Quote: “The observations were incomplete in the case of 24 patients.” Participants Location: 32 wards across 11 nursing homes in Flanders, Belgium Baseline data reported in relation to group comparisons for age, gender and Braden scale scores Mean ages: Group A: 85.2 years (± 7.2) Group B: 85.2 years (± 6.2) Group C: 84.7 years (± 7.7) Group D: 85.4 years (± 7.3) Inclusion criteria: 838 people fulfilled inclusion criteria. This review excludes partici- pants from the usual care group who received care that was different in terms of both support surface AND repositioning
  • 217. 1. Geriatric residents with a Braden score of < 17 or a Norton score of < 12 2. Informed consent of the patient/family. 3. No PU at time of recruitment to study. Exclusion criteria: none stated, but total of 1114 people excluded. Interventions Aim(s): to investigate the effect of 4 different preventative regimes involving either fre- quent turning (2- to 3-hourly) or the use of a pressure-reducing mattress in combination with less frequent turning (4- to 6-hourly) Group A: 2-hourly turning regimen on standard mattress (65 randomised, 63 analysed) Group B: 3-hourly turning regimen on standard mattress (65 randomised, 58 analysed) Group C: 4-hourly turning regimen on viscoelastic polyurethane (pressure-relieving) mattress (67 randomised, 66 analysed) Group D: 6-hourly turning regimen on viscoelastic polyurethane (pressure-relieving) mattress (65 randomised, 63 analysed) Alternating turning positions: semi-Fowlers with feet elevated
  • 218. 30o alternating with 30 o lateral rotation, pillow placement under back from shoulder on standard mattress Specified sitting position: experimental group sitting periods were recorded but not standardised; they sat on thick air cushions. Backrest tilt on chair, legs on footrest but heels not supported. Cushion for back Group 2 Control: n = 576 patients. Care given according to patients’ level of risk; water mattresses, alternating mattresses, 24Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Defloor 2005 (Continued) sheepskins and gel cushions; based on nurses’ clinical judgement. No PU risk assessment tool used. For the purposes of this review we have disregarded this group since their care was highly heterogeneous and differed systematically from the others in terms
  • 219. of BOTH the support surface provision policy AND the (absence of a) repositioning policy. Study date(s): not stated. Outcomes Primary outcome: incidence of a PU (any category) during a 28-day period. Seondary outcomes: risk assessment using Braden and Norton scores. Time points: twice weekly for 4 weeks Notes Not reported whether water mattresses, alternating mattresses, sheepskins and gel cush- ions were used singly or in combination with each other Risk of bias Bias Authors’ judgement Support for judgement Random sequence generation (selection bias) Low risk Quote:“Using computerised randomisa- tion tables, the prevention schemes were randomly allocated to 32 wards (table 1) Randomisation also occurred over a sec-
  • 220. ond 4-week period. During this second pe- riod, each ward used a different prevention scheme than used in the first 4-week period (pp. 39) Diagram of randomisation schedule in- cluded in the paper as a table pp 39 Allocation concealment (selection bias) Unclear risk Quote: “a sealed envelope containing all the room numbers in a random order was opened. The first 5 patients who satisfied the inclusion criteria were included.” Quote: “labour intensive nature of some of the prevention schemes, the number of patients participating in the experimental groups was limited to 5 per ward.” Comment: concern that allocation not fully concealed Blinding of participants and personnel (performance bias)
  • 221. All outcomes High risk Quote: “’It was impossible to blind the nurses for preventative care.” Comment: Not blinded Blinding of outcome assessment (detection bias) All outcomes High risk Quote: “The nurses were blinded for the Braden and Norton scores of their individ- ual patients.” Comment: impossible for nursing staff to be blinded due to the differences in the 25Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Defloor 2005 (Continued) types and varieties of turning regimens
  • 222. Incomplete outcome data (attrition bias) All outcomes High risk Flow chart (fig 1, pp 41) showed patient attrition across each of the 5 groups Quotes: “Of the 838 included patients, 761 patients completed the 4-week study period.” “The data on three patients were incom- plete and it could not be guaranteed that the protocol was strictly followed. Those patients were excluded.” Comment: ITT analysis not implemented Selective reporting (reporting bias) Unclear risk Comment: clinical outcomes were pre- sented in Tables 2 and 3 of the paper. A published protocol was not available. Mea- sures used reflect aims of the intervention and outcomes
  • 223. Other bias Low risk None identified. Moore 2011 Methods Study design: 2-armed cluster RCT with a 4-week (28- day) follow-up period Ethics and informed consent: ethics approval and consent obtained. Sample size calculation: yes. ITT analysis: yes, all participants randomised were analysed. Participants Location: 12 hospital sites with long-term residents in Ireland. Mean age: not reported Baseline data reported in relation to group comparisons for age, gender and Braden scale scores Inclusion criteria: 1. In-patient in a long term geriatric facility. 2. Over 65 years of age. 3. At risk of PU development using the activity and mobility components of Braden scale 4. No PU at time of recruitment to study.
  • 224. 5. No medical condition that would preclude the use of repositioning 6. Consent. Exclusion criteria: patients with existing PU. Total of 57 patients excluded. Interventions Aim(s): to examine whether repositioning using 30° tilt and 3-h repositioning reduces the incidence of PU compared with usual care Group 1: 30° tilt (n = 99 participants randomised, 99 analysed) Repositioning by clinical staff using 30° tilt at night (left side, back, right side, back) 3- h overnight (8 pm-8 am). During the day, position changes occurred 2-3h Group 2: Usual care (n = 114 participants randomised, 99 analysed) Usual care consisted of repositioning by clinical staff every 6-h using the 90° tilt (left 26Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
  • 225. Moore 2011 (Continued) side, back, right side, back) overnight, (8 pm-8 am). During the day, position changes occurred 2- to 3-h Co-interventions : participants in both groups nursed as per planned care regarding nutritional regimens, toileting, changing of incontinence pads, preparation for feeding, and pressure redistribution devices on chairs. Repositioned every 2- to 3-h during the day. Outcomes Primary outcome: incidence of all PUs during a 28- day period Quote: “The EPUAP pressure ulcer (PU) classification system, ranging from non-blanch- ing erythema of intact skin to full scale tissue destruction” (Grades I to IV) Quote: “A pressure ulcer was defined as localised areas of tissue damage caused to skin and underlying soft tissue caused by sustained mechanical loading and shearing forces.” Secondary outcomes: • Risk assessment using Braden scale components to predict PU
  • 226. development: • Activity scores • Mobility • Economic outcomes: 1) mean daily nurse time for repositioning, 2) nurse time cost per patient, 3) cost of patient free of PU; and, 4) projected annual cost Validity of measures: inter-rater reliability not reported, but quote: “The skin was then assessed by the assigned key staff member, the clinical manager, and the researcher. Agree- ment between assessors was reached by comparing patients’ skin condition to images of the EPUAP grading system.” Time points: weekly follow-up over 4 weeks. Notes PU risk status on study entry not stated by group. Imbalances in cluster size. ICC used in analysis and reported in text, Kish design effect reported (pp 2639) Risk of bias Bias Authors’ judgement Support for judgement
  • 227. Random sequence generation (selection bias) Low risk Quote: “The clusters were the specific study sites (n=12) and these were randomly al- located to either the intervention group or the control group.” Quote: “The allocation was generated by a statistician not directly involved with the study and was determined using comput- erised randomisation.” Allocation concealment (selection bias) Low risk Quote: “The allocation was generated by a statistician not directly involved with the study and was determined using comput- erised randomisation.” Quote: “ . . . allocation concealment was achieved through use of distance randomi- sation, meaning that the statistician, not the researcher, controlled the randomisa-
  • 228. 27Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Moore 2011 (Continued) tion sequence.” Blinding of participants and personnel (performance bias) All outcomes High risk Quote: ’The research design employed was . . . open label, pragmatic“ (pp 2635) Comment: Impossible for participants and nurses to be blinded. Blinding of outcome assessment (detection bias) All outcomes High risk Quote: “The skin was then assessed by the assigned key staff member, the clinical
  • 229. nurse manager and the researcher. Agree- ment between assessors was achieved by comparing the participant’s skin condition to the images on the EPUAP grading sys- tem.” Comment: not stated, but most likely im- possible. In an effort to minimise this form of bias, several assessors were used, although inter-rater reliability data were not pre- sented Incomplete outcome data (attrition bias) All outcomes Low risk Quote: ”Data were analysed using SPPS version 13 on an intention to treat (ITT) basis.” Flow chart (fig 3, pp 2639) showed pa- tient attrition across the 2 groups, but same number of patients who were randomised
  • 230. were also analysed Selective reporting (reporting bias) Low risk Comment: clinical outcome, development of PU was reported. A published protocol was not available. Measures used reflect aims of the intervention and outcome Other bias Unclear risk 1. No table/data to show baseline comparisons for each group and whether PU risk was equivalent at study entry. 2. Economic data: The rationale for changing between outcome measures of “patient free of ulcer” and “pressure ulcer avoided” is unclear. In this instance these outcome measures would appear to be equivalent since the number of patients developing an ulcer and the number of PU developing during the trial was the same (n=16).
  • 231. 28Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Young 2004 Methods Study design: RCT (groupings for allocation not reported) with a 24-h follow-up period Ethics and informed consent: ethics approval and consent obtained Sample size calculation: yes ITT analysis: reported as ITT Participants Location: medical ward of an acute general hospital in Wales, UK Mean age: Group 1: 70.1 years (± 11.1) Group 2: 70.5 years (± 14.7) Baseline data reported in relation to group comparisons for age, gender, weight, height and Waterlow scale scores Inclusion criteria:
  • 232. 1. Elderly patients 2. At risk of developing a pressure ulcer using Waterlow 3. Able to lie in 30° tilt position 4. Given informed consent 5. No existing pressure damage 6. Caucasian Exclusion criteria: not stated Interventions Aim(s): to examine the effects of the 30° tilt in reducing non-blanchable erythema Group 1 Intervention: n = 23 patients randomised, 18 analysed Repositioning using 30° tilt (left side, back, right side, back) 2- 3-hourly overnight, 2-3- hourly during the day Sacrum and heels free from contact with support surface Support mattress: alternating pressure mattress or low air loss mattress Group 2 Control: n = 23 patients randomised, 21 analysed. 90° lateral and supine positions 2-3-hourly overnight, 2-3- hourly during the day Support mattress: low air loss mattress.
  • 233. Study date(s): April-July 1999 Outcomes Primary outcome: incidence of non-blanchable erythema during a 24-h period Quote: “NBE was used as a definition for pressure damage.” Validity of measures: not reported Time points: one Notes Risk of bias Bias Authors’ judgement Support for judgement Random sequence generation (selection bias) Unclear risk Quote:“The randomisation was based on block allocation“ Comment: No mention of how the blocks were generated (i.e., computer or random number table) or allocation ratio to each block. Thus the process for electing the blocks is unclear 29Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
  • 234. (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Young 2004 (Continued) Allocation concealment (selection bias) Unclear risk Quote: “specific intervention being se- lected by sequential opening of sealed opaque envelopes.” Quote: “The ward staff were then handed the sequentially numbered envelopes con- taining randomisation code and the re- searcher left the clinical area.” Comment: This trial used blocked ran- domization with group assignments being revealed after recruitment, therefore there is the potential to be able to predict future assignments Potential for interference with envelopes,
  • 235. which are more susceptible to manipula- tion than are other approaches. Blinding of participants and personnel (performance bias) All outcomes High risk Comment: not stated. Impossible for nurs- ing staff to be blinded due the differences in the intervention and usual care. Difficult to conceal from participants and nursing staff once patients were randomised Blinding of outcome assessment (detection bias) All outcomes Low risk Quote: ”The next morning the researcher was unaware of which method of reposi- tioning had been used, therefore masking the researcher to treatment allocation.” Comment: researcher blinded totreatment
  • 236. group Incomplete outcome data (attrition bias) All outcomes High risk Quote: “A total of 7 patients had no post intervention data collected.” Quote: “Statistical comparisons were made on an intention-to-treat basis.” “No post-intervention assessment of pres- sure damage was performed on any of these seven subjects.” Comment: use of ITT stated, however, participants were excluded from the analy- sis if they discontinued the intervention or were nursed on a foam mattress (pp 92) Selective reporting (reporting bias) Low risk Comment: clinical outcome, development of PU was reported. A published protocol was not available. Measures used reflect aims of the intervention and outcome
  • 237. Other bias Low risk Comments: None identified. 30Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Abbreviations COI = conflict of interest fig = figure h = hour(s) ICC = intra-cluster correlation coefficient ITT = intention to treat analysis NBE = non-blanchable erythema pp = page(s) PU = pressure ulcer Characteristics of excluded studies [ordered by study ID] Study Reason for exclusion Vanderwee 2007 Inclusion/Exclusion criteria: patients who had a pre-existing grade 1 PU (i.e. non-blanchable erythema) were
  • 238. included, and those who did not have non-blanchable erythema (n = 1944) were excluded (fig 1, pp 63) Abbreviations fig = figure PU = pressure ulcer Characteristics of ongoing studies [ordered by study ID] Bergstrom Trial name or title TURN Study Methods Cluster RCT Participants 66 nursing short stay (< 7 days) and long stay (> 90 days) aged care residents 65 years and over Interventions In-bed repositioning every 2 h compared to 3 h or 4 h and associated continence care Outcomes Incidence of PU Starting date Started in 2008 and completed in June 2011 Contact information Nancy Bergstrom Theodore J and Mary E Trumble Professor of Aging Research Associate Dean for Research (Interim) School of Nursing University of Texas Health Science Center-Houston
  • 239. 6901 Bertner Ave, 6.625 Houston 77030 Email: [email protected] 31Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Bergstrom (Continued) Notes Correspondence with N Bergstrom. Study has been submitted for publication and is under review at the time of writing this review 32Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. D A T A A N D A N A L Y S E S Comparison 1. 2h versus 3h repositioning on standard hospital mattresses Outcome or subgroup title No. of
  • 240. studies No. of participants Statistical method Effect size 1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to 4) 1 121 Risk Ratio (M-H, Fixed, 95% CI) 0.90 [0.69, 1.16] 2 Pressure ulcer risk (category 2 to 4) 1 121 Risk Ratio (M-H, Fixed, 95% CI) 0.59 [0.28, 1.26] Comparison 2. 4h versus 6h repositioning on viscoelastic foam mattresses Outcome or subgroup title No. of studies No. of participants Statistical method Effect size 1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to 4) 1 129 Risk Ratio (M-H, Fixed, 95% CI) 0.73 [0.53, 1.02]
  • 241. 2 Pressure ulcer risk (category 2 to 4) 1 129 Risk Ratio (M-H, Fixed, 95% CI) 0.19 [0.04, 0.84] Comparison 3. 30o tilt 3-hourly overnight versus 90o tilt overnight Outcome or subgroup title No. of studies No. of participants Statistical method Effect size 1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to 4) 2 252 Risk Ratio (M-H, Random, 95% CI) 0.62 [0.10, 3.97] 33Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Analysis 1.1. Comparison 1 2h versus 3h repositioning on standard hospital mattresses, Outcome 1
  • 242. Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to 4). Review: Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults Comparison: 1 2h versus 3h repositioning on standard hospital mattresses Outcome: 1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to 4) Study or subgroup 2h repositioning 3h repositioning Risk Ratio Weight Risk Ratio n/N n/N M-H,Fixed,95% CI M-H,Fixed,95% CI Defloor 2005 39/63 40/58 100.0 % 0.90 [ 0.69, 1.16 ] Total (95% CI) 63 58 100.0 % 0.90 [ 0.69, 1.16 ] Total events: 39 (2h repositioning), 40 (3h repositioning) Heterogeneity: not applicable Test for overall effect: Z = 0.82 (P = 0.41) Test for subgroup differences: Not applicable 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 Favours 2h repositioning Favours 3h repositioning Analysis 1.2. Comparison 1 2h versus 3h repositioning on standard hospital mattresses, Outcome 2 Pressure ulcer risk (category 2 to 4). Review: Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
  • 243. Comparison: 1 2h versus 3h repositioning on standard hospital mattresses Outcome: 2 Pressure ulcer risk (category 2 to 4) Study or subgroup 2h repositioning 3h repositioning Risk Ratio Weight Risk Ratio n/N n/N M-H,Fixed,95% CI M-H,Fixed,95% CI Defloor 2005 9/63 14/58 100.0 % 0.59 [ 0.28, 1.26 ] Total (95% CI) 63 58 100.0 % 0.59 [ 0.28, 1.26 ] Total events: 9 (2h repositioning), 14 (3h repositioning) Heterogeneity: not applicable Test for overall effect: Z = 1.36 (P = 0.17) Test for subgroup differences: Not applicable 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 Favours 2h Favours 3h 34Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Analysis 2.1. Comparison 2 4h versus 6h repositioning on
  • 244. viscoelastic foam mattresses, Outcome 1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to 4). Review: Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults Comparison: 2 4h versus 6h repositioning on viscoelastic foam mattresses Outcome: 1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to 4) Study or subgroup 4h repositioning 6h repositioning Risk Ratio Weight Risk Ratio n/N n/N M-H,Fixed,95% CI M-H,Fixed,95% CI Defloor 2005 30/66 39/63 100.0 % 0.73 [ 0.53, 1.02 ] Total (95% CI) 66 63 100.0 % 0.73 [ 0.53, 1.02 ] Total events: 30 (4h repositioning), 39 (6h repositioning) Heterogeneity: not applicable Test for overall effect: Z = 1.85 (P = 0.065) Test for subgroup differences: Not applicable 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 Favours 4h repositioning Favours 6h repositioning Analysis 2.2. Comparison 2 4h versus 6h repositioning on viscoelastic foam mattresses, Outcome 2 Pressure ulcer risk (category 2 to 4).
  • 245. Review: Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults Comparison: 2 4h versus 6h repositioning on viscoelastic foam mattresses Outcome: 2 Pressure ulcer risk (category 2 to 4) Study or subgroup 4h repositioning 6h repositioning Risk Ratio Weight Risk Ratio n/N n/N M-H,Fixed,95% CI M-H,Fixed,95% CI Defloor 2005 2/66 10/63 100.0 % 0.19 [ 0.04, 0.84 ] Total (95% CI) 66 63 100.0 % 0.19 [ 0.04, 0.84 ] Total events: 2 (4h repositioning), 10 (6h repositioning) Heterogeneity: not applicable Test for overall effect: Z = 2.20 (P = 0.028) Test for subgroup differences: Not applicable 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 Favours 4h Favours 6h 35Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
  • 246. Analysis 3.1. Comparison 3 30o tilt 3-hourly overnight versus 90o tilt overnight, Outcome 1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to 4). Review: Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults Comparison: 3 30 o tilt 3-hourly overnight versus 90 o tilt overnight Outcome: 1 Pressure ulcer risk (category 1 to 4) Study or subgroup 30 o tilt 3-hourly overnight 90 o tilt overnight Risk Ratio Weight Risk Ratio n/N n/N M- H,Random,95%
  • 247. CI M- H,Random,95% CI Moore 2011 3/99 13/114 54.7 % 0.27 [ 0.08, 0.91 ] Young 2004 3/18 2/21 45.3 % 1.75 [ 0.33, 9.34 ] Total (95% CI) 117 135 100.0 % 0.62 [ 0.10, 3.97 ] Total events: 6 (30 o tilt 3-hourly overnight), 15 (90 o tilt overnight) Heterogeneity: Tau2 = 1.24; Chi2 = 3.21, df = 1 (P = 0.07); I2 =69% Test for overall effect: Z = 0.50 (P = 0.62) Test for subgroup differences: Not applicable 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000 Favours 30 tilt Favours 90 tilt A P P E N D I C E S Appendix 1. Ovid MEDLINE, Ovid EMBASE and EBSCO CINAHL effectiveness search strategies
  • 248. Ovid MEDLINE 1 exp Pressure Ulcer/ (5231) 2 (pressure adj (ulcer* or sore*)).tw. (4365) 3 (decubitus adj (ulcer* or sore*)).tw. (579) 4 (bedsore* or (bed adj sore*)).tw. (245) 5 or/1-4 (6546) 6 exp Posture/ (27564) 7 (reposition* or re-position*).tw. (6619) 8 position*.tw. (235791) 9 (turn* adj5 patient*).tw. (3591) 10 (turn* adj5 interval*).tw. (126) 11 (turn* adj5 frequen*).tw. (777) 12 turning.tw. (7625) 13 (body adj5 posture*).tw. (1092) 14 pressure relie*.tw. (417) 15 (mobilis* or mobiliz*).tw. (34978) 16 or/6-15 (301537) 36Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
  • 249. (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. 17 5 and 16 (834) 18 randomized controlled trial.pt. (240548) 19 controlled clinical trial.pt. (39492) 20 randomized.ab. (195665) 21 placebo.ab. (91366) 22 clinical trials as topic.sh. (79465) 23 randomly.ab. (134439) 24 trial.ti. (72586) 25 or/18-24 (543387) 26 (animals not (humans and animals)).sh. (1612439) 27 25 not 26 (494803) 28 17 and 27 (107) Ovid EMBASE 1 exp Decubitus/ (9094) 2 (pressure adj (ulcer$ or sore$)).tw. (5623)
  • 250. 3 (decubitus adj (ulcer$ or sore$)).tw. (773) 4 (bedsore$ or (bed adj sore$)).tw. (415) 5 or/1-4 (10271) 6 exp patient positioning/ (10577) 7 (reposition$ or re-position$).tw. (9126) 8 position$.tw. (316430) 9 (turn$ adj5 patient$).tw. (5673) 10 (turn$ adj5 interval$).tw. (168) 11 (turn$ adj5 frequen$).tw. (1215) 12 turning.tw. (10505) 13 (body adj5 posture$).tw. (1519) 14 or/6-13 (344598) 15 5 and 14 (1057) 16 Randomized controlled trials/ (24734) 17 Single-Blind Method/ (15386) 18 Double-Blind Method/ (85329) 19 Crossover Procedure/ (31526) 20 (random$ or factorial$ or crossover$ or cross over$ or cross-
  • 251. over$ or placebo$ or assign$ or allocat$ or volunteer$).ti,ab. (930632) 21 (doubl$ adj blind$).ti,ab. (89452) 22 (singl$ adj blind$).ti,ab. (9568) 23 or/16-22 (964333) 24 animal/ (717007) 25 human/ (8542238) 26 24 not 25 (478486) 27 23 not 26 (932575) 28 15 and 27 (175) EBSCO CINAHL S16 S5 and S15 S15 S6 or S7 or S8 or S9 or S10 or S11 or S12 or S13 or S14 S14 TI body N5 posture* or AB body N5 posture* S13 TI turning or AB turning S12 TI turn* N5 frequen* or AB turn* N5 frequen* S11 TI turn* N5 interval* or AB turn* N5 interval* S10 TI turn* N5 patient* or AB turn* N5 patient* S9 TI position* or AB position*
  • 252. S8 TI ( reposition* or re-position* ) or AB ( reposition* or re- position* ) S7 (MH “Patient Positioning+”) S6 (MH “Posture+”) 37Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. S5 S1 or S2 or S3 or S4 S4 TI ( bedsore or bed sore ) or AB ( bedsore or bed sore ) S3 TI ( pressure ulcer* or pressure sore* ) or AB ( pressure ulcer* or pressure sore* ) S2 TI decubitus or AB decubitus S1 (MH “Pressure Ulcer”) Appendix 2. Ovid MEDLINE economics search strategy 1 exp Pressure Ulcer/ 2 (pressure adj (ulcer* or sore*)).tw. 3 (decubitus adj (ulcer* or sore*)).tw. 4 (bedsore* or (bed adj sore*)).tw.
  • 253. 5 or/1-4 6 exp Posture/ 7 (reposition* or re-position*).tw. 8 position*.tw. 9 (turn* adj5 patient*).tw. 10 (turn* adj5 interval*).tw. 11 (turn* adj5 frequen*).tw. 12 turning.tw. 13 (body adj5 posture*).tw. 14 pressure relie*.tw. 15 (mobilis* or mobiliz*).tw. 16 or/6-15 17 5 and 16 18 economics/ 19 exp “costs and cost analysis”/ 20 economics, dental/ 21 exp “economics, hospital”/ 22 economics, medical/
  • 254. 23 economics, nursing/ 24 economics, pharmaceutical/ 25 (economic* or cost or costs or costly or costing or price or prices or pricing or pharmacoeconomic*).ti,ab. 26 (expenditure* not energy).ti,ab. 27 value for money.ti,ab. 28 budget*.ti,ab. 29 or/18-28 30 ((energy or oxygen) adj cost).ti,ab. 31 (metabolic adj cost).ti,ab. 32 ((energy or oxygen) adj expenditure).ti,ab. 33 or/30-32 34 29 not 33 35 letter.pt. 36 editorial.pt. 37 historical article.pt. 38 or/35-37 39 34 not 38
  • 255. 40 Animals/ 41 Humans/ 42 40 not (40 and 41) 43 39 not 42 44 17 and 43 38Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Appendix 3. Risk of bias criteria 1. Was the allocation sequence adequately generated? Low risk of bias The investigators describe a random component in the sequence generation process such as: referring to a random number table; using a computer random number generator; coin tossing; shuffling cards or envelopes; throwing dice; drawing of lots. High risk of bias The investigators describe a non-random component in the sequence generation process. Usually, the description would involve some
  • 256. systematic, non-random approach, for example: sequence generated by odd or even date of birth; sequence generated by some rule based on date (or day) of admission; sequence generated by some rule based on hospital or clinic record number. Unclear Insufficient information about the sequence generation process to permit judgment of low or high risk of bias. 2. Was the treatment allocation adequately concealed? Low risk of bias Participants and investigators enrolling participants could not foresee assignment because one of the following, or an equivalent method, was used to conceal allocation: central allocation (including telephone, web-based and pharmacy-controlled randomisation); sequentially-numbered drug containers of identical appearance; sequentially-numbered, opaque, sealed envelopes. High risk of bias Participants or investigators enrolling participants could possibly foresee assignments and thus introduce selection bias, such as allocation based on: using an open random allocation schedule (e.g. a list of random numbers); assignment envelopes were used without
  • 257. appropriate safeguards (e.g. if envelopes were unsealed or non-opaque or not sequentially numbered); alternation or rotation; date of birth; case record number; any other explicitly unconcealed procedure. Unclear Insufficient information to permit judgment of low or high risk of bias. This is usually the case if the method of concealment is not described or not described in sufficient detail to allow a definite judgment, for example if the use of assignment envelopes is described, but it remains unclear whether envelopes were sequentially numbered, opaque and sealed. 3. Blinding - was knowledge of the allocated interventions adequately prevented during the study? Low risk of bias Any one of the following. • No blinding, but the review authors judge that the outcome and the outcome measurement were not likely to be influenced by lack of blinding. • Blinding of participants and key study personnel ensured, and unlikely that the blinding could have been broken.
  • 258. • Either participants or some key study personnel were not blinded, but outcome assessment was blinded and the non- blinding of others unlikely to introduce bias. 39Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. High risk of bias Any one of the following. • No blinding or incomplete blinding, and the outcome or outcome measurement is likely to be influenced by lack of blinding. • Blinding of key study participants and personnel attempted, but likely that the blinding could have been broken. • Either participants or some key study personnel were not blinded, and the non-blinding of others likely to introduce bias. Unclear Either of the following. • Insufficient information to permit judgement of low or high risk of bias.
  • 259. • The study did not address this outcome. 4. Were incomplete outcome data adequately addressed? Low risk of bias Any one of the following. • No missing outcome data. • Reasons for missing outcome data unlikely to be related to true outcome (for survival data, censoring unlikely to be introducing bias). • Missing outcome data balanced in numbers across intervention groups, with similar reasons for missing data across groups. • For dichotomous outcome data, the proportion of missing outcomes compared with observed event risk not enough to have a clinically relevant impact on the intervention effect estimate. • For continuous outcome data, plausible effect size (difference in means or standardised difference in means) among missing outcomes not enough to have a clinically relevant impact on observed effect size. • Missing data have been imputed using appropriate methods. High risk of bias Any one of the following.
  • 260. • Reason for missing outcome data likely to be related to true outcome, with either imbalance in numbers or reasons for missing data across intervention groups. • For dichotomous outcome data, the proportion of missing outcomes compared with observed event risk enough to induce clinically relevant bias in intervention effect estimate. • For continuous outcome data, plausible effect size (difference in means or standardised difference in means) among missing outcomes enough to induce clinically relevant bias in observed effect size. • ‘As-treated’ analysis done with substantial departure of the intervention received from that assigned at randomisation. • Potentially inappropriate application of simple imputation. Unclear Either of the following. • Insufficient reporting of attrition/exclusions to permit judgement of low or high risk of bias (e.g. number randomised not stated, no reasons for missing data provided). • The study did not address this outcome. 5. Are reports of the study free of suggestion of selective
  • 261. outcome reporting? Low risk of bias Either of the following. 40Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. • The study protocol is available and all of the study’s pre- specified (primary and secondary) outcomes that are of interest in the review have been reported in the pre-specified way. • The study protocol is not available, but it is clear that the published reports include all expected outcomes, including those that were pre-specified (convincing text of this nature may be uncommon). High risk of bias Any one of the following. • Not all of the study’s pre-specified primary outcomes have been reported. • One or more primary outcomes are reported using measurements, analysis methods or subsets of the data (e.g.
  • 262. subscales) that were not pre-specified. • One or more reported primary outcomes were not pre-specified (unless clear justification for their reporting is provided, such as an unexpected adverse effect). • One or more outcomes of interest in the review are reported incompletely so that they cannot be entered in a meta-analysis. • The study report fails to include results for a key outcome that would be expected to have been reported for such a study. Unclear Insufficient information to permit judgment of low or high risk of bias. It is likely that the majority of studies will fall into this category. 6. Other sources of potential bias Low risk of bias The study appears to be free of other sources of bias. High risk of bias There is at least one important risk of bias. For example, the study: • had a potential source of bias related to the specific study design used; or
  • 263. • has been claimed to have been fraudulent; or • had some other problem. Unclear There may be a risk of bias, but there is either: • insufficient information to assess whether an important risk of bias exists; or • insufficient rationale or evidence that an identified problem will introduce bias. W H A T ’ S N E W Last assessed as up-to-date: 6 September 2013. 41Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Date Event Description 24 February 2015 Amended Contact details updated. C O N T R I B U T I O N S O F A U T H O R S Wendy Chaboyer: conceived and designed the review, checked the quality of data extraction, analysed or interpreted data, performed
  • 264. part of data analysis or interpretation, performed part of the writing or editing, made an intellectual contribution to, secured funding for and approved the final version of the review prior to submission. Brigid Gillespie: conceived, designed and co-ordinated the review. Extracted data, undertook quality assessment, analysed or interpreted data, performed part of data analysis or interpretation, performed statistical analysis and completed the first draft of the review. Performed part of writing or editing, made an intellectual contribution to and approved final review prior to submission. Wrote to study authors, experts, and companies and acted as guarantor of the review. Elizabeth McInnes: designed the review, extracted data, undertook quality assessment, analysed or interpreted data, performed part of data analysis or interpretation, performed part of writing or editing and made an intellectual contribution to the review. Wrote to study authors, experts, and companies, performed previous work that was the foundation of the current review and approved the final review prior to submission. Bridie Kent: analysed or interpreted data, performed part of
  • 265. data analysis or interpretation, performed part of writing or editing, made an intellectual contribution and approved the final review prior to submission. Jenny Whitty: analysed or interpreted data, performed part of data analysis or interpretation, performed part of writing or editing, made an intellectual contribution, performed economic analysis and approved the final review prior to submission. Lukman Thalib: analysed or interpreted data, performed part of data analysis or interpretation, performed part of writing or editing, made an intellectual contribution and approved the final review prior to submission. Contributions of editorial base Nicky Cullum: advised on methodology, interpretation and protocol content, edited and re-wrote sections of the final review including re-entering and analysing data, approved the final review prior to publication. Sally Bell-Syer: co-ordinated the editorial process, advised on methodology, interpretation and content, edited the protocol. Jo Dumville: checked the re-analysis of the data and checked the final version for publication after NC. Ruth Foxlee: designed the search strategy and edited the search
  • 266. methods section. D E C L A R A T I O N S O F I N T E R E S T Dr Brigid Gillespie; Dr Wendy Chaboyer; Dr Elizabeth McInnes; Dr Bridie Kent; Dr Jennifer Whitty and Dr Lukman Thalib have no conflicts of interest to declare. 42Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. S O U R C E S O F S U P P O R T Internal sources • NHMRC, Australia. The NHMRC provided funding for this review from its Centre of Research Excellence Scheme, which funds one or more of the authors • Jennifer Whitty received a Research Fellowship funded by the Queensland Government Department of Employment, Economic Development and Innovation, Queensland Health and Griffith University, Australia. External sources
  • 267. • The National Institute from Health Research (NIHR) is the sole funder of the Cochrane Wounds Group, UK. D I F F E R E N C E S B E T W E E N P R O T O C O L A N D R E V I E W We had originally planned to undertake subgroup analyses based on type of setting (long-term and acute care) and the type of patient. Although one study was conducted in an acute care setting, the others were set in long-term care facilities, and all with geriatric patients. We have instead, undertaken a subgroup analysis with regard to tilt regimes (i.e. 30o versus 90o tilt) in relation to participants who developed a grade 1 pressure ulcer. I N D E X T E R M S Medical Subject Headings (MeSH) Beds; Cost-Benefit Analysis; Patient Positioning [economics; ∗ methods]; Pressure Ulcer [∗ prevention & control]; Randomized Con- trolled Trials as Topic; Time Factors MeSH check words Adult; Aged; Humans; Middle Aged 43Repositioning for pressure ulcer prevention in adults
  • 268. (Review) Copyright © 2014 The Cochrane Collaboration. Published by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd. Gwynedd Mercy University Frances M. Maguire School of Nursing and Health Professions NUR 231 Evidence-Based Practice in Nursing Evidence-Based Practice Paper Guidelines EBP requires nurses to continuously cultivate a spirit of inquiry. Nurses must identify and appraise the most relevant and best evidence to integrate the evidence into clinical practice. Students will identify and discuss suggested best practice related to an identified clinical issue/problem. 1. Students may work individually or with a partner on this assignment (limit to one partner). One paper submitted per partnership. 2. Using the PICOT question developed in class, perform a search for research studies from professional, scholarly journals (nursing journals preferred) and/or best-practice guidelines from professional organizations. 3. Select at least four studies or guidelines that discuss evidence-based practice related to the specific PICOT question, published within the past 10 years. Do not use an article that is a literature review, synthesis or meta-analysis (consult with Professor Lynn or the research librarian if you have questions or need assistance). 4. Complete the Literature Review Template for the selected sources. This information will form the basis of the written assignment. Paper: 5. Introduce the nursing problem. Provide a clear and concise description of the clinical practice issue/problem. Discuss the reason this topic is important to nursing practice (significance). 6. Translate the clinical nursing practice issue/problem into an
  • 269. investigational question. Identify each component of the PICOT question. The question must include all PICOT components. 7. Provide a discussion of each article, including the clinical problem and relevant background for the focus of the study/guideline. a. If the source discusses a research study, include the research question (purpose), type of study (quantitative or qualitative) and results/conclusions (suggested strategies). b. If the source discusses an evidence-based practice guideline, summarize the guideline (suggested strategies). 8. Describe potential barriers to implementing the research/guideline suggestions. 9. Identify potential strategies to address the barriers. 10. This paper must be written following APA guidelines, Times New Roman 12 double spaced. Include a reference list. Proper grammar, spelling and professional word choice is mandatory. 11. The body of the paper is not to exceed 6 pages. 12. Papers will be submitted through SafeAssign in Blackboard. 13. Refer to the Grading Criteria Rubric posted in Blackboard and the Course Polices in the syllabus. Evidence-Based Practice Paper Format · Title Page · Abstract: Brief summary of the key points of the paper. No need for keywords. · Introduction: Provide a clear and concise description of the clinical practice issue/problem and background. Discuss the reason this topic is important to nursing practice (significance) and include a minimum of one reference for your reasoning. Identify the PICOT question at the end of the Introduction, , including all PI(C)O(T) components. · Review of Literature: Address the required content for each study/guideline. Try to make use of transitional sentences between the discussion of each resource. · Summary of suggested best practices as identified by authors.
  • 270. · Barriers: Identify potential barriers to implementation of the best-practice recommendations in the articles. · Strategies: Identify potential strategies to address the barriers. · Conclusion · References APA format: Make use of the library resources! See APA Style Guide and sample paper on the library’s webpage. Headings are optional, but if you decide to use them, be certain to consult the APA Style Guide. No first person, no pronouns. Citations for a direct quote must have page number. Example: “Donuts make people happy” (Lynn, 2017, p. 3). Tone of writing: Do not refer to authors by first names, and do not identify the title of the article. That is what the reference page is for. Example: Lynn (2017) examined the relationship between eating donuts and being happy.